Promise Technology | E610s | Product manual | Promise Technology E610s Product manual

VTRAK
E-Class
E610f, E610s, E310f, E310s
PRODUCT MANUAL
Version 3.1
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Copyright
© 2009 Promise Technology, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright by Promise Technology, Inc. (Promise Technology). No part of this
manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form without the expressed,
written permission of Promise Technology.
Trademarks
Promise, and the Promise logo are registered in U.S. Patent and Trademark
Office. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Important data protection information
You should back up all data before installing any drive controller or storage
peripheral. Promise Technology is not responsible for any loss of data resulting
from the use, disuse or misuse of this or any other Promise Technology product.
Notice
Although Promise Technology has attempted to ensure the accuracy of the
content of this manual, it is possible that this document may contain technical
inaccuracies, typographical, or other errors. Promise Technology assumes no
liability for any error in this publication, and for damages, whether direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential or otherwise, that may result from such error, including,
but not limited to loss of data or profits.
Promise Technology provides this publication “as is” without warranty of any kind,
either express or implied, including, but not limited to implied warranties of
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
The published information in the manual is subject to change without notice.
Promise Technology reserves the right to make changes in the product design,
layout, and driver revisions without notification to its users.
This version of the Product Manual supersedes all previous versions.
Recommendations
In this Product Manual, the appearance of products made by other companies,
including but not limited to software, servers, and disk drives, is for the purpose of
illustration and explanation only. Promise Technology does not recommend,
endorse, prefer, or support any product made by another manufacturer.
ii
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to VTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
VTrak Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Architectural Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Subsystem and Controller Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Operational Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
E610f and E610s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
E310f and E310s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Warranty and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
BSMI Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
CE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
FCC Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
GOST-R Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
IRAM Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
KCC Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Unpacking the VTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Mounting VTrak in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Installing Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Drive Slot Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
AAMUX Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Installing Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Making Management and Data Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Fibre Channel SAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Fibre Channel DAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Fibre Channel with JBOD Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Fibre Channel SAN – No Single Point of Failure – JBOD Expansion
24
SAS DAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
SAS Cascaded Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
SAS with JBOD Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
SAS DAS – No Single Point of Failure – JBOD Expansion . . .33
Setting Up Serial Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Optional UPS Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Connecting the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
iii
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Chapter 3: VTrak Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Setting up the Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
VTrak Default IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Virtual Management Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Physical Management Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Setting up VTrak with the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Setting up VTrak with the CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Setting system date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Making Management Port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Viewing IP address and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Making Controller Maintenance Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Exiting the CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Setting Up WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Logging into WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Choosing a Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Creating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Logging out of WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Using WebPAM PROe over the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Logging into WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Regular Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Secure Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Choosing a Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Perusing the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Using the Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Using Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Using Management View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Viewing the Event Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Logging out of WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Working with the Storage Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Viewing Other Subsytems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Updating the List of Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Logging into a Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Hiding the Other Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Working with Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Viewing Subsystem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Saving a System Service Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Setting an Alias for the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Setting Redundancy for the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
iv
Contents
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe, cont.
Working with Subsystems, cont.
Setting Cache Mirroring for the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Setting Subsystem Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Making NTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Synchronizing with a NTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Viewing the Runtime Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Saving the Runtime Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Clearing the Runtime Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Viewing NVRAM Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Saving NVRAM Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Clearing NVRAM Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Viewing Current Background Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Making Background Activity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Running Background Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Running Media Patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Running PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Viewing Scheduled Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Scheduling an Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Deleting a Scheduled Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Viewing Lock Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Setting the Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Renewing the Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Releasing the Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Viewing User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Creating a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Setting-up Event Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Changing Another User’s Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Changing Your Own User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Changing Another User’s Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Changing Your Own Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Viewing User Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Logging out Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Managing the Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Making Virtual Management Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Making Controller Management Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
v
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe, cont.
Managing Fibre Channel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Viewing Fibre Channel Node Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Making Fibre Channel Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Viewing SFP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Viewing Fibre Channel Logged-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Managing SAS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Viewing SAS Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Making SAS Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Viewing SAS Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Viewing SAS Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Managing Storage Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Adding an Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Deleting an Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Viewing the LUN Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Enabling LUN Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Adding a LUN Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Editing a LUN Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Monitoring Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Managing Software Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Making Event Notification Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Making SLP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Making Web Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Making Telnet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Making SSH Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Making SNMP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Managing SNMP Trap Sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Making CIM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Making Netsend Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Managing Netsend Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Exporting the User Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Exporting a Configuration Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Importing a User Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Importing a Configuration Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Updating the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Viewing Flash Image Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Restoring Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
vi
Contents
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe, cont.
Clearing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Saving a System Service Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Shutting Down the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Monitoring the Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Starting Up After Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Monitoring the Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Restarting the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Monitoring the Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Managing Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Viewing the Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Locating a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Viewing Controller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Viewing Controller Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Making Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Clearing an Orphan Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Managing Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Viewing the Enclosures Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Locating an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Viewing Enclosure Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Viewing Enclosure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Making Enclosure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Viewing FRU VPD Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Checking the Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Reconditioning a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Silencing the Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Making Buzzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Testing the Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Managing Physical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Viewing a List of Physical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Identifying a Physical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Making Global Physical Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Viewing Physical Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Viewing Physical Drive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Making Physical Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Forcing a Physical Drive Offline or Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Managing UPS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Viewing a List of UPS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Making UPS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Viewing UPS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
vii
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe, cont.
Managing Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Viewing a List of Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Creating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Creating a Disk Array – Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Creating a Disk Array – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Creating a Disk Array – Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Deleting a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Viewing Disk Array Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Making Disk Array Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Creating a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Deleting a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Migrating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Rebuilding a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Running Media Patrol on a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Running PDM on a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Transitioning a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Preparing a Disk Array for Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Managing Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Viewing Information for All Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Viewing Logical Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Viewing Logical Drive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Making Logical Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Initializing a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Running Redundancy Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Viewing the Logical Drive Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Making Logical Drive LUN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Managing Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Viewing a List of Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Locating a Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Creating a Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Deleting Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Making Spare Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Running Spare Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Working with the Logical Drive Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Viewing a List of All Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Viewing Individual Logical Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
viii
Contents
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Initial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Making a Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Making a Telnet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Making a SSH Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Accessing Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Exiting the CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Logging Out of the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Logging Back Into the CLI and CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Running Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Managing the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Setting an Alias for the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Setting Redundancy for the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Setting Cache Mirroring for the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Running Media Patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Locking or Unlocking the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Setting Subsystem Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Making NTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Synchronizing with a NTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Managing the Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Viewing Controller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Clearing an Orphan Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Making Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Locating the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Managing the Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Viewing the Enclosures Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Viewing Enclosure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Making Enclosure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Viewing FRU VPD Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Viewing Power Supply Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Locating a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Viewing Cooling Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Viewing Temperature Sensor Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Viewing Voltage Sensor Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Checking the Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Reconditioning a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Locating an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Viewing Enclosure Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
ix
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU, cont.
Managing Physical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Viewing a List of Physical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Making Global Physical Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Viewing Physical Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Viewing Physical Drive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Setting an Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Forcing a Physical Drive Offline or Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Locating a Physical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Managing Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Viewing a List of Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Creating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Creating a Disk Array – Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Creating a Disk Array – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Creating a Disk Array – Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Deleting a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Viewing Disk Array Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Setting an Alias for a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Accepting an Incomplete Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Enabling Media Patrol and PDM on a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . .195
Preparing the Disk Array for Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Rebuilding a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Migrating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Running PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Running Transition on a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Locating a Disk Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Creating a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Deleting a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Managing Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Viewing a list of Spare Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Creating a Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Making Spare Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Running Spare Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Deleting a Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Managing Logical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Viewing Logical Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Viewing Logical Drive Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Viewing the Logical Drive Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Making Logical Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
x
Contents
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU, cont.
Managing Logical Drives, cont.
Initializing a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Running Redundancy Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Locating a Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Managing the Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Making Virtual Management Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Making Controller Management Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Managing Fibre Channel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Viewing Node Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Viewing Fibre Channel Logged-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Making Fibre Channel Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Viewing SFP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Adding a Fibre Channel Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Managing SAS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Viewing SAS Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Making SAS Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Viewing SAS Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Viewing SAS Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Adding a SAS Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Managing Background Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Viewing Current Background Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Making Background Activity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Working with the Event Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Viewing Runtime Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Clearing Runtime Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Viewing NVRAM Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Clearing NVRAM Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Working with LUN Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Viewing a List of Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Enabling LUN Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Adding an Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Mapping a LUN to an Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Deleting an Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Managing UPS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Viewing a List of UPS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Making UPS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Viewing UPS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
xi
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU, cont.
Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Viewing User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Creating a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Changing Another User’s Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Changing Your Own User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Changing Another User’s Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Changing Your Own Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Working with Software Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Making Email Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Making SLP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Making Webserver Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Making Telnet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Making SSH Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Making SNMP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Managing SNMP Trap Sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Making CIM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Making Netsend Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Managing Netsend Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Flashing through TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Viewing Flash Image Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Clearing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Restoring Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Shutting Down the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Shutting down the VTrak – Telnet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Shutting down the VTrak – SSH Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Shutting down the VTrak – Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Starting Up After Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Starting up the VTrak – Telnet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Starting up the VTrak – SSH Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Starting up the VTrak – Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Restarting the Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Restarting VTrak – Telnet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Restarting VTrak – SSH Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Restarting VTrak – Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Making Buzzer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
xii
Contents
Chapter 6: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Updating the Firmware in WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Downloading the Firmware Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Updating Firmware from TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Updating Firmware from your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Updating the Firmware in the CLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Downloading the Firmware Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Updating the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, Telnet . . . . . . . . . .255
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, SSH . . . . . . . . . . .257
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, Serial . . . . . . . . . .258
Replacing a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Remove the Old Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Install a New Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Replacing a Cooling Unit Fan or Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Replacing a Cache Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Replacing a RAID Controller – Dual Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Removing the old controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Installing the new controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Replacing a RAID Controller – Single Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Removing the old controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Installing the new controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Chapter 7: Technology Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Introduction to RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
RAID 0 – Stripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
RAID 1 – Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
RAID 1E – Enhanced Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
RAID 5 – Block and Parity Stripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
RAID 6 – Block and Double Parity Stripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
RAID 10 – Mirror + Stripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
RAID 50 – Striping of Distributed Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
RAID 60 – Striping of Double Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
xiii
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Chapter 7: Technology Background, cont.
Choosing a RAID Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
RAID 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
RAID 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
RAID 1E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
RAID 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
RAID 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
RAID 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
RAID 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
RAID 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Choosing Stripe Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Choosing Sector Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
2 TB Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Cache Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Read Cache Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Write Cache Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Adaptive Writeback Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Host Cache Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Forced Read Ahead Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Cache Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Failover and Failback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
LUN Affinity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Disk Array Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Logical Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Failover and Failback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Capacity Coercion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Hot Spare Drive(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Partition and Format the Logical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
RAID Level Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
RAID 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
RAID 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
RAID 1E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
RAID 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
RAID 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
RAID 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
RAID 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
RAID 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Ranges of Disk Array Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Media Patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
xiv
Contents
Chapter 7: Technology Background, cont.
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
PDM Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
VTrak is Beeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Silencing the Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
LEDs Display Amber or Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Drive Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Back of Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
CLU Reports a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Viewing Runtime Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Viewing NVRAM Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Checking a Reported Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Event Notification Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Critical & Offline Disk Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
When a Physical Drive Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
With a Hot Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Without a Hot Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Rebuild Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Incomplete Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Accepting an Incomplete Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Rejecting an Incomplete Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Physical Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Physical Drive Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Physical Drive Not Usable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Physical Drive Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Enclosure Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Controller Enters Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Finding and Correcting the Cause of the Problem . . . . . . . . .345
Taking a Controller out of Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Serial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Fibre Channel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
SAS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
xv
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting, cont.
Browser Does Not Connect to WebPAM PROe . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Chapter 9: Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Contacting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Returning the Product For Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Appendix A: Useful Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
SNMP MIB Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Adding a Second Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Installing a Second Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Dual Controllers and SATA Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Installing a Second Cache Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Installing PerfectPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Verifying Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Services List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Running Perfect Path View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Starting PerfectPath View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Quitting PerfectPath View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Monitoring Your LUNs and Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Viewing LUN Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Viewing Path Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Viewing LUN Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Viewing Path Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Clearing Path Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Features and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Load Balance Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Path Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
PDO Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Performance Tab Refresh Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Round Robin Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
xvi
Contents
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows, cont.
Features and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Refreshing the Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Viewing System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Saving System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Updating PerfectPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Repairing PerfectPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Removing PerfectPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Preferred Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Alternate Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Alternate Method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Check Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Task 1: Meeting Package Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Installing Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Verifying Packages – RedHat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Verifying Packages – SuSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Task 2: Preparing the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
RedHat Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
SuSE Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Editing a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Task 3: Making Initial Host Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Setting the Daemon to Run – RHEL 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, and 5.4 .396
Setting the Daemon to Run – SLES 10, 10 SP1,
10 SP2, 10 SP3, and 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Verifying the Modules are Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Verifying the Daemon is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Task 4: Create and Configure Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Task 5: Create and Mount Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Sample multipath.conf File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
xvii
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
xviii
Chapter 1: Introduction to VTrak
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
About This Manual (below)
•
VTrak Overview (page 2)
•
Architectural Description (page 4)
•
Features and Benefits (page 5)
•
Specifications (page 8)
Thank you for purchasing Promise Technology’s VTrak E-Class external disk
array subsystem.
About This Manual
This Product Manual describes how to setup, use and maintain the VTrak E610f,
E610s, E310f, and E310s external disk array subsystems. It also describes how
to use the built-in command-line interface (CLI), command-line utility (CLU) and
embedded Web-based Promise Array Management—Professional (WebPAM
PROe) software.
This manual includes a full table of contents, index, chapter task lists and
numerous cross-references to help you find the specific information you are
looking for.
Also included are four levels of notices:
Note
A Note provides helpful information such as hints or alternative
ways of doing a task.
Important
An Important calls attention to an essential step or point required
to complete a task. Important items include things often missed.
Caution
A Caution informs you of possible equipment damage or loss of
data and how to avoid them.
1
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Warning
A Warning notifies you of probable equipment damage or loss of
data, or the possibility of physical injury, and how to avoid them.
VTrak Overview
VTrak provides data storage solutions for applications where high performance
and data protection are required. The failure of any single drive will not affect data
integrity or accessibility of the data in a RAID protected logical drive.
Figure 1. VTrak E610f/s front view
Drive Carrier LEDs
Drive Carriers
Power and Status LEDs
Figure 2. VTrak E310f/s front view with bezel removed
Drive Carrier LEDs
Drive Carriers
Power and Status LEDs
A defective drive may be replaced without interruption of data availability to the
host computer. If so configured, a hot spare drive will automatically replace a
failed drive, securing the fault-tolerant integrity of the logical drive. The selfcontained hardware-based RAID logical drive provides maximum performance in
a compact external chassis.
2
Chapter 1: Introduction to VTrak
Figure 3. VTrak E610f rear view
RAID Controller 1
Mgmt
FC 1
4
2
FC 2
RAID Controller 2
Mgmt
UPS
FC 1
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
4
2
115200
8N1
FC 2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
Power Supply 1 Cooling Unit 1 Cooling Unit 2 Power Supply 2
with Battery
with Battery
Figure 4. VTrak E610s rear view
RAID Controller 1
Mgmt
RAID Controller 2
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
UPS
115200
8N1
Power Supply 1 Cooling Unit 1 Cooling Unit 2 Power Supply 2
with Battery
with Battery
3
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 5. VTrak E310f rear view
Power Supply 1 Cooling Unit 1 Cooling Unit 2 Power Supply 2
with Battery
with Battery
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
FC 1
4
FC 2
2
Mgmt
UPS
FC 1
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
4
2
115200
8N1
FC 2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
RAID Controller 2
RAID Controller 1
Figure 6. VTrak E310s rear view
Power Supply 1 Cooling Unit 1 Cooling Unit 2 Power Supply 2
with Battery
with Battery
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
UPS
115200
8N1
RAID Controller 2
RAID Controller 1
Architectural Description
The VTrak E610f and E310f are Fibre Channel subsystems suitable for Direct
Attached Storage (DAS), Storage Area Network (SAN), and Expanded Storage.
The VTrak E610s and E310s are Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) subsystems
suitable for Direct Attached Storage (DAS), Cascaded Storage, and Expanded
Storage.
The E-Class subsystems support:
•
1.5 Gb/s SATA disk drives
•
3.0 Gb/s SATA disk drives
•
3.0 Gb/s SAS disk drives
4
Chapter 1: Introduction to VTrak
All E-Class enclosures include a mid-plane, RAID controller, power and cooling
units, and enclosure processor all in one cable-less chassis design. Multiple fans
and power supplies provide redundancy to ensure continued usage during
component failure. The RAID controller is hardware based and controls all logical
drive functions transparently to the host system. VTrak appears to the computer’s
operating system as a standard SCSI drive or drives.
Features and Benefits
Highlights
•
Dual channel active/active, failover/failback RAID controllers
•
E610f/s: 16 hot-swappable drive bays in a robust 3U rackmount chassis with
redundant, hot-swappable power and cooling modules
•
E310f/s: 12 hot-swappable drive bays in a robust 2U rackmount chassis with
redundant, hot-swappable power and cooling modules
•
Supports for Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) and Serial ATA (SATA) 3 Gb/s
drives simultaneously in the same system—choose the drive that is best
suited to your application
•
Direct SATA LED support with AAMUX adapter
•
Dual 4 Gb/s Fibre Channel or four 3 Gb/s SAS x4 host ports provide highavailability SAN and cluster-friendly platform
•
JBOD expansion support through a 3 Gb/s SAS x4 port—up to four VTrak
JBOD systems
•
Simplified remote management with a comprehensive embedded webbased management via Ethernet—WebPAM PROe. Command Line
Interface/Utility via RJ-11 Serial Port
•
Three years complete system limited warranty includes 24 x 7 email and
phone support with highly experienced technical support technicians and an
advanced replacements program
•
Support for the latest RAID technology—RAID 6 and 60—Protection from a
catastrophic double drive failure
•
Resilient data protection features such as Predictive Data Migration™ and
PerfectRAID™ provide rock solid data protection
•
LUN Mapping and Masking bring flexibility for multiple application and OS
support on the same storage subsystem
•
Open architecture, industry’s most comprehensive support for SAS and
SATA hard drives and standards-based management interfaces including
SNMP, CIM, and WBEM
5
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
•
Support for the industry standard Disk Data Format (DDF from SNIA)
ensures interoperability and drive roaming even among different RAID
vendors
•
Compatible with leading SAS hard drives, host bus adapters and RAID
controllers
Subsystem and Controller Features
Controllers: Dual-controller configuration or single-controller configuration,
upgradeable to dual. Dual-controller subsystems feature Active/Active, Failover/
Failback.
Drive Support: Up to 16 (E610f/s) or 12 (E310f/s) 3.5" x 1" hard disk drives: SAS
3Gb/s, SATA II 3Gb/s and 1.5Gb/s. SATA drives require an AAMUX Adapter in
dual I/O module configuration (dual-controller) subsystems.
Supports any mix of SAS and SATA II 3Gb/s or 1.5Gb/s drives simultaneously in
the same system. Staggered physical drive spin-up.
External I/O Ports (per controller): Dual 4-Gb Fibre Channel host port; One
external 3 Gb/s SAS x4 ports for JBOD expansion (up to four VTrak JBOD
Systems).
Data Cache: Shared 512 MB predictive data cache (expandable to 2 GB);
Automatic write cache destaging; 72-hour battery backup (for 512 MB cache).
Command Queue Depth: 512 commands per VTrak system (up to 1024
commands with 512 MB memory).
Operational Features
RAID Levels: RAID 0, 1, 1E, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 – Any combination of these
RAID levels can exist at the same time.
Configurable RAID stripe size: 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, and 1 MB stripe
size per logical drive.
Background task priority tuning: Adjustment of minimum I/O reserved for server
use during all background tasks.
Hot spares: Multiple global or dedicated hot-spare drives with revert option.
Maximum LUNs per subsystem: 256 in any combination of RAID levels.
Maximum LUNs per array: 32 logical drives (LUNs). Supports LUN carving by
allowing an array to be divided into multiple logical drives. Supports out-of-order
logical drive deletion and re-creation.
Max LUNs per Target ID: Up to 256, depending on host side driver and operating
system.
6
Chapter 1: Introduction to VTrak
LUN Masking and Mapping: Supports multiple hosts.
Disk Data Formats: Supports Disk Data Format (DDF) for industry-wide
standardization and drive roaming between VTrak systems.
Background Activities: Media Patrol, background synchronizing, disk array
rebuild, Redundancy Check, SMART condition pooling, Online Capacity
Expansion (OCE), RAID Level Migration (RLM). Includes priority control, rate
control, and watermarking per BGA in disk and NVRAM.
Foreground Activities: Disk array initialization.
Physical Drive Error Recovery: Predictive Data Migration (PDM), replaces unhealthy disk member in array, while maintaining normal array status during the
data transition. Bad Sector Mapping, Media Patrol, SMART, Hard/Soft Reset to
recover HD from bad status, HD Power-control to recover HD from hung status.
Array Error Recovery: Data recovery from bad sector or failed HD for redundant
RAID, RAID 5/6 inconsistent data Prevent (Write Hole Table), Data content Error
Prevent (Read/Write Check Table) NVRAM event logging.
SCSI Commands: Supports extensive SCSI command set equivalent to SCSI/FC
hard disk drives. Variable sector size (512 byte to 4 KB) to break OS 2TB
limitation. 16 byte CDB support for 64-bit LBA addressing.
Management
Supported Operating Systems: Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2003 Server,
Linux (Red Hat, SuSE), Macintosh OS X, Solaris.
Management Tools: WebPAM PROe via out-of-band Ethernet. OS independent,
localized in multiple languages, SSL Security support. Command Line Interface
(CLI) and Command Line Utility (CLU) via RJ-11 Serial Port or Telnet.
Standard Management Protocols: SNMP, WBEM/CIM
RAID Creation: Automatic, Express, and Advanced configuration support for
novice to skilled users.
Management Interfaces: WebPAM PROe, CLU, CLI, audible (buzzer) and visible
(LEDs) alarms.
Management Protocols: Embedded web server and management support—no
host agent needed. Ethernet, RJ-11 serial port, SNMP, SSL, Telnet, Email.
7
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Specifications
E610f and E610s
Voltage: 100–240 VAC Auto-ranging.
Current (maximum): 8 A @ 100 VAC or 4 A @ 240 VAC Current rating with two
power cords.
Power Consumption (not including disk drives): E610f, 142.12 W. E610s,
151.42 W.
Power Consumption (including disk drives): E610f, 562.65 W. E610s, 566.95 W.
Power Supply: Dual 500 W, 100-240 VAC auto-ranging, 50-60 Hz, dual hot swap
and redundant with PFC, N+1 design.
Operating Temperature: 5° to 40°C operational (-40° to 60°C non-operational)
Relative Humidity: Maximum 95 percent.
Vibration: Random, 0.21 grms, 5-500 Hz, 30 Mins, X, Y, Z axis.
Dimensions (H x W x D): 13.1 x 44.6 x 56.1 cm (5.2 x 17.6 x 22.1 in)
Net Weight: 30.5 kg (67.2 lb) without drives, 38.5 kg (84.9 lb) with 16 drives,
assuming 0.5 kg (1.1 lb) per drive.
Gross Weight (including carton): 37.5 kg (82.7 lb) without drives.
Safety: CE, FCC Class A, VCCI, C-Tick, cUL, TUV, CB, BSMI, MIC.
E310f and E310s
Voltage: 100–240 VAC Auto-ranging.
Current (maximum): 8 A @ 100 VAC or 4 A @ 240 VAC Current rating with two
power cords.
Power Consumption (not including disk drives): E310f, 141.68 W. E310s,
157.84 W.
Power Consumption (including disk drives): E310f, 453.32 W. E310s, 469.48 W.
Power Supply: Dual 400 W, 100-240 VAC auto-ranging, 50-60 Hz, dual hot swap
and redundant with PFC, N+1 design.
Operating Temperature: 5° to 40°C operational (-40° to 60°C non-operational)
Relative Humidity: Maximum 95 percent.
Vibration: Random, 0.21 grms, 5-500 Hz, 30 Mins, X, Y, Z axis.
8
Chapter 1: Introduction to VTrak
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.8 x 44.4 x 56.1 cm (3.5 x 17.5 x 22.1 in)
Net Weight: 22 kg (49 lb) without drives, 28 kg (62 lb) with 12 drives, assuming
0.5 kg (1.1 lb) per drive.
Gross Weight (including carton): 30 kg (66 lb) without drives.
Safety: CE, FCC Class A, VCCI, C-Tick, cUL, TUV, CB, BSMI, MIC.
Warranty and Support
Warranty: Three years complete system limited warranty.
For more information, see “Limited Warranty” on page 358.
Support: 24x7 email and phone support (English only). 24x7 access to Promise
support site for drivers, firmware, and compatibility.
For more information, see “Contacting Technical Support” on page 355.
BSMI Statement
Warning to User: This is Class A ITE product which might cause radio frequency
interference if it is used in a residential environment. In such case, the user would
be requested to adopt certain appropriate measures.
CE Statement
Warning: This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
FCC Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
9
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
GOST-R Statement
ɉɪɟɞɭɩɪɟɠɞɟɧɢɟ. Ⱦɚɧɧɵɣ ɩɪɨɞɭɤɬ ɨɬɧɨɫɢɬɫɹ ɤ ɤɥɚɫɫɭ A. ȼ ɞɨɦɚɲɧɢɯ
ɭɫɥɨɜɢɹɯ ɨɧ ɦɨɠɟɬ ɛɵɬɶ ɩɪɢɱɢɧɨɣ ɜɨɡɧɢɤɧɨɜɟɧɢɹ ɪɚɞɢɨɩɨɦɟɯ, ɜ ɷɬɨɦ
ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɩɨɥɶɡɨɜɚɬɟɥɸ, ɜɨɡɦɨɠɧɨ, ɩɨɬɪɟɛɭɟɬɫɹ ɩɪɢɧɹɬɶ ɫɨɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɭɸɳɢɟ
ɦɟɪɵ.
IRAM Statement
Advertencia: Este es un producto de clase A. En un ambiente doméstico, este
producto puede causar interferencia de las ondas de radio, en cuyo caso se
podría requerir que el usuario tome las medidas adecuadas.
KCC Statement
10
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Unpacking the VTrak (below)
•
Mounting VTrak in a Rack (page 12)
•
Installing Disk Drives (page 15)
•
Making Management and Data Connections (page 19)
•
Setting Up Serial Cable Connections (page 36)
•
Connecting the Power (page 37)
Unpacking the VTrak
The VTrak box contains the following items:
•
VTrak Unit
•
RJ11-to-DB9 serial data cable
•
Quick Start Guide
•
•
Front bezel and key
(E310f and E310s only)
Screws for disk drives
(E610f/s: 70, including 6 spares)
(E310f/s: 50, including 2 spares)
•
Left and right center-mount
brackets
•
1.5m (4.9 ft) Power cords (2)
•
•
Left and right mounting rails
CD with SNMP files, Product
Manual and Quick Start Guide
Warning
The electronic components within the VTrak disk array are
sensitive to damage from Electro-Static Discharge (ESD).
Observe appropriate precautions at all times when handling the
VTrak or its subassemblies.
Important
Use the following categories of network cables with VTrak:
•
Cat 6, preferred
•
Cat 5E, minimum
11
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Mounting VTrak in a Rack
Cautions
•
At least two persons are required to safely lift, place, and
attach the VTrak unit into a rack system.
•
Do not lift or move the VTrak unit by the handles, power
supplies or the controller units. Hold the subsystem itself.
•
Do not install the VTrak unit into a rack without rails to support
the subsystem.
•
Only a qualified technician who is familiar with the installation
procedure should mount and install the VTrak unit.
•
Be sure all switches are OFF before installing the VTrak unit
or exchanging components.
•
Mount the rails to the rack using the appropriate screws and
flange nuts, fully tightened, at each end of the rail.
•
Do not load the rails unless they are installed with screws as
instructed.
•
The rails that ship with the Promise VTrak unit are designed
to safely support that Promise VTrak unit when properly
installed. Additional loading on the rails is at the customer’s
risk.
•
Promise Technology, Inc. cannot guarantee that the mounting
rails will support your Promise VTrak unit unless you install
them as instructed
Note
To lighten the VTrak enclosure, remove the power supplies.
Replace the power supplies after the VTrak unit is mounted in your
rack.
The VTrak subsystem installs into your rack using the supplied mounting rails.
You can also use your existing rails.
12
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Figure 1. VTrak E610f/s mounted in a rack with the supplied rails
Vertical Rack Post
VTrak E610f/s
Attaching screw & flange nut
Upper hole only
Handles mount
outside the rack post
Mounting rails (included)
mount outside the rack post
To install the VTrak subsystem into a rack with the supplied mounting rails:
1.
Check the fit of the mounting rails in your rack system.
See page 14, Figure 2.
2.
Adjust the length of the mounting rails as needed.
The rear rail slides inside the front rail. The rail halves are riveted together
and use no adjustment screws.
3.
Attach the mounting rail assemblies to the outside of the rack posts, using
the attaching screws and flange nuts from your rack system.
Be sure the front rail support is on the bottom facing inward.
The alignment pins fit into the rack holes above and below the attaching
screws.
Use the attaching screws and flange nuts from your rack system. Tighten the
screws and flange nuts according to your rack system instructions.
4.
Place the VTrak subsystem onto the rails.
5.
Secure the VTrak subsystem to the rack.
One screw each side, in the upper hole only. Use the attaching screws and
flange nuts from your rack system. Tighten the screws and flange nuts
according to your rack system instructions.
13
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 2. Rack mount assembly diagram
Rack front post
Alignment pins
two on each flange
Rack rear post
Rear rail
Front rail
Support for
subsystem
Inside of post
Rail attaching screws
(not included)
Inside of post
Note that only the front rail has a support for the subsystem.
14
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Installing Disk Drives
You can populate the VTrak with SAS or SATA hard disk drives. For optimal
performance, install physical drives of the same model and capacity. The drives’
matched performance allows the logical drive to function better as a single drive.
The table below shows the number of drives required for each RAID level.
Level
Number of Drives
Level
Number of Drives
RAID 0
1 or more
RAID 6
4 to 16*
RAID 1
2 only
RAID 10
4 or more**
RAID 1E
2 or more
RAID 50
6 or more
RAID 5
3 to 16*
RAID 60
8 or more
* E310f/s: Drive counts above 12 require an expansion unit.
** Must be an even number of drives.
Drive Slot Numbering
You can install any suitable disk drive into any slot in the enclosure. The diagram
below shows how VTrak’s drive slots are numbered. Slot numbering is reflected
in the WebPAM PROe and CLU user interfaces.
Figure 3. VTrak E610f/s drive slot numbering
1
2
3
4
5
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4. VTrak E310f/s drive slot numbering
1
2
3
4
5
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
Install all of the drive carriers into the VTrak enclosure to ensure proper airflow,
even if you do not populate all the carriers with disk drives.
15
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
AAMUX Adapter
If your VTrak has dual controllers—Fibre Channel or SAS—and you plan to install
SATA drives, you must install an AAMUX adapter with each SATA drive. AAMUX
adapters are available from Promise Technology.
Installing Disk Drives
Important
•
If your VTrak has two RAID controllers and you are installing
SATA disk drives, an AAMUX adapter is required so that both
controllers can access the SATA disk drive. Obtain AAMUX
adapters from Promise Technology, Inc.
•
Proper installation ensures adequate grounding and
minimizes vibration. Always install the disk drives using all
four screws.
1.
Remove a disk drive carrier.
2.
Carefully lay the drive into the drive carrier at the front, so that the screw
holes on the sides line up.
If you are installing a AAMUX adapters and SATA disk drives:
First attach the adapter to the drive. Then install the mounting screws.
See page 17, Figure 6.
3.
Insert the screws through the holes in the drive carrier and into the bottom of
the disk drive. See page 17, Figure 5.
•
For the disk drive, install the counter-sink screws supplied with the
VTrak.
•
For the adapter, install only the screws supplied with the adapter.
•
Install four screws per drive.
•
Install two screws per adapter.
•
Snug each screw. Be careful not to over tighten.
4.
Reinstall the drive carrier into the VTrak chassis.
5.
Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all of your disk drives are installed.
16
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Figure 5. Disk drive mounting holes in the drive carrier
Counter-sink screws only.
Disk drive mounting holes
with AAMUX
WARNING:
AAMUX adapter
mounting holes
Drive mounting holes
without AAMUX
Figure 6. SATA drive mounted in a drive carrier with the AAMUX adapter
SATA disk drive
AAMUX adapter
17
SAS connector
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 7. SAS drive mounted in a drive carrier
SAS disk drive
Caution
VTrak supports disk drive hot-swapping. To avoid hand contact
with an electrical hazard, do not remove more than one drive
carrier a time.
18
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Making Management and Data Connections
Examples of VTrak configurations include:
•
Fibre Channel SAN (below)
•
Fibre Channel DAS (page 21)
•
Fibre Channel with JBOD Expansion (page 23)
•
Fibre Channel SAN – No Single Point of Failure – JBOD Expansion (page 24)
•
SAS DAS (page 27)
•
SAS Cascaded Storage (page 29)
•
SAS with JBOD Expansion (page 32)
•
SAS DAS – No Single Point of Failure – JBOD Expansion (page 33)
Fibre Channel SAN
A Fibre Channel storage area network (SAN) requires:
•
A Fibre Channel switch
•
A Fibre Channel HBA card in each Host PC or Server
•
A network switch
•
A network interface card (NIC) in each Host PC or Server
Data Path
To establish the data path:
1.
Connect one of the Fibre Channel data ports on each VTrak controller to
your Fibre Channel switch. See page 20, Figures 8 and 9.
2.
Connect your Fibre Channel switch to the Fibre Channel HBA card in each
Host PC or Server.
Management Path
To establish the management path:
1.
Connect the Management port on each VTrak controller to your network
switch. See page 20, Figures 8 and 9.
2.
Connect each Host PC’s or Server’s standard NIC to your network switch.
19
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 8. VTrak E610f and E310f data and management ports
Fibre Channel data port 1
Fibre Channel data port 2
Mgmt
FC 1
FC 2
4
2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
SAS expansion
port (to JBOD)
Management port
Figure 9. FC SAN data and management connections
Network Switch
FC Switch
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
FC 1
4
2
FC 2
Mgmt
UPS
FC 1
4
1
Gb/s
4
2
2
1
Gb/s
115200
8N1
FC 2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
VTrak
Host PC or Server
Host PC or Server
In the diagram above, the E310f model is shown. Connections for the E610f are
the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
20
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Fibre Channel DAS
Fibre Channel direct attached storage (DAS) requires:
•
Two Fibre Channel HBA cards in the Host PC or Server
•
A network switch
•
A network interface card (NIC) in the Host PC or Server
Data Path
To establish the data path:
Connect one of the Fibre Channel data ports on each VTrak controller to one of
the Fibre Channel HBA cards in your Host PC or Server. See Figure 10 and
page 22, Figure 11.
Management Path
To establish the management path:
1.
Connect the Management port on each VTrak controller to your network
switch. See Figure 10 and page 22, Figure 11.
2.
Connect the Host PC’s or Server’s standard NIC to your network switch.
Figure 10.VTrak E610f and E310f data and management ports
Fibre Channel data port 1
Fibre Channel data port 2
Mgmt
FC 1
4
FC 2
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
SAS expansion
port (to JBOD)
UPS
4
2
115200
8N1
Management port
21
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 11. FC DAS data and management connections
Network Switch
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
FC 1
4
2
FC 2
UPS
4
1
Gb/s
Mgmt
FC 1
4
2
2
1
Gb/s
115200
8N1
FC 2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
VTrak
Host PC or Server
In the diagram above, the E310f model is shown. Connections for the E610f
are the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
22
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Fibre Channel with JBOD Expansion
To expand the number of disk drives:
1.
Connect the SAS expansion port (with a circle icon) on the E610f or E310f
controller to the SAS IN port (with a diamond icon) on the I/O module of the
first J610s or J310s unit. See Figure 12.
2.
Connect the SAS OUT port (with a circle icon) on the first J310s unit to the
SAS IN port (with a diamond icon) on the I/O module of the next J610s or
J310s unit.
3.
Connect the remaining J610s or J310s units in the same manner.
Be sure to connect circle icon to diamond icon or vice versa.
You can combine J610s and J310s units in the JBOD expansion.
Figure 12.FC JBOD data connections
FC Switch
E310f
I
O
SAS Expansion
Mgmt
FC 1
FC 2
4
2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
FC Connector
J310s
O
I
SAS OUT
115200
8N1
SAS IN
J310s
O
I
115200
8N1
SAS IN
In the diagram above, the E310f and J310s models are shown. Connections
for the E610f and J610s are the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
23
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Fibre Channel SAN – No Single Point of Failure – JBOD
Expansion
A Fibre Channel SAN with no single point of failure requires:
•
Two Fibre Channel switches
•
A Fibre Channel HBA card in each Host PC or Server
•
A network switch
•
A network interface card (NIC) in each Host PC or Server
Data Path
To establish the data path:
1.
Connect a Fibre Channel (FC) data port of the LEFT controller to the FC
HBA card in one of the Host PCs or Servers.
See page 25, Figure 13. And see page 26, Figure 14.
2.
Connect the other FC data port of the LEFT controller to the FC HBA card in
the other Host PC or Server.
3.
Connect a FC data port of the RIGHT controller to the FC HBA card in one of
the Host PCs or Servers.
4.
Connect the other FC data port of the RIGHT controller to the FC HBA card
in the other Host PC or Server.
Management Path
To establish the management path:
1.
Connect the Management ports on both VTrak controllers to your network
switch.
2.
Connect the NICs in both Host PCs or Servers to your network switch.
Expansion
To expand the number of disk drives:
1.
Connect the SAS expansion port on the LEFT controller to the SAS IN port
(with a diamond icon) on LEFT I/O module of the first J610s or J310s unit.
See page 25, Figure 13. And see page 26, Figure 14.
2.
Connect the SAS expansion port on the RIGHT controller to the SAS IN port
(with a diamond icon) on RIGHT I/O module of the first J610s or J310s unit.
3.
Connect the SAS OUT port (with a circle icon) on LEFT I/O module of the
first J610s or J310s unit to the SAS IN port (with a diamond icon) on LEFT
I/O module of the next J610s or J310s unit.
4.
Connect the SAS OUT port (with a circle icon) on RIGHT I/O module of the
first J610s or J310s unit to the SAS IN port (with a diamond icon) on RIGHT
I/O module of the next J610s or J310s unit.
24
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
5.
Connect the remaining J610s or J310s units in the same manner.
Be sure to connect circle icon to diamond icon or vice versa.
Keep your data paths organized to ensure redundancy.
You can combine J610s and J310s units in the JBOD expansion.
Figure 13.VTrak E610f and E310f data and management ports
Fibre Channel data port 1
Fibre Channel data port 2
Mgmt
FC 1
4
FC 2
2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
SAS expansion
port (to JBOD)
115200
8N1
Management port
In the diagram on the following page, the E310f and J310s models are
shown. Connections for the E610f and J610s are the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
25
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 14.FC data connections for no single point of failure with JBOD
expansion
Host PCs or Servers
Fibre Channel Switches
I
I
O
O
E310f
Mgmt
FC 1
FC 2
4
2
Mgmt
UPS
FC 1
4
1
Gb/s
4
2
2
1
Gb/s
115200
8N1
FC 2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
O
O
I
I
J310s
115200
8N1
J310s
115200
8N1
O
O
I
I
115200
8N1
115200
8N1
O
J310s
O
I
I
115200
8N1
J310s
115200
8N1
O
O
I
I
115200
8N1
115200
8N1
26
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
SAS DAS
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) Direct Attached Storage (DAS) requires:
•
Two SAS HBA cards in the Host PC or Server
•
A network switch
•
A network interface card (NIC) in the Host PC or Server
Data Path
To establish the data path:
On the VTrak controller, connect a SAS data port or a SAS data/cascade port to
one of your SAS HBA cards. See Figure 15 and page 28, Figure 16.
Management Path
To establish the management path:
1.
Connect the Management port on each Controller to your network switch.
See Figure 15 and page 28, Figure 16.
2.
Connect the Host PC’s or Server’s standard NIC to your network switch.
Figure 15. VTrak E610s and E310s data and management ports
SAS data port
SAS data/cascade port
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
SAS expansion
port (to JBOD)
Management port
SAS data/cascade port
SAS data port
27
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 16.SAS DAS data and management connections
Network Switch
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
VTrak
Host PC or Server
In the diagram above, the E310s model is shown. Connections for the E610s are
the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
28
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
SAS Cascaded Storage
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) Cascaded storage requires:
•
One SAS HBA card in the Host PC or Server
•
A network switch
•
A network interface card (NIC) in the Host PC or Server
Data Path
To establish the data path:
1.
Connect a SAS data port or a SAS data/cascade port on the VTrak controller
to your SAS HBA card. See Figures 17, 18, and 19 on the following pages.
2.
Connect the remaining port of the first VTrak to the next VTrak.
Be sure to connect circle icon to diamond icon or vice versa.
3.
Connect the remaining VTrak controllers in the same manner.
You can cascade up to eight VTrak subsystems.
Be sure to connect circle icon to diamond icon or vice versa.
Management Path
To establish the management path:
1.
On the VTrak controller, connect the Management Port on each Controller to
your network switch. See page 31, Figure 19.
2.
Connect the Host PC’s or Server’s standard NIC to your network switch.
Figure 17. VTrak E610s and E310s data and management ports
SAS data port
SAS data/cascade port
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
SAS expansion
port (to JBOD)
Management port
SAS data/cascade port
SAS data port
29
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 18.SAS Cascaded data connections
Host PC or Server
I
O
E310s
Mgmt
SAS data port
I
Mgmt
SAS data port
UPS
SAS data/
cascade port
115200
8N1
I
O
E310s
SAS data/
cascade port
O
E310s
UPS
115200
8N1
Mgmt
SAS data port
UPS
115200
8N1
In the diagram above, the E310s model is shown. Connections for the E610s are
the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
30
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Figure 19.SAS Cascaded management and data connections
Network Switch
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
VTrak
I
I
O
O
Host PC or Server
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
VTrak
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
VTrak
In the diagram above, the E310s model is shown. Connections for the E610s are
the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
31
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
SAS with JBOD Expansion
To expand the number of disk drives:
1.
Connect the SAS expansion port on the E610s or E310s controller to the
SAS IN port (with a diamond icon) on the I/O module of the first J610s or
J310s unit. See Figure 20.
2.
Connect the SAS OUT port (with a circle icon) on the first J310s unit to the
SAS IN port (with a diamond icon) on the I/O module of the next J610s or
J310s unit.
3.
Connect the remaining J610s or J310s units in the same manner.
You can combine J610s and J310s units in the JBOD expansion.
Be sure to connect circle icon to diamond icon or vice versa.
Figure 20.SAS JBOD data connections
Host PC or Server
E310s
I
O
Mgmt
SAS expansion
UPS
SAS data port
115200
8N1
J310s
O
I
SAS OUT
115200
8N1
SAS IN
J310s
O
I
115200
8N1
SAS IN
In the diagram above, the E310s model is shown. Connections for the E610s are
the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
32
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
SAS DAS – No Single Point of Failure – JBOD Expansion
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) Direct Attached Storage (DAS) with no single point
of failure requires:
•
Two SAS HBA cards in each Host PC or Server
•
A network switch
•
A network interface card (NIC) in each Host PC or Server
Data Path
To establish the data path:
1.
Connect a SAS data port or data/cascade port of the LEFT controller to the
SAS HBA card in one of the Host PCs or Servers.
See page 34, Figure 21. And see page 35, Figure 22.
2.
Connect a SAS data port or data/cascade port of the LEFT controller to the
SAS HBA card in the other Host PC or Server.
3.
Connect a SAS data port or data/cascade port of the RIGHT controller to the
SAS HBA card in one of the Host PCs or Servers.
4.
Connect a SAS data port or data/cascade port of the RIGHT controller to the
SAS HBA card in the other Host PC or Server.
Management Path
To establish the management path:
1.
Connect the Management ports on both VTrak controllers to your network
switch.
2.
Connect the NICs in both Host PCs or Servers to your network switch.
Expansion
To expand the number of disk drives:
1.
Connect the SAS expansion port on the LEFT controller to the SAS IN port
(with a diamond icon) on LEFT I/O module of the first J610s or J310s unit.
See page 34, Figure 21. And see page 35, Figure 22.
2.
Connect the SAS expansion port on the RIGHT controller to the SAS IN port
(with a diamond icon) on RIGHT I/O module of the first J610s or J310s unit.
3.
Connect the SAS OUT port (with a circle icon) on LEFT I/O module of the
first J610s or J310s unit to the SAS IN port (with a diamond icon) on LEFT
I/O module of the next J610s or J310s unit.
4.
Connect the SAS OUT port (with a circle icon) on RIGHT I/O module of the
first J610s or J310s unit to the SAS IN port (with a diamond icon) on RIGHT
I/O module of the next J610s or J310s unit.
5.
Connect the remaining J610s or J310s units in the same manner.
33
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Be sure to connect circle icon to diamond icon or vice versa.
Keep your data paths organized to ensure redundancy.
You can combine J610s and J310s units in the JBOD expansion.
Figure 21. VTrak E610s and E310s data and management ports
SAS data port
SAS data/cascade port
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
SAS expansion
port (to JBOD)
Management port
SAS data/cascade port
SAS data port
In the diagram on the following page, the E310f and J310s models are
shown. Connections for the E610f and J610s are the same.
Important
For multipathing (MPIO) applications, see:
•
“Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows” on page 367
•
“Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux” on page 389
34
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Figure 22.SAS data connections for no single point of failure with JBOD
expansion
Host PCs or Servers
I
I
O
O
E310s
Mgmt
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
J310s
O
O
I
I
115200
8N1
J310s
115200
8N1
O
O
I
I
115200
8N1
J310s
UPS
115200
8N1
115200
8N1
O
O
I
I
115200
8N1
115200
8N1
O
J310s
O
I
I
115200
8N1
115200
8N1
35
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Setting Up Serial Cable Connections
Serial communication enables the Command Line Interface (CLI) and Command
Line Utility (CLU) on your PC to monitor to control the VTrak. The VTrak package
includes one RJ11-to-DB9 serial data cable for each controller. All VTrak models
have the same serial connection.
Figure 23. Serial and UPS connectors are located on the controller
RJ11 Serial
connector
DB9 UPS
connector
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
FC 1
4
2
FC 2
Mgmt
UPS
FC 1
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
4
2
115200
8N1
FC 2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
To set up a serial cable connection:
1.
Attach the RJ11 end of the serial data cable to the RJ11 serial connector on
one of the controllers.
2.
Attach the DB9 end of the serial data cable to a serial port on the Host PC or
Server.
Optional UPS Serial Connection
If your deployment plan calls for one or more UPS units and management via
serial communication, connect the UPS control cable to the DB9 connector on
the VTrak controller. See Figure 23.
When your subsystem is running, see “Making UPS Settings” on page 137 or
page 223 to complete the UPS management setup.
36
Chapter 2: VTrak Installation
Connecting the Power
Plug the power cords and turn on the switches on both power supplies.
Important
If you have a SAN, DAS, or Cascade with JBOD Expansion,
always power on the JBOD subsystems first.
When the power is switched on, the LEDs on the front of the VTrak will light up.
Figure 24.VTrak front panel LED display
Power
FRU Status
Logical Drive Status
Controller-1 Activity
Controller-2 Activity
Controller Heartbeat
When boot-up is finished and the VTrak is functioning normally:
•
Controller LED blinks green once per second for five seconds, goes dark for
ten seconds, then blinks green once per second for five seconds again.
•
Power, FRU and Logical Drive LEDs display green continuously.
•
Controller LEDs flash green if there is activity on that controller.
There are two LEDs on each disk drive carrier. They report the presence of
power and a disk drive, and the current condition of the drive.
37
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 25.VTrak disk drive carrier LEDs
Disk Status
Power/Activity
After a few moments the Power/Activity LED should display Green. If there is no
disk drive in the carrier, the Power/Activity LED will remain dark.
The Power/Activity LED flashes during drive activity.
The Disk Status LED displays Green when a drive is present and configured.
Go to “Chapter 3: VTrak Setup” on page 39.
38
Chapter 3: VTrak Setup
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Setting up the Serial Connection (below)
•
Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address (page 40)
•
VTrak Default IP Addresses (page 40)
•
Setting up VTrak with the CLI (page 41)
•
Setting up VTrak with the CLU (page 43)
•
Setting Up WebPAM PROe (page 46)
Setting up the Serial Connection
VTrak has a Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage all of its functions,
including customization. A subset of the CLI is the Command Line Utility (CLU), a
user-level interface that manages your VTrak via your PC’s terminal emulation
program, such as Microsoft HyperTerminal. This procedure uses the serial cable
connection you made. “Setting Up Serial Cable Connections” on page 36.
1.
Change your terminal emulation program settings to match the following
specifications:
•
Bits per second: 115200
•
Data bits: 8
•
Parity: None
•
Stop bits: 1
•
Flow control: none
2.
Start your PC’s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program.
3.
Press Enter once to launch the CLI.
4.
At the Login prompt, type administrator and press Enter.
5.
At the Password prompt, type password and press Enter.
At this point, you are in the CLI. You can continue using the CLI to make
network settings or you can switch to the CLU. Go to:
•
Setting up VTrak with the CLI (page 41)
•
Setting up VTrak with the CLU (page 43)
39
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address
When you setup your VTrak, you have the option of:
•
Enabling DHCP and letting your DHCP server assign the IP address to the
VTrak’s virtual management port.
•
Specifying a static IP address for the VTrak’s virtual management port.
If you choose to enable DHCP, have your Network Administrator dedicate an IP
address for the VTrak, linked to the VTrak’s MAC address. This action will
prevent the DHCP server from assigning a new IP address when the VTrak
restarts, with the result that users can no longer log in.
To access the MAC address for VTrak’s virtual management port:
•
In the CLI, type net -v and press Enter.
•
In the CLU Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.
Then highlight Virtual and press Enter.
VTrak Default IP Addresses
VTrak uses virtual and physical IP addresses. This arrangement enables you to
access a VTrak with two RAID controllers over your network using a single IP
address.
Virtual Management Port
The default virtual management port IP address is set to 10.0.0.1.
The virtual management port IP address belongs to the VTrak subsystem, not to
the RAID controller. Use the virtual management port IP address to log into the
VTrak over your network.
See “Logging into WebPAM PROe” on page 46.
Physical Management Ports
The default physical management port IP addresses are set to:
•
Controller 1 – 10.0.0.2
•
Controller 2 – 10.0.0.3
The physical management port IP address belongs to the RAID controller, not to
the VTrak subsystem. Use the physical management port IP address only when a
controller is in maintenance mode.
See “Controller Enters Maintenance Mode” on page 345.
40
Chapter 3: VTrak Setup
Setting up VTrak with the CLI
1.
Type the following string to set the system date and time, then press Enter.
administrator@cli> date -a mod -d 2009/06/25 -t 14:50:05
In the above example, the date and time are included as examples only.
Your values will be different. Use yyyyy/mm/dd for the date and a 24-hour
clock for the time.
2.
Type the following string to set the Virtual Management Port IP address and
other settings, then press Enter.
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -s "primaryip=192.168.10.85,
primaryipmask=255.255.255.0, gateway=192.168.10.1"
In the above example, the IP addresses and subnet mask are included as
examples only. Your values will be different.
If you prefer to let your DHCP server assign the Virtual Management Port IP
address, type the following string, then press Enter.
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -s "dhcp=enable"
Note that the IP address described above belongs to the VTrak subsystem,
not to the RAID controller. Use this IP address to log into the VTrak over your
network.
3.
To verify the settings, type net and press Enter.
administrator@cli> net
===========================================
CId Port Type IP
Mask
Gateway
Link
===========================================
Virtual
Mgmt 192.168.10.85 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.1 Up
Each RAID controller has an IP addresses for access when the controller
goes into maintenance mode. Maintenance mode is only for remedial action
in the event of a problem with the controller. See “Controller Enters
Maintenance Mode” on page 345 for more information.
4.
Type the following string to set the Maintenance Mode IP address and other
settings, then press Enter. You must set each controller separately.
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -m -c 1 -s
"primaryip=192.168.10.101, primaryipmask=255.255.255.0,
gateway=192.168.10.1"
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -m -c 2 -s
"primaryip=192.168.10.102, primaryipmask=255.255.255.0,
gateway=192.168.10.1"
41
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
In the above example, the Maintenance Mode IP addresses and subnet
mask are included as examples only. Your values will be different.
If you prefer to let your DHCP server assign the IP addresses, type the
following strings, then press Enter.
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -m -c 1 -s "dhcp=enable"
administrator@cli> net -a mod -t mgmt -m -c 2 -s "dhcp=enable"
Note that the IP address described above belongs to the RAID controller, not
to the VTrak subsystem. Use this IP address to log into the controller over
your network.
5.
To verify the maintenance mode settings, type net -m and press Enter.
administrator@cli> net -m
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
CtrlId: 1
Port: 1
Type: Management Ethernet
IPType: IPv4
IP: 192.168.10.101
IPMask: 255.255.255.0
MAC: 00:01:55:AE:02:AE
DNS: 0.0.0.0
Gateway: 192.168.10.1
DHCP: Disabled
This completes the Management port setup. Go to “Setting Up WebPAM PROe”
on page 46.
To see the full set of CLI commands, at the admin@cli> prompt, type help and
press Enter.
42
Chapter 3: VTrak Setup
Setting up VTrak with the CLU
1.
At the administrator@cli> prompt, type menu and press Enter.
The CLU main menu appears.
Figure 1. CLU main menu
2.
With Quick Setup highlighted, press Enter.
The first Quick Setup screen enables you to make Date and Time settings.
Setting system date and time
1.
Press the arrow keys to highlight System Date.
2.
Press the backspace key to erase the current date.
3.
Type the new date.
4.
Follow the same procedure to set the System Time.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the Management Port
configuration screen.
43
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Making Management Port settings
Manual IP settings
To make Management Port settings manually:
1.
Press the arrow keys to highlight IP Address.
2.
Press the backspace key to erase the current IP Address.
3.
Type the new IP Address.
4.
Follow the same procedure to specify the Subnet Mask, Gateway IP
Address and DNS Server IP Address.
If you do not have a DNS server, skip the DNS Server IP address.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Automatic IP settings
To make Management Port settings automatically:
1.
Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP.
2.
Press the spacebar to toggle to Enable.
3.
Press Ctrl-A to save these settings.
Viewing IP address and settings
To view the current IP address and network settings when using DHCP:
1.
Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP.
2.
Press the spacebar to toggle to Disable.
The current Management Port settings are displayed.
3.
Press the spacebar to toggle DHCP back to Enable.
4.
Press Ctrl-A to save these settings and move to the RAID configuration
screen.
Making Controller Maintenance Mode Settings
Each RAID controller has an IP addresses for access when the controller goes
into maintenance mode. Maintenance mode is only for remedial action in the
event of a problem with the controller. See “Controller Enters Maintenance Mode”
on page 345 for more information.
Making Automatic Settings
1.
From the CLU Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled.
44
Chapter 3: VTrak Setup
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Making Manual Settings
1.
From the CLU Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.
5.
Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the
current value, then type the new value.
6.
•
IP Address
•
Subnet Mask
•
Default Gateway IP Address
•
DNS Server IP Address
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Exiting the CLU
1.
Highlight Skip the Step and Finish and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Return to CLI and press Enter.
This completes the Management Port setup. Go to “Setting Up WebPAM PROe”
on page 46.
45
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Setting Up WebPAM PROe
Setting up WebPAM PROe consists of the following actions:
•
Logging into WebPAM PROe (below)
•
Choosing a Language (page 47)
•
Creating a Disk Array (page 48)
•
Logging out of WebPAM PROe (page 52)
•
Using WebPAM PROe over the Internet (page 52)
Logging into WebPAM PROe
1.
Launch your Browser.
2.
In the Browser address field, type in the virtual IP address of the VTrak
subsystem.
Use the virtual IP address you set in the CLI (page 41) or CLU (page 43).
Note that the IP address shown below is only an example. The IP address
you type into your browser will be different.
Regular Connection
•
WebPAM PROe uses an HTTP connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .http://
•
Enter the VTrak’s IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192.168.10.85
Together, your entry looks like this:
http://192.168.10.85
Secure Connection
•
WebPAM PROe uses a secure HTTP connection . . . . . . . . . .https://
•
Enter the VTrak’s IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192.168.10.85
Together, your entry looks like this:
https://192.168.10.85
Note
Whether you choose a regular or a secure connection, your login
to WebPAM PROe and your user password are always secure.
3.
When the log-in screen (Figure 2) appears:
•
Type administrator in the User Name field.
•
Type password in the Password field.
•
Click the Login button.
The User Name and Password are case sensitive.
46
Chapter 3: VTrak Setup
4.
Click the Login button.
Figure 2. WebPAM PROe log-in screen
After sign-in, the WebPAM PROe opening screen appears. If there are any
unconfigured physical drives in the enclosure, an Array Configuration menu also
appears. See page 48, Figure 4.
Note
Make a Bookmark (Netscape Navigator) or set a Favorite (Internet
Explorer) of the Login Screen so you can access it easily next
time.
Choosing a Language
WebPAM PROe displays in English, German, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean,
Traditional Chinese, and Simplified Chinese.
1.
Click Language on the WebPAM PROe Header.
The language list appears in the Header.
2.
Click the language you prefer.
The WebPAM PROe user interface displays in the chosen language.
47
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 3. Clicking “Language” on the WebPAM PROe Header
Creating a Disk Array
On a newly activated VTrak subsystem, there are no disk arrays or logical drives.
To create a disk array:
1.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon, then click the Create tab.
The Array Configuration menu appears.
Figure 4. The Array Configuration menu
2.
3.
Choose one of the options:
•
Automatic – Creates a new disk array following a default set of
parameters. Makes one logical drive automatically. Also makes a hot
spare drive for all RAID levels except RAID 0, if at least four
unconfigured physical drives are available. See page 49.
•
Express – You choose the parameters for a new disk array by
specifying the characteristics you want. You can create multiple logical
drives at the same time, however they will all be identical. You can
choose to make a hot spare drive for all RAID levels except RAID 0, if at
least four unconfigured physical drives are available. See page 49.
•
Advanced – You directly specify all parameters for a new disk array.
Makes one logical drive automatically. You can create additional logical
drives at a later time, if additional configurable capacity is available.
Does not make a hot spare drive. See page 50.
Click the Next button.
48
Chapter 3: VTrak Setup
Automatic
When you choose the Automatic option, the following parameters appear on the
screen:
•
Disk Arrays – The number of physical drives in the disk array, their ID
numbers, configurable capacity, and the number of logical drives to be
created
•
Logical Drives – The ID number of the logical drive(s), their RAID level,
capacity, and stripe size
•
Spare Drives – The physical drive slot number of the dedicated hot spare
assigned to this disk array. A hot spare drive is created for all RAID levels
except RAID 0, when five or more unconfigured physical drives are available
If you accept these parameters, click the Submit button.
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Information tab.
If you do NOT accept these parameters, use the Express (below) or Advanced
(page 50) option to create your disk array.
Express
When you choose the Express option, a set of characteristics and options
appears on the screen.
1.
Check the boxes to choose any one or a combination of:
•
Redundancy – The array will remain available if a physical drive fails
•
Capacity – The greatest possible amount of data capacity
•
Performance – The highest possible read/write speed
•
Spare Drive – A hot spare drive is created when you choose
Redundancy, Spare Drive, and five or more unconfigured physical
drives are available
•
Mixing SATA/SAS Drive – Check this box if you want to use both SATA
and SAS drives in the same disk array
If the box is unchecked, and you have both SATA and SAS drives,
different arrays will be created for each type of drive.
2.
In the Number of Logical Drives field, enter the number of logical drives you
want to make from this disk array.
The maximum possible number of logical drives appears to the right of this
field.
3.
From the Application Type menu, choose an application that best describes
your intended use for this disk array:
•
File Server
•
Transaction Data
•
Video Stream
•
Transaction Log
49
•
Other
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
4.
Click the Update button.
Or check the Automatic Update box and updates will occur automatically.
The following parameters display:
•
Disk Arrays – The number of physical drives in the disk array, their slot
numbers, configurable capacity, and the number of logical drives to be
created
•
Logical Drives – The slot number of the logical drive(s), their RAID
level, capacity, and stripe size
•
Spare Drives – The physical drive slot number of the dedicated hot
spare assigned to this disk array (all RAID levels except RAID 0)
If you accept these parameters, proceed to the next step.
If you do NOT accept these parameters, review and modify your selections
in the previous steps.
5.
When you are done, click the Submit button.
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Information tab.
Advanced
Note
For an explanation of the parameters under the Advanced option,
see “Chapter 7: Technology Background” on page 273.
When you choose the Advanced option, the Step 1 – Disk Array Creation screen
displays.
Step 1 – Disk Array Creation
1.
Optional. Enter a name for the disk array in the field provided.
Maximum of 31 characters; letters, numbers, space between characters, and
underline.
2.
Uncheck the boxes if you want to disable Media Patrol or PDM.
Promise recommends leaving these features enabled. See “Media Patrol” on
page 301 and “Predictive Data Migration (PDM)” on page 302.
3.
Highlight physical drives you want in the disk array from the Available list and
press the >> button to move them to the Selected list.
You can also double-click them to move them.
4.
When you are done, click the Next button.
50
Chapter 3: VTrak Setup
Step 2 – Logical Drive Creation
1.
Optional. Enter an alias for the logical drive in the field provided.
Maximum of 31 characters; letters, numbers, space between characters, and
underline.
2.
Choose a RAID level for the logical drive from the dropdown menu.
The choice of RAID levels depends the number of physical drives you
selected.
3.
RAID 50 and 60 only – Specify the number of axles for your array.
For more information on axles, see “RAID 50 Axles” on page 281 or “RAID
60 Axles” on page 283.
4.
Specify a Capacity and the unit of measure (B, KB, MB, GB, TB).
This value will be the data capacity of the first logical drive in your new disk
array. If you specify less than disk array's maximum capacity, the remaining
capacity is available for additional logical drives that you can create now or
later.
5.
For the following items, accept the default or choose a new value from the
dropdown menu:
•
Stripe size. 64 KB is the default
64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, and 1 MB are available.
•
Sector size. 512 B is the default.
512 B, 1 KB, 2 KB, and 4 KB are available.
•
Read (cache) Policy. Read Ahead is the default.
Read Cache, Read Ahead Cache, and No Cache are available.
•
Write (cache) Policy. Write Back is the default.
Write Back and Write Through (Thru) are available.
•
Preferred Controller ID.
The choices are Controller 1 or 2, or Automatic. This feature is only
available on subsystems with two controllers and LUN Affinity enabled.
6.
Click the Update button.
A new logical drive is displayed under New Logical Drives. If there is free
capacity remaining, you can specify another logical drive now or wait until
later.
7.
When you are done specifying logical drives, click the Next button.
Step 3 – Summary
The Summary lists the disk array and logical drive information you specified.
To proceed with disk array and logical drive creation, click the Submit button.
51
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Note
This function does not automatically create a hot spare drive. After
the disk array is created, you can create a hot spare drive for it.
See “Creating a Spare Drive” on page 160 or page 201.
Logging out of WebPAM PROe
There are two ways to log out of WebPAM PROe:
•
Close your browser window
•
Click Logout on the WebPAM PROe banner
Figure 5. Clicking “Logout” on the WebPAM PROe banner
Clicking Logout brings you back to the Login Screen. See page 47.
After logging out, you must enter your user name and password in order to log in
again.
Using WebPAM PROe over the Internet
The above instructions cover connections between VTrak and your company
network. It is also possible to connect to a VTrak from the Internet.
Your MIS Administrator can tell you how to access your network from outside the
firewall. Once you are logged onto the network, you can access the VTrak using
its IP address.
52
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Logging into WebPAM PROe (page 54)
Choosing a Language (page 56)
Perusing the Interface (page 57)
Logging out of WebPAM PROe (page 61)
Working with the Storage Network (page 62)
Working with Subsystems (page 63)
Managing Users (page 76)
Managing the Network Connection (page 82)
Managing Fibre Channel Connections (page 84)
Managing SAS Connections (page 90)
Managing Storage Services (page 93)
Monitoring Performance (page 96)
Managing Software Services (page 98)
Exporting the User Database (page 108)
Exporting a Configuration Script (page 109)
Importing a User Database (page 110)
Importing a Configuration Script (page 111)
Updating the Firmware (page 112)
Viewing Flash Image Information (page 113)
Restoring Factory Defaults (page 114)
Clearing Statistics (page 115)
Saving a System Service Report (page 116)
Shutting Down the Subsystem (page 117)
Starting Up After Shutdown (page 118)
Restarting the Subsystem (page 119)
Managing Controllers (page 120)
Managing Enclosures (page 125)
Managing Physical Drives (page 131)
Managing UPS Units (page 136)
Managing Disk Arrays (page 139)
Managing Logical Drives (page 152)
Managing Spare Drives (page 159)
Working with the Logical Drive Summary (page 163)
For information about VTrak’s audible alarm and LEDs, see “Chapter 8:
Troubleshooting” on page 307.
53
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Logging into WebPAM PROe
In order to log into WebPAM PROe, you must first setup a network connection
between your Host PC and the VTrak subsystem, as described in “Chapter 3:
VTrak Setup” on page 39.
To log into WebPAM PROe:
1.
Launch your Browser.
2.
In the Browser address field, type in the IP address of the VTrak
Management port.
Note that the IP address shown below is only an example. The IP address
you type into your browser will be different.
Regular Connection
•
WebPAM PROe uses an HTTP connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .http://
•
Enter the VTrak’s Management Port IP address . . . . 192.168.10.85
Together, your entry looks like this:
http://192.168.10.85
Secure Connection
•
WebPAM PROe uses a secure HTTP connection . . . . . . . . . .https://
•
Enter the VTrak’s Management Port IP address . . . . 192.168.10.85
Together, your entry looks like this:
https://192.168.10.85
Note
Whether you choose a regular or a secure connection, your login
to WebPAM PROe and your user password are always secure.
3.
When the log-in screen appears:
•
Type administrator in the User Name field.
•
Type password in the Password field.
•
Click the Login button.
The User Name and Password are case sensitive.
4.
Click the Login button.
54
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Figure 1. The WebPAM PROe log-in screen
55
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Choosing a Language
WebPAM PROe displays in English, German, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean,
Traditional Chinese, and Simplified Chinese.
1.
Click Language the WebPAM PROe Header.
The language list appears in the Header.
2.
Click the language you prefer.
The WebPAM PROe user interface displays in the chosen language.
Figure 2. Clicking “Language” in the Header
56
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Perusing the Interface
WebPAM PROe is browser-based RAID management software with a graphic
user interface.
Figure 3. WebPAM PROe interface
There are four major parts to the graphic user interface:
•
Header (see page 58)
•
Tree (see page 58)
•
Management View (see page 59)
•
Event Frame (see page 60)
57
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Using the Header
The Header contains the following items:
•
Language – See “Choosing a Language” on page 56.
•
View – See “Viewing the Event Frame” on page 60.
•
Storage Network – See “Working with the Storage Network” on page 62.
•
Contact Us – Click Contact Us for contact information and Technical
Support. Also see “Contacting Technical Support” on page 355.
•
Logout – See “Logging out of WebPAM PROe” on page 61
•
Help – Click Help in the Header to access the main online help menu.
•
About – Click About in the Header to display the WebPAM PROe software
version and build date.
Using Tree View
Tree View enables you to navigate around all components of the Subsystem,
including Fibre Channel or SAS management, network and service management,
RAID controller, enclosure, physical drives, disk arrays, logical drives, and spare
drives. The figure below shows the components of Tree View.
58
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Figure 4. WebPAM PROe Tree View
Name of logged-in user
Subsystem IP address and model
Fibre Channel or SAS Management
Physical Drives
in this Enclosure
The Administrative Tools section is different for the Administrator and Super User
than for users with other privilege levels. The remainder of the Tree is the same
for all users. Management View displays information according to the item you
choose in Tree View.
Using Management View
Management View provides the actual user interface with the VTrak, including
creation, maintenance, deletion, and monitoring of disk arrays and logical drives.
59
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Function Tabs control specific actions and processes. This window changes
depending on which item you choose in Tree View and which tab you choose in
Management View itself.
Click the Help button in Management View to access online help for the function
that is currently displayed.
Viewing the Event Frame
To view the Event Frame:
1.
Click View in the Header.
2.
Click the Show Event Frame popup option.
WebPAM PROe displays the Event Frame below Management View.
3.
Click View again to hide the Event Frame.
In the event frame, events are listed and sorted by:
•
Item Number – A consecutive decimal number assigned to a specific event
•
Device – Battery, controller, logical drive, physical drive, port, etc.
•
Event ID – The hexadecimal number that identifies the specific type of event
•
Severity – See Table 1
•
Time – Time and date of the occurrence
•
Description – A brief description of the event
Table 1 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
Sorting Events
You can sort the events by Item Number, Device, Event ID, Severity, Time and
Date, or Description.
Click the link at the top of the column by which you want to sort the events. After
you click the item, a triangle icon appears.
•
If the triangle points upward, the column is sorted low-to-high or old-to-new
60
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
•
If the triangle points downward, the column is sorted high-to-low or new-toold
Click the link a second time to change to flip the triangle and reverse the sort
sequence.
Logging out of WebPAM PROe
There are two ways to log out of WebPAM PROe:
•
Close your browser window
•
Click Logout the WebPAM PROe banner (below
Figure 5. Clicking “Logout” in the Header)
Clicking Logout brings you back to the Login Screen. After logging out, you must
enter your user name and password in order to log in again.
61
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Working with the Storage Network
When you log into WebPAM PROe, you access a specific VTrak subsystem. See
“Logging into WebPAM PROe” on page 54.
The Storage Network feature enables you to access all of the VTrak subsytems
with a Management Port connection to your network.
Each VTrak subsystem is identified by its Management Port IP address.
Storage Network functions include:
•
Viewing other subsystems
•
Updating the list of subsystems
•
Logging into a subsystem
•
Hiding the other subsystems
Viewing Other Subsytems
To view the other VTrak subsytems the Storage Network:
1.
2.
Click Storage Network in the Header.
Click the Show Network Subsystems popup option.
The list will show all subsystems the network at the time the GUI was
launched.
Updating the List of Subsystems
To update the list of the VTrak subsytems the Storage Network:
Click the Discover button at the bottom of the subsystem list.
Logging into a Subsystem
To log into any of the displayed VTrak subsystems:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon of the subsystem you want to see.
If your user name and password do not match the subsystem you are
logging into, the log in screen will appear.
2.
Log into the new subsystem, as needed.
Hiding the Other Subsystems
To hide the other VTrak subsystems the Storage Network:
1.
Click Storage Network in the Header.
2.
Click the Hide Network Subsystems popup option.
62
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Working with Subsystems
A VTrak subsystem is identified by its Management Port IP address. Subsystem
functions include:
•
Viewing Subsystem Information (page 64)
•
Saving a System Service Report (page 64)
•
Setting an Alias for the Subsystem (page 64)
•
Setting Redundancy for the Subsystem (page 64)
•
Setting Cache Mirroring for the Subsystem (page 65)
•
Setting Subsystem Date and Time (page 65)
•
Making NTP Settings (page 65)
•
Synchronizing with a NTP Server (page 66)
•
Viewing the Runtime Event Log (page 66)
•
Saving the Runtime Event Log (page 67)
•
Clearing the Runtime Event Log (page 68)
•
Viewing NVRAM Events (page 68)
•
Saving NVRAM Events (page 69)
•
Clearing NVRAM Events (page 69)
•
Viewing Current Background Activities (page 69)
•
Making Background Activity Settings (page 70)
•
Running Background Activities (page 71)
•
Running Media Patrol (page 71)
•
Running PDM (page 71)
•
Viewing Scheduled Activities (page 72)
•
Scheduling an Activity (page 72)
•
Deleting a Scheduled Activity (page 73)
•
Viewing Lock Status (page 73)
•
Setting the Lock (page 74)
•
Renewing the Lock (page 74)
•
Releasing the Lock (page 74)
63
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Viewing Subsystem Information
To view information about a subsystem, click the Subsystem
icon in Tree
View. The Information tab in Management View displays the subsystem
information.
Saving a System Service Report
To save a System Service Report as a compressed HTML file:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon.
2.
On the Information tab, click the Save button.
3.
In the dialog box, click the Save File option, then click the OK button.
The service report is saved to the Host PC from which you access WebPAM
PROe. The file name includes subsysteminfo, the date, and html.
Setting an Alias for the Subsystem
An alias is optional. To set an alias for this subsystem:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon.
2.
In Management View, click the Settings tab.
3.
Enter a name into the Alias field.
Maximum of 48 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,
and underscore.
4.
Click the Submit button.
Setting Redundancy for the Subsystem
To set redundancy for this subsystem:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon.
2.
In Management View, click the Settings tab.
3.
In the Redundancy Type dropdown menu, choose:
4.
•
Active-Active – Both RAID controllers are active and can share the
load
•
Active-Standby – One RAID controller is in standby mode and goes
active if the other fails
Click the Submit button.
If you change Redundancy Type, be sure both controllers are properly installed in
the subsystem before you restart.
If your subsystem has dual controllers and they are set to Active-Active, you can
use the LUN Affinity feature. See “Making Controller Settings” on page 122.
64
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Setting Cache Mirroring for the Subsystem
This option applies only to subsystems with two controllers. To use Cache
Mirroring, the Redundancy Type must be set to Active-Active.
To change Cache Mirroring for this subsystem:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon.
2.
In Management View, click the Settings tab.
3.
Do one of the following actions:
•
To enable Cache Mirroring, check the Cache Mirroring box.
•
To disable Cache Mirroring, uncheck the Cache Mirroring box.
4.
Click the Submit button.
5.
Restart the subsystem.
See “Restarting the Subsystem” on page 119.
Notes
•
If you disable Cache Mirroring, LUN Affinity will be enabled
automatically.
•
If you change Cache Mirroring, be sure both controllers are
properly installed in the subsystem before you restart.
Setting Subsystem Date and Time
To set a Date and Time for this subsystem:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Settings tab, choose Date and Time
Settings.
icon.
3.
Under Subsystem Date, choose the Month and Day from the dropdown
menus.
4.
Type the current year into the Year field.
5.
Under Subsystem Time, choose the Hour, Minutes, and Seconds from the
dropdown menus.
6.
Click the Submit button.
Making NTP Settings
After you have made Network Time Protocol (NTP) settings, the VTrak
subsystem synchronizes with a NTP server.
•
At startup
•
Every night
65
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
•
When you synchronize manually
To make NTP settings for the subsystem:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Settings tab, choose NTP Management.
icon.
3.
Check the NTP Service box to enable the NTP service.
4.
Enter the URLs for NTP servers in the fields provided.
One URL is required. Additional URLs are optional.
5.
6.
From the Time Zone dropdown menu, choose your time zone.
If your location observes Daylight Savings Time:
•
Check the Daylight Savings Time box.
•
Set the start date from the DST Start Time dropdown menus.
•
Set the end date from the DST End Time dropdown menus.
7.
Click the Submit button.
8.
Click the OK button in the notification dialog box.
Synchronizing with a NTP Server
The VTrak subsystem automatically synchronizes with a NTP server every night
and a startup. You have the option of synchronizing manually at any time.
To manually synchronize the VTrak with a NTP server:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Settings tab, choose NTP Management.
icon.
3.
Click the Start Time Sync button.
4.
Click the OK button in the notification dialog box.
Viewing the Runtime Event Log
Runtime Events lists information about the 1023 most recent runtime events
recorded since the system was started. To view runtime events:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon.
2.
In Management View, click the Events tab dropdown menu and choose
Runtime Events.
Events are displayed by:
•
Item Number – A consecutive decimal number assigned to a specific
event
•
Device – Battery, controller, logical drive, physical drive, port, etc.
66
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
3.
•
Event ID – The hexadecimal number that identifies the specific type of
event
•
Severity – See Table 2 on page 67
•
Time – Time and date of the occurrence
•
Description – A brief description of the event
Click the link at the top of the column by which you want to sort the events.
After you click the item, a triangle icon appears.
•
If the triangle points upward, the column is sorted low-to-high or old-tonew
•
If the triangle points downward, the column is sorted high-to-low or newto-old
Click the link a second time to change to flip the triangle and reverse the sort
sequence.
Table 2 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
Saving the Runtime Event Log
To save the runtime event log as a text file:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
In Management View, click the Events tab dropdown menu and choose
Runtime Events.
3.
Click the Save Event Log button.
4.
In the File Download dialog box, click the Save button.
5.
In the Save dialog box, name the file, navigate to the folder where you want
to save the log file, and click the Save button.
67
icon.
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Clearing the Runtime Event Log
To clear the runtime event log:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon.
2.
In Management View, click the Events tab dropdown menu and choose
Runtime Events.
3.
Click the Clear Event Log button.
4.
In the Confirmation dialog box, type confirm and click the OK button.
Viewing NVRAM Events
NVRAM Events are the most recent important events stored in non-volatile
memory. To view runtime events:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
In Management View, click the Events tab dropdown menu and choose
System Events in NVRAM.
icon.
Events are displayed by:
3.
•
Item Number – A consecutive decimal number assigned to a specific
event
•
Device – Battery, controller, logical drive, physical drive, port, etc.
•
Event ID – The hexadecimal number that identifies the specific type of
event
•
Severity – See Table 2 on page 67
•
Time – Time and date of the occurrence
•
Description – A brief description of the event
Click the link at the top of the column by which you want to sort the events.
After you click the item, a triangle icon appears.
•
If the triangle points upward, the column is sorted low-to-high or old-tonew
•
If the triangle points downward, the column is sorted high-to-low or newto-old
Click the link a second time to change to flip the triangle and reverse the sort
sequence.
68
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Saving NVRAM Events
To save the NVRAM event log as a text file:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon.
2.
In Management View, click the Events tab dropdown menu and choose
System Events in NVRAM.
3.
Click the Save Event Log button.
4.
In the File Download dialog box, click the Save button.
5.
In the Save dialog box, name the file, navigate to the folder where you want
to save the log file, and click the Save button.
Clearing NVRAM Events
To clear the NVRAM event log:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
In Management View, click the Events tab dropdown menu and choose
System Events in NVRAM.
icon.
3.
Click the Clear Event Log button.
4.
In the Confirmation dialog box, type confirm and click the OK button.
Viewing Current Background Activities
To view the current background activities:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
In Management View, click the Background Activities tab.
icon.
A list of current background activities appears, including:
•
Rebuild
•
PDM (Predictive Data Migration)
•
Synchronization
•
Redundancy Check
•
Migration
•
Transition
•
Initialization
•
Media Patrol
69
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Making Background Activity Settings
To make settings for background activities:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose
Settings.
3.
Click the dropdown menu to choose a priority of Low, Medium, and High for
the following functions:
•
icon.
Rebuild – Rebuilds data to a replacement physical drive in a disk array
•
Synchronization – Checks the data integrity on disk arrays
•
Initialization – Full initialization sets all data bits in the logical drive to a
specified pattern, such as all zeros
•
Redundancy Check – Checks, reports and can correct data
inconsistencies in logical drives
•
Migration – Change RAID level or add physical drives to disk arrays
•
PDM – Migrates data from a suspect physical drive to a replacement
drive in a disk array
•
Transition – Returns a revertible spare drive to spare status
The rates are defined as follows:
4.
5.
6.
•
Low – Fewer resources to activity, more to data read/write
•
Medium – Balance of resources to activity and data read/write
•
High – More resources to activity, fewer to data read/write
Highlight the following PDM trigger settings and type a value into the
corresponding field:
•
Reassigned Block Threshold – 1 to 512 blocks
•
Error Block Threshold – 1 to 1024 blocks
Check to enable or uncheck to disable the following functions:
•
Media Patrol – Checks the magnetic media on physical drives
•
Auto Rebuild – When enabled and no spare drive is available, the disk
array will begin to rebuild as soon as you replace the failed physical
drive with an unconfigured physical drive of equal or greater size
Click the Submit button to save your settings.
70
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Running Background Activities
To run a background activity from the Background Activities tab:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
icon.
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose one of
the following items:
•
Media Patrol – See “Running Media Patrol” below
•
Rebuild – See “Rebuilding a Disk Array” on page 148
•
PDM – See “Running PDM” on page 71
•
Transition – See “Transitioning a Disk Array” on page 150
•
Initialization – See “Initializing a Logical Drive” on page 155
•
Redundancy Check – See “Running Redundancy Check” on page 155
3.
In the next screen, make the choices as requested.
4.
Click the Start button.
Running Media Patrol
Media Patrol checks the magnetic media on physical drives. When it finds the
specified number of bad blocks, it will trigger PDM. See “Making Background
Activity Settings” on page 70. Also see “Media Patrol” on page 301.
You can also schedule a Media Patrol. See “Scheduling an Activity” on page 72.
To run Media Patrol:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose Start
Media Patrol.
icon.
3.
In the next screen, click the Start button.
Running PDM
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) migrates data from the suspect physical drive to
a spare disk drive, similar to Rebuilding. But unlike Rebuilding, PDM acts before
a disk drive fails and your Logical Drive goes Critical.
You an also run PDM on a specific disk array, see “Running PDM on a Disk
Array” on page 150. Also see “Predictive Data Migration (PDM)” on page 302.
To run PDM:
1.
In Tree View, click the Subsystem
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab choose Start
PDM.
71
icon.
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
3.
Choose the Array and Source physical drive.
The source drive is the physical drive at risk of failure.
4.
Choose the Target physical drive.
The target drive is the replacement physical drive.
5.
Click the Submit button.
Viewing Scheduled Activities
To view scheduled activities for this subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Scheduler tab in Management View.
icon Tree View.
Scheduling an Activity
To set a scheduled activity for this subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Scheduler tab, choose an item:
icon Tree View.
•
Media Patrol. See “Running Media Patrol” on page 71
•
Redundancy Check. See “Running Redundancy Check” on page 155
•
Battery Reconditioning. See “Reconditioning a Battery” on page 128
•
Spare Drive Check. See “Running Spare Check” on page 162
3.
In the Scheduler dialog box, check the Enable This Schedule box.
4.
Select a start time (24-hour clock).
5.
Select a Recurrence Pattern.
•
Daily – Enter the number of days between events.
•
Weekly – Enter the number of weeks between events and choose
which days of the week.
•
Monthly – Choose a calendar day of the month (1 – 31).
If you choose a higher number than there are days in the current month, the
actual start date will occur at the beginning of the following month.
Or, choose a day of the week and choose the first, second, third, fourth, or
last occurrence of that day in the month.
Then, choose the months in which you want the activity to occur.
6.
Select a Range of Occurrence.
•
Start-from date. The default is today's date.
•
End-on date.
Select No End Date (perpetual).
Or, choose a number of occurrences for this activity.
72
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Or, choose a specific end date. The default is today's date.
7.
For Redundancy Check only:
•
Choose the Auto Fix option. This feature attempts to repair the problem
when it finds an error.
•
Choose the Pause on Error option. This feature stops the process when
it finds an error
•
Check the boxes beside the logical drives (all except RAID 0) to which
this activity will apply.
Each logical drive can have only one scheduled Redundancy Check.
Note
You can schedule only ONE Redundancy Check for each logical
drive.
8.
Click the Submit button.
Deleting a Scheduled Activity
To delete a scheduled activity for this subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Scheduler tab, choose Delete Schedules.
icon Tree View.
3.
Check the box to the left of the schedule you want to delete.
4.
Click the Submit button.
Viewing Lock Status
The lock prevents other sessions (including by the same user) from making a
configuration change to the controller until the lock expires or a forced unlock is
done.
To view the lock status for this subsystem:
1.
2.
Click the Subsystem
icon Tree View.
Click the Lock tab in Management View.
The following information is displayed:
•
Lock Status – The User who set (owns) the current lock.
•
Expiration Time – Amount of time left until the lock automatically
releases.
•
Expire At Time – The date and time when the lock will automatically
release.
73
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Setting the Lock
The lock prevents other sessions (including by the same user) from making a
configuration change to the controller until the lock expires or a forced unlock is
done.
You can set the lock to last from one minute to one day. To set the lock for this
subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Lock tab in Management View.
3.
Click the Lock option.
4.
icon Tree View.
Enter a time interval that you want the lock to stay active.
The range is 1 to 1440 minutes. 1440 minutes equals one day.
5.
Click the Submit button.
Renewing the Lock
The lock prevents other sessions (including by the same user) from making a
configuration change to the controller until the lock expires or a forced unlock is
done.
Renewing the lock extends the period of time the controller remains locked. To
renew an existing lock for this subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Lock tab in Management View.
icon Tree View.
3.
Click the Renew option.
4.
Enter a time interval that you want the lock to stay active.
The range is 1 to 1440 minutes. 1440 minutes equals one day.
The renew time replaces the previous Expiration Time.
5.
Click the Submit button.
Releasing the Lock
The lock prevents other sessions (including by the same user) from making a
configuration change to the controller until the lock expires or a forced unlock is
done.
When the user who locked the controller logs out, the lock is automatically
released. You can also release the lock before the scheduled time.
74
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
To release the lock for this subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Lock tab in Management View.
icon Tree View.
If you are the User who set the lock, click the Unlock option.
If another User set the lock and you are a Super User, click the Unlock
option and check the Force Unlock box.
3.
Click the Submit button.
75
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing Users
User Management includes all functions dealing with user accounts. Functions
include:
•
Viewing User Information (page 76)
•
Creating a User (page 76)
•
Setting-up Event Notification (page 77)
•
Changing Another User’s Settings (page 78)
•
Changing Your Own User Settings (page 79)
•
Changing Another User’s Password (page 79)
•
Changing Your Own Password (page 80)
•
Deleting a User (page 80)
•
Viewing User Sessions (page 80)
•
Logging out Other Users (page 81)
Viewing User Information
The view a list of users, their status, access privileges, display name, and email
address:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the User Management
icon.
icon.
The Information tab appears in Management View.
Creating a User
To create a user:
1.
Log into WebPAM PROe as the Administrator or a Super User.
2.
Click the Subsystem
3.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon in Tree View.
icon.
4.
Click the User Management
5.
Click the Create tab in Management View.
6.
icon.
Provide the following information as required:
•
Enter a user name into the User Name field.
•
Enter a password into the New Password and Retype Password fields.
Maximum of 31 characters, no spaces.
76
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Maximum of 31 characters, no spaces. A password is optional. If you do
not specify a password, log into WebPAM PROe with the User Name
and leave the password field blank.
•
Enter a display name into the Display Name field.
•
Enter the user's email address into the Email Address field.
•
Choose a privilege level from the Privilege dropdown menu.
A display name is optional. Maximum of 31 characters, no spaces.
An email address is required in order to receive email event notification.
See Table 3 below.
7.
Optional. Uncheck the Enabled box to disable this user on this subsystem.
8.
Click the Submit button.
Table 3 User Privileges
Level
Meaning
View
Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make
any changes
Maintenance
Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including
Rebuilding, PDM, Media Patrol, and Redundancy Check
Power
Allows the user to create (but not delete) disk arrays and logical
drives, change RAID levels, change stripe size; change settings
of components such as disk arrays, logical drives, physical
drives, and the controller
Super
Allows the user full access to all functions including create and
delete users and changing the settings of other users, and
delete disk arrays and logical drives
The default “administrator” account is a Super User
Setting-up Event Notification
Event notification requires one or more user event subscriptions (below) and
subsystem service settings. See “Making Event Notification Settings” on page 98.
To make or change a user event subscription:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the User Management
4.
Click the Event Subscription tab in Management View.
5.
Check the box to enable event notification.
icon.
icon.
77
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
6.
Under the subheadings, choose the lowest level of Severity to be reported
for each event. See Table 4 on page 78.
7.
Click the Submit button.
The user’s account must have an email address. See “Changing Another User’s
Settings” on page 78.
To send a test message to the email address in the listed under General Info,
click the Test Email button.
Table 4 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
Changing Another User’s Settings
To change settings of other users:
1.
Log into WebPAM PROe as the Administrator or a Super User.
2.
Click the Subsystem
3.
Click the Administrative Tools
4.
Click the User Management
5.
On the Information tab, click the link of the user whose settings you want to
change.
6.
On the user settings screen,
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
•
Check the Enable box to enable this user
•
Uncheck the Enable box to disable this user
•
Enter or change the display name
•
Enter or change the email address
•
From the Privilege dropdown menu, choose a new level
See Table 3 on page 77.
7.
Click the Submit button.
78
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Important
If you disable a user that is currently logged on, that user’s
session terminates immediately. A disabled user cannot log in until
the account is enabled.
Changing Your Own User Settings
To change your own user settings:
1.
Log into WebPAM PROe under your own user name.
2.
Click the Subsystem
3.
Click the Administrative Tools
4.
Click the User Management
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
5.
Click the Settings tab in Management View.
6.
Enter or change the display name or mail address.
7.
Click the Submit button.
Changing Another User’s Password
To change a user’s password:
1.
Log into WebPAM PROe as the Administrator or a Super User.
2.
Click the Subsystem
3.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon in Tree View.
icon.
4.
Click the User Management
5.
In the list of users, click the link of the user whose password you want to
change.
icon.
6.
Click the Password tab in Management View.
7.
Enter a new password into the New Password and Retype Password fields.
Maximum of 31 characters, no spaces.
8.
Click the Submit button.
Important
Be sure the user knows the new password. Otherwise the user
cannot log into WebPAM PROe.
79
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Changing Your Own Password
To set or change your own password:
1.
Log into WebPAM PROe under your own user name.
2.
Click the Subsystem
3.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon in Tree View.
icon.
4.
Click the User Management
5.
Click the Password tab in Management View.
6.
icon.
Enter the current password in the Old Password field.
If you do not have a password, leave this field blank.
7.
Enter a new password into the New Password and Retype Password fields.
Maximum of 31 characters, no spaces.
8.
Click the Submit button.
Deleting a User
WebPAM PROe requires at least one Super User account. A logged-in user
cannot delete his own user account. Rather than delete a user, you can deny
access by disabling a user. See “Changing Another User’s Settings” on page 78.
To delete a user:
1.
Log into WebPAM PROe as the Administrator or a Super User.
2.
Click the Subsystem
3.
Click the Administrative Tools
4.
Click the User Management
5.
Click the Delete tab in Management View.
6.
Check the box to the left of the user you want to delete.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
7.
Click the Submit button.
8.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Viewing User Sessions
To view the current sessions:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the User Management
4.
Click the Sessions tab in Management View.
icon.
icon.
80
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Logging out Other Users
To log out other users:
1.
Log into WebPAM PROe as the Administrator or a Super User.
2.
Click the Subsystem
3.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon in Tree View.
icon.
4.
Click the User Management
5.
Click the Sessions tab in Management View.
icon.
6.
Check the box to the left of the user you want to log out.
7.
Click the Logout button.
8.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
81
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing the Network Connection
The network connection deals with network connections to the VTrak’s
Management Ports. Functions include:
•
Making Virtual Management Port Settings (page 82)
•
Making Controller Management Port Settings (page 82)
Making Virtual Management Port Settings
The VTrak subsystem has a virtual management port. When you log into the
VTrak over your network, you use the virtual management port, enabling you to
log into a VTrak with two controllers using one IP address.
Before you change settings, please see “Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address”
on page 40.
To make changes to the Virtual Management Port settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Network Management
4.
Click the Port Configuration link on the Management Port tab.
5.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
To enable DHCP, check the DHCP box.
When DHCP is NOT enabled, enter:
6.
•
Primary IP address
•
Primary subnet mask
•
Default gateway IP address
•
Enter a primary DNS server IP address
Click the Submit button.
Making Controller Management Port Settings
The controller has an IP addresses for access when the controller goes into
maintenance mode. Maintenance mode is only for remedial action in the event of
a problem with the controller. See “Controller Enters Maintenance Mode” on
page 345 for more information.
To make changes to the Controller Management Port settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Network Management
4.
Click the Maintenance Mode tab in Management View.
icon.
icon.
82
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
5.
6.
Click the Port Configuration link for Controller 1 or 2
To enable DHCP, check the DHCP box.
When DHCP is NOT enabled, enter:
•
Primary IP address
•
Primary subnet mask
•
Default gateway IP address
•
Enter a primary DNS server IP address.
7.
Click the Submit button.
8.
Click the Maintenance Mode tab again.
9.
Click the Port Configuration link for the other controller and repeat the
steps 6 and 7 for the other controller.
83
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing Fibre Channel Connections
This feature pertains to VTrak Fibre Channel models. Functions include:
•
Viewing Fibre Channel Node Information (page 84)
•
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Settings (page 84)
•
Making Fibre Channel Port Settings (page 85)
•
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics (page 86)
•
Viewing SFP Information (page 87)
•
Viewing Fibre Channel Logged-in Devices (page 88)
•
Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators (page 88)
Viewing Fibre Channel Node Information
To view Fibre Channel node information:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Fibre Channel Management
4.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
Click the Node tab in Management View.
The current node (data port) settings the Controller are shown, including:
•
WWNN – World Wide Node Name
•
Supported Features – Class of service
•
Maximum Frame Size – 2048 bits
•
Supported Speeds – 4 Gb/s, 2Gb/s, or 1 Gb/s
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Settings
To view the current Fibre Channel port settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Fibre Channel Management
4.
Click the Port tab in Management View
icon.
icon.
The current data port settings the Controller are shown, including:
•
State – Online, Offline, Unknown
•
Port Identifier – A hexadecimal name for this port
•
Topology Attached – See the table on page 86
•
WWNN – World Wide Node Name
•
WWPN – World Wide Port Name
84
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
•
Fabric WWNN – World Wide Node Name (appears when connected to
a switch)
•
Fabric WWPN – World Wide Port Name (appears when connected to a
switch)
•
Current Speed – 4 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, or 1 Gb/s
•
Link Type – Long-wave laser, short-wave laser or electrical
•
Link Speed* – 4 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 1 Gb/s, or Auto
•
Topology* – NL-Port, N-Port, or Auto
•
Hard ALPA* – Address can be 0 to 254. 255 means this feature is
disabled
•
Alias WWPN
* Denotes items that you can change under Port Settings, below.
Making Fibre Channel Port Settings
To make Fibre Channel port settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Fibre Channel Management
4.
Click the Port tab in Management View
icon.
icon.
5.
Click the Port1 or Port2 link in Management View.
6.
Make the settings appropriate to your system. See “Port Setting Information”
on page 85.
7.
•
Configured Link Speed – 4 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 1 Gb/s or Auto (self-setting)
•
Configured Topology – N-Port (Point-to-Point), NL Port (Arbitrated
Loop) or Auto (self-setting)
•
Hard ALPA – Address can be 0 to 254. 255 means this feature is
disabled. An ALPA identifies a port in an arbitrated loop.
Click the Submit button to save your settings.
Port Setting Information
The table below shows the type of attached topology you will achieve based
on your connection type and the configured topology you select.
85
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Fibre Channel Attached Topology
Configured Topology
Connection Type
N-Port
NL-Port
Switch
Fabric Direct
Public Loop
Direct
Point to Point
Private Loop
Example 1: If you connect the VTrak to a Fibre Channel switch and choose
NL-Port topology, you will create a Public Loop attached topology.
Example 2: If you have a Point to Point attached topology, you made a
direct connection (no switch) and selected N-port topology.
Note
In some cases, HBA settings to N-Port only work if connected to
the switch. Refer to your HBA manual for more information.
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics
To view statistics for the Fibre Channel ports:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Fibre Channel Management
4.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
Click the Statistic tab in Management View.
The statistics for all Fibre Channel ports are shown.
Property Definitions
Definitions of the properties for which statistical information is reported appears in
the list below.
•
Time Since Last Reset – Time in minutes since the system has been
running.
•
Number of Frames Sent – Number of frames sent since last reset.
•
Number of Frames Received – Number of frames received since last reset.
•
Number of Words Sent – Number of words sent since last reset.
•
Number of Words Received – Number of words received since last reset.
•
LIP Count – Loop Initialization Primitive Sequence. This primitive sequence
applies only to the arbitrated loop topology. It is transmitted by an L_Port to
initialize or re-initialize the loop.
86
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
•
NOS Count – Not Operational Primitive Sequence. This primitive sequence
is used during link initialization between two N_Ports in the point-to-point
topology or an N_Port and an F_Port in the fabric topology.
NOS is sent to indicate that the transmitting port has detected a link failure or
is offline. The expected response to a port sending NOS is the OLS primitive
sequence.
•
Number of Error Frames – FC devices propagate handshake signals backand-forth requesting and acknowledging each byte transferred. FC transfers
occur in one frame of data at a time. In this case, the value reflects the
number of frames with errors.
•
Number of Dumped Frames – This field specifies the number of frames
dumped due to a lack of host buffers.
•
Link Failure Count – Number of times the link has failed. Can be caused by
a disconnected link or a bad fiber element.
•
Loss Sync Count – Number of times a loss of sync has occurred since last
reset.
•
Primitive Sequence Error Count – An ordered set transmitted repeatedly
and used to establish and maintain a link.
LR, LRR, NOS, and OLS are primitive sequences used to establish an active
link in a connection between two N_Ports or an N_Port and an F_Port.
LIP, LPB, and LPE are primitive sequences used in the Arbitrated Loop
topology for initializing the loop and enabling or disabling an L_Port.
•
Invalid Word Sent Count – Number of invalid words sent since last reset.
•
Invalid CRC Count – Invalid Cyclical Redundancy Count. Number of frames
received with an invalid CRC since last reset.
•
Initiator IO Count – I/O Count on the initiator on the host side.
Clearing Statistics
To clear statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 115.
Viewing SFP Information
SFPs (small form-factor pluggable) transceivers connect the ports the VTrak
controllers to the Fibre Channel fabric.
To view SFP information:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Fibre Channel Management
4.
Click the SFP tab in Management View.
icon.
87
icon.
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
The SFP information includes:
•
Connector – Type of connector
•
Transceiver – SFP
•
Transceiver Code – Defines the method to interpret the transceiver
type and compatibility options
•
Serial Encoding – Serial encoding algorithm
•
Bit Rate – In gigabits per second
•
Link Length – The maximum link length depending the type of fiber
•
Vendor Name – Vendor name of the SFP transceiver
•
Vendor OUI – Organizational Unique Identifier, SFP vendor’s IEEE
company ID
•
Manufacturing Date – Code with 2 digits each for year, month, day,
and optional vendor-specific lot number
Viewing Fibre Channel Logged-in Devices
To view a list of the devices currently logged into the VTrak:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Fibre Channel Management
4.
Click the Logged In Device tab in Management View.
icon.
icon.
One of the devices in the list will be the port itself. If there is no other device,
this notification will appear: “There is no logged in device.” If a Fibre Channel
switch is attached, it will also appear in this list.
Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators
You must add an initiator to the VTrak's initiator list in order to use the initiator to
create a LUN for your logical drive.
To view a list of recognized initiators:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Fibre Channel Management
4.
Click the Initiators on Fabric tab in Management View.
icon.
icon.
A Fibre Channel switch will also display as an initiator in the list. If your Host
PC’s Fibre Channel HBA is connected to the VTrak directly (not though a
Fibre Channel switch), the initiator will NOT display in the initiator list.
88
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Adding an Initiator
To add an initiator to the VTrak’s initiator list:
1.
Check the box to the left of the initiator.
2.
Click the Add to Initiator List button.
The initiator appears under Storage Services. See page 93. You can then use the
initiator to create a LUN. See “Adding a LUN Map” on page 94.
89
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing SAS Connections
This feature pertains to VTrak Serial Attached SCSI models. Functions include:
•
Viewing SAS Port Information (page 90)
•
Making SAS Port Settings (page 90)
•
Viewing SAS Port Statistics (page 91)
•
Viewing SAS Initiators (page 91)
Viewing SAS Port Information
A SAS Controller can have one or two SAS channels. Each SAS channel has two
ports:
•
Host In or Data Port (with a diamond icon)
•
Host In/Out or Data Cascade Port (with a circle icon)
See pages 19 through 33 for information about how these ports are physically
connected to the Host PC or other subsystems.
To view information about the SAS ports:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
icon in Tree View.
Click the SAS Management
icon.
icon.
The port information appears the screen.
•
Channel ID
•
Port Type
•
Link Status
•
Link Speed
•
SAS Address
•
Cable Signal Strength (adjustable under Port Settings)
See pages 19 through 33 for information about how these ports are physically
connected to the Host PC or other subsystems.
Making SAS Port Settings
A SAS Controller can have one or two SAS channels. Each SAS channel has two
ports:
•
Host In or Data Port (with a diamond icon)
•
Host In/Out or Data Cascade Port (with a circle icon)
90
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
To make settings to the SAS ports:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3.
Click the SAS Management
4.
In Management View, click the Port 1 or Port 2 link.
5.
icon.
From the Cable Signal Strength dropdown menu, choose a value.
The range is 1 to 8. 1 is the default. Signal strength correlates to cable length
in meters. Example: If you have a 2 m SAS cable, set signal strength to 2. If
performance is unsatisfactory (see “Viewing SAS Port Statistics” on
page 91), try settings of 1 and 3, then use the best setting for your system.
6.
Click the Submit button.
Viewing SAS Port Statistics
The SAS Management Statistics tab displays statistical information about all of
the SAS ports on the VTrak subsystem.
To view information about the SAS ports:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the SAS Management
4.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
In Management View, click the Statistic tab.
The statistics for the selected port appear the screen.
Clearing Statistics
To clear statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 115.
Viewing SAS Initiators
You must add an initiator to the VTrak's initiator list in order to use the initiator to
create a LUN for your logical drive.
To view a list of recognized initiators:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the SAS Management
4.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
In Management View, click the Initiators tab.
A list of all currently logged-in initiators appears the screen.
91
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Adding an Initiator
To add an initiator to the VTrak’s initiator list:
1.
Check the box to the left of the initiator.
2.
Click the Add to Initiator List button.
The initiator appears under Storage Services. See page 93. You can then use the
initiator to create a LUN. See “Adding a LUN Map” on page 94.
92
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Managing Storage Services
Storage services deal with initiators and LUN mapping for Fibre Channel models
and for Serial Attached SCSI models. LUN masking is the process of applying a
LUN Map so that each initiator can only access the LUNs specified for it.
Features include:
•
Adding an Initiator (page 93)
•
Deleting an Initiator (page 94)
•
Viewing the LUN Map (page 94)
•
Enabling LUN Masking (page 94)
•
Adding a LUN Map (page 94)
•
Editing a LUN Map (page 95)
Adding an Initiator
You must add an initiator to the VTrak's initiator list in order to use the initiator to
create a LUN map.
To add an initiator:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3.
Click the Storage Services
4.
Click the Initiators tab in Management View.
icon.
5.
From the Initiators tab dropdown menu, choose Add Initiator.
6.
Enter the initiator's name in the Initiator Name field.
•
Fibre Channel – A Fibre Channel initiator name is the World Wide Port
Name of the device and is composed of a series of eight, two-digit
hexadecimal numbers.
•
SAS – A SAS initiator name is the SAS address of the HBA card in the
Host PC. Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host
system.
Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host system.
Note that the initiator name you input must match exactly in order for the
connection to work.
7.
Click the Submit button.
You can also add initiators from the Fibre Channel or SAS Initiators tab. See
“Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators” on page 88 and “Viewing SAS Initiators” on
page 91.
93
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Deleting an Initiator
To delete an initiator:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Storage Services
icon.
icon.
4.
Click the Initiators tab in Management View.
5.
From the Initiators tab dropdown menu, choose Delete Initiators.
6.
Check the box to the left of the initiator you want to delete.
7.
Click the Submit button.
Viewing the LUN Map
To view the current LUN Map:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3.
Click the Storage Services
4.
Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.
icon.
Enabling LUN Masking
LUN masking must be enabled in order to assign LUNs to logical drives.
To enable the LUN Masking:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Storage Services
4.
Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.
5.
Click the Enable LUN Masking box.
6.
Click the Submit button.
icon.
icon.
Adding a LUN Map
You must add an initiator to the VTrak's initiator list in order to use the initiator to
create a LUN map. LUN masking must be enabled in order to assign LUNs to
logical drives.
94
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
To edit the LUN Map:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Storage Services
4.
Click the LUN Map tab in Management View and from the dropdown menu,
choose Add LUN Map.
5.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
Choose an initiator from the Initiator dropdown list.
Or enter the initiator’s name in the Initiator Name field.
Note that the initiator name you input must match exactly in order for the
connection to work.
6.
In the LUN Mapping & Masking list, enter a LUN for each logical drive.
You must enter different LUN numbers for each logical drive.
7.
Click the Submit button.
Editing a LUN Map
To edit the LUN Map:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Storage Services
4.
Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.
5.
From the LUN Mapping & Masking Information list, choose an initiator and
click its link.
icon.
icon.
Or enter the initiator's name in the Initiator Name field.
Note that the initiator name you input must match exactly in order for the
connection to work.
6.
In the LUN field, enter a LUN for each logical drive.
You must enter different LUN numbers for each logical drive.
7.
Click the Submit button.
95
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Monitoring Performance
The Performance Monitoring displays real-time performance statistics for logical
drives, physical drives, and data ports. The vertical scale adjusts dynamically to
accommodate the statistical data.
Because it reports performance in real-time, to see data in the monitor, there
must be I/O data activity taking place between the VTrak subsystem and the
Host.
Figure 6. Performance monitor
To view Performance Monitoring:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon.
96
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
3.
Click the Performance Monitoring
icon.
Under the Information tab, you can see:
4.
5.
•
Logical Drive Statistics
•
Physical Drive Statistics
•
Data Port Statistics
From the dropdown menus, choose the measurement you want to see:
•
Bandwidth in MB/s
•
I/Os per second
•
Average Latency
•
Maximum Latency
•
Minimum Latency
•
% Used Cache – Percentage of the controller cache used (logical drives
only)
•
% of Used Cache Dirty – Percentage of controller cache used by data
that is not saved to disk (logical drives only)
In the device lists, click the devices you want to see in the chart.
You can choose up to 4 devices.
Click a device to choose it.
Click the device again to release it.
For historical reports on the components listed above, see:
•
“Viewing Logical Drive Statistics” on page 154
•
“Viewing Physical Drive Statistics” on page 133
•
“Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics” on page 86
•
“Viewing SAS Port Statistics” on page 91
See also “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on page 307.
97
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing Software Services
Software Services include the following functions:
•
Making Event Notification Settings (page 98)
•
Making SLP Settings (page 99)
•
Making Web Server Settings (page 100)
•
Making Telnet Settings (page 101)
•
Making SSH Settings (page 102)
•
Making SNMP Settings (page 102)
•
Managing SNMP Trap Sinks (page 103)
•
Making CIM Settings (page 104)
•
Making Netsend Settings (page 105)
•
Managing Netsend Recipients (page 106)
Making Event Notification Settings
Event notification requires subsystem service settings (below) and one or more
user event subscriptions. See “Setting-up Event Notification” on page 77.
To make Email service settings for event notification:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Email Setting link on the Service tab.
4.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
Enter information or change settings as required.
•
Enter the IP address or server name for your SMTP server.
•
Enter a new server port number for your SMTP server. 25 is the default.
•
Choose Yes to enable SMTP authentication or No to disable.
If you chose Yes for SMTP authentication, enter a Username and
Password into the fields provided.
5.
•
Enter an Email sender address (example:
RAIDmaster@mycompany.com).
•
Enter an Email subject (example: Event notification).
Click the Submit button.
Sending a Test Message
To send one test message to the User currently logged into WebPAM PROe:
1.
Under Test Email, check the Send A Test Email box.
2.
Click the Submit button.
98
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
If you do not receive the Test Email message, see your Network Administrator for
assistance with the mail server setup, email accounts, and other issues.
Changing the Startup Setting
1.
2.
Under Startup Type:
•
Click the Automatic option to start the service automatically during
system startup. Recommended.
•
Click the Manual option to start the service manually (the service does
not start during system startup).
Click the Submit button.
Stopping Email service
To stop the Email service:
1.
Click the Stop button.
2.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Starting or Restarting Email service
To start or restart the Email service, click the Start or Restart button.
Making SLP Settings
VTrak's SLP service discovers services available over the Internet. To make SLP
service settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Software Management
4.
Click the SLP link on the Service tab.
5.
6.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
Choose the Startup Type.
•
Click the Automatic option to start the service automatically during
system startup. Recommended.
•
Click the Manual option to start the service manually (the service does
not start during system startup).
Click the Submit button.
Stopping SLP service
To stop the SLP service:
1.
Click the Stop button.
2.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
99
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Starting or Restarting SLP service
To start or restart the SLP service, click the Start or Restart button.
Making Web Server Settings
VTrak’s Web Server service connects the VTrak GUI to the VTrak subsystem
though your browser.
To make Web Server settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Webserver link on the Service tab.
4.
icon.
Enter information or change settings as required.
•
Enter a new HTTP Port number. 80 is the default.
•
Enter a new Session Time Out interval.
This setting causes WebPAM PROe to time-out after a period of
inactivity. 24 minutes is the default. The range is 1 to 1440 minutes (one
day).
•
If you want to use a secure connection, check the Enable SSL box.
If you checked the Enable SSL box, accept the default or enter a new
HTTPS Port number. 443 is the default.
•
If you want to download a SSL Certificate, check the Download
Certificate box.
If you checked the Download Certificate box, enter the Certificate
filename or click the Browse... button to locate it.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
Click OK in the confirmation box to restart the Web Server service with your
changes.
Changing the Startup Setting
1.
2.
Under Startup Type:
•
Click the Automatic option to start the service automatically during
system startup. Recommended.
•
Click the Manual option to start the service manually (the service does
not start during system startup).
Click the Submit button.
100
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Stopping Web Server service
To stop the Web Server service:
1.
Click the Stop button.
2.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Starting or Restarting Web Server service
To start or restart the Web Server service, click the Start or Restart button.
Making Telnet Settings
VTrak’s Telnet service enables you to access VTrak’s Command Line Interface
(CLI) through a network connection. To make Telnet settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Telnet link on the Service tab.
4.
icon.
Enter information or change settings as required.
•
Enter the Telnet Port number. 2300 is the default.
•
Enter the Maximum Number of Connections. 4 is the default.
•
Enter the Session Time Out interval. 24 minutes is the default.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
Click OK in the confirmation box to restart the Telnet service with your
changes.
Changing the Startup Setting
1.
2.
Under Startup Type:
•
Click the Automatic option to start the service automatically during
system startup. Recommended.
•
Click the Manual option to start the service manually (the service does
not start during system startup).
Click the Submit button.
Stopping Telnet service
To stop the Telnet service:
1.
Click the Stop button.
2.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Starting or Restarting Telnet service
To start or restart the Telnet service, click the Start or Restart button.
101
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Making SSH Settings
VTrak’s Secure Shell (SSH) service enables you to access VTrak’s Command
Line Interface (CLI) through a network connection. To make SSH settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the SSH link on the Service tab.
4.
icon.
Enter information or change settings as required.
•
Enter the SSH Port number. 22 is the default.
•
Enter the Maximum Number of Connections. 4 is the default.
•
Enter the Session Time Out interval. 24 minutes is the default.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
Click OK in the confirmation box to restart the SSH service with your
changes.
Changing the Startup Setting
1.
2.
Under Startup Type:
•
Click the Automatic option to start the service automatically during
system startup. Recommended.
•
Click the Manual option to start the service manually (the service does
not start during system startup).
Click the Submit button.
Stopping SSH service
To stop the SSH service:
1.
Click the Stop button.
2.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Starting or Restarting SSH service
To start or restart the SSH service, click the Start or Restart button.
Making SNMP Settings
VTrak’s SNMP service enables the SNMP browser to obtain information from the
VTrak. The Trap Sink is where SNMP events are sent and can be viewed.
To change the SNMP settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the SNMP link on the Service tab.
icon.
102
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
4.
Enter information or change settings as required.
•
Enter the SNMP Port number. 161 is the default.
•
Enter a System Name. There is no default name.
•
Enter a System Location. USA is the default.
•
Enter a System Contact. The email address of the administrator or other
individual.
•
Enter the Read Community. Public is the default.
The Write Community is set to Private, no options.
To add a Trap Sink, see “Adding Trap Sinks” below.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
Click OK in the confirmation box to restart the SNMP service with your
changes.
Changing the Startup Setting
1.
2.
Under Startup Type:
•
Click the Automatic option to start the service automatically during
system startup. Recommended.
•
Click the Manual option to start the service manually (the service does
not start during system startup).
Click the Submit button.
Stopping SNMP service
To stop the SNMP service:
1.
Click the Stop button.
2.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Starting or Restarting SNMP service
To start or restart the SNMP service, click the Start or Restart button.
Managing SNMP Trap Sinks
Adding Trap Sinks
To add a SNMP trap sink:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3.
Click the SNMP link on the Service tab.
4.
Enter a Trap Sink IP address.
5.
Choose a Trap Filter.
103
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
The severity level you choose and all higher levels will pass the trap filter.
See Table 5.
6.
Click the Update button.
The new trap sink appears in the Trap Sinks list.
7.
Click the Submit button to add the new trap sink.
8.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Table 5 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
Deleting Trap Sinks
To delete a SNMP trap sink:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the SNMP link on the Service tab.
icon.
4.
Highlight the trap sink you want to delete from the list.
5.
Click the Delete button and then the Submit button.
6.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Making CIM Settings
VTrak’s CIM (Common Information Model [a protocol]) service provides a
database for information about computer systems and network devices.
To change the CIM settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the CIM Setting link in Management View.
4.
Enter information or change settings as required.
icon.
104
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
•
To use a HTTP connection, beside CIM HTTP Enabled choose the Yes
option and enter a port number in the field provided (5988 is the default)
•
To use a HTTPS connection, beside CIM HTTPS Enabled choose the
Yes option and enter a port number in the field provided (5989 is the
default)
•
To use CIM authentication, beside CIM authentication choose the Yes
option
•
To change your password, beside Change Password, choose the Yes
option.
Enter the old password and a new password into the fields provided.
The default password is password.
There is only one user. The default name is cim. No changes are possible.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Changing the Startup Setting
1.
2.
Under Startup Type:
•
Click the Automatic option to start the service automatically during
system startup. Recommended.
•
Click the Manual option to start the service manually (the service does
not start during system startup).
Click the Submit button.
Stopping CIM service
To stop the CIM service:
1.
Click the Stop button.
2.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Starting or Restarting CIM service
To start or restart the CIM service, click the Start or Restart button.
Making Netsend Settings
This service is normally Stopped and set to Manual start. See “Managing
Netsend Recipients” on page 106.
To change the Netsend settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Netsend link on the Service tab.
icon.
4.
Click the Start button to start the Netsend service.
105
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
5.
Click the Submit button.
Changing the Startup Setting
1.
2.
Under Startup Type:
•
Click the Automatic option to start the service automatically during
system startup. Recommended if you plan to use this feature.
•
Click the Manual option to start the service manually (the service does
not start during system startup). The default setting.
Click the Submit button.
Stopping Netsend service
To stop the Netsend service:
1.
Click the Stop button.
2.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Starting or Restarting Netsend service
To start or restart the Netsend service, click the Start or Restart button.
Managing Netsend Recipients
VTrak’s Netsend service sends VTrak subsystem events in the form of text
messages to your Host PC and other networked PCs. See “Making Netsend
Settings” on page 105.
Netsend Requirements
In order to use Netsend:
•
Netsend must be running the VTrak
•
You must provide the IP address for each recipient PC
•
The Messenger service must be running on each recipient PC
If your Netsend and Messenger service settings are correct but the recipient PC
does not receive event messages, check the recipient PC’s Firewall settings.
Refer to your OS documentation for more information.
Adding Netsend recipients
To add a Netsend recipient:
1.
2.
In the Recipient Address field, type the IP address of the recipient PC.
Choose a Recipient filter.
The severity level you choose and all higher levels will pass the recipient
filter. See Table 6.
3.
Click the Update button to add the new recipient to the list.
4.
Click the Submit button.
106
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
5.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
Table 6 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
Deleting Netsend Recipients
To delete a Netsend recipient:
1.
Highlight the recipient you want to delete in the recipient list.
2.
Click the Delete button to remove the recipient from the list.
3.
Click the Submit button.
4.
Click OK in the confirmation box.
107
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Exporting the User Database
You can export the User Database file to share user information and settings
among multiple VTrak subsystems.
The Export action saves a text file to a designated folder on the Host PC. From
there, you can import the User Database file to other VTrak subsystems.
To export the User Database file:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Export link in Management View.
4.
Click the Export button.
5.
In the Opening export dialog box, click the Save to Disk option.
6.
Click the OK button.
icon.
The user database file is saved to the Host PC from which you access
WebPAM PROe. The file name is export.
Note
The Encryption box is grayed out. Encryption is always enabled.
108
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Exporting a Configuration Script
You can export a configuration script file to share the subsystem and RAID
settings among multiple VTrak subsystems.
The Export action saves a text file to a designated folder on the Host PC. From
there, you can import the Configuration Script to other VTrak subsystems.
To export the Configuration Script file:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Export link in Management View.
4.
Click the Export button.
5.
In the Opening export dialog box, click the Save to Disk option.
6.
Click the OK button.
icon.
The Configuration Script is saved to the Host PC from which you access
WebPAM PROe. The file name is configscript.
Note
The Encryption box is grayed out. Encryption is always enabled.
109
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Importing a User Database
Caution
Do NOT use this function to update the VTrak firmware.
The Software Management–Import tab enables you to import the User Database
file from the Host PC's file system to the VTrak subsystem. When you make user
settings to one VTrak, you can export the User Database file to the Host PC.
From there, you can import the User Database file to other VTraks so that all
have the same User information and settings.
To import the User Database file to this subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Software Management
icon.
icon.
4.
Click the Import tab.
5.
Under the Type dropdown list, choose User Database.
6.
Enter the name of the file to be imported.
Or, click the Browse... button to search for the file.
Look for a file called export.
7.
8.
Click the Submit button.
Click the Next button.
If the imported file is a valid user database, a warning will appear to inform
you that it will overwrite the previous settings.
9.
In the Warning box, click the OK button.
This user settings are applied to this VTrak subsystem.
Note
The Decryption box is grayed out. Decryption is enabled for user
databases.
110
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Importing a Configuration Script
The Software Management–Import tab enables you to import a Configuration
Script to the VTrak subsystem.
You can write a CLI configuration script to automatically configure your VTrak
subsystem. The script must be a plain, non-encrypted text file. Or you can export
a Configuration Script from a previously configured VTrak subsystem.
The Import function runs the script and performs the configuration automatically.
Caution
Configuration scripts are designed for newly configured
subsystems.
Configuration scripts are NOT designed to restore a previous
configuration after a subsystem repair. Before you import a script
to restore your subsystem configuration, contact Technical
Support. See page 355.
To import a Configuration Script to this subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Software Management
4.
Click the Import tab.
5.
Under the Type dropdown list, choose Configuration Script.
6.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
Enter the name of the file to be imported.
Or, click the Browse... button to search for the file.
7.
Click the Submit button.
8.
Click the Next button.
If the imported file is a valid configuration script, a warning will appear to
inform you that it will overwrite the previous settings.
9.
In the Warning box, click the OK button.
The new configuration is applied to this VTrak subsystem.
Note
The Decryption box is grayed out. Decryption is disabled for
configuration scripts.
111
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Updating the Firmware
This procedure is covered in Chapter 6: Maintenance. See “Updating the
Firmware in WebPAM PROe” on page 249 for instructions.
112
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Viewing Flash Image Information
Flash image information refers to the package of firmware components running
on your VTrak controller or controllers.
To view flash image information:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Software Management
4.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
Click the Image Version tab.
The flash image information displays on the screen.
•
Enclosure Number – 1 (one) is the Head Unit. Other numbers are
cascaded or expanded subsystems
•
Image Condition – Running is the firmware currently running on the
controllers. Flashed is the firmware flashed to memory
•
Image Type – A specific component
•
Controller ID – 1 or 2
•
Version number
•
Build date
•
Flash (installation) date
If the Running and Flashed Images do not match, the VTrak has not
restarted since the firmware was last updated. Restart the VTrak to run the
Flashed firmware package. See “Restarting the Subsystem” on page 119.
Note that all of these components are upgraded together in a package. See
“Updating the Firmware in WebPAM PROe” on page 249.
113
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Restoring Factory Defaults
VTrak includes a function to restore the default settings to its Firmware and
Software settings.
Caution
Restoring default settings can disrupt your VTrak functions. Use
this feature only when necessary.
If you restore Management Network settings, you will lose your
network connection to the VTrak.
To access the Restore Defaults feature:
1.
2.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon.
The Administrative Tools list appears.
3.
Click the Restore Factory Defaults link at the bottom of the list in
Management View.
The Restore Factory Defaults screen appears.
4.
Check the Firmware and Software functions you want to restore to default
settings.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
The functions you selected will be automatically restored to their default settings.
114
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Clearing Statistics
The Clear Statistics function clears statistical data on controllers, Fibre Channel
ports, SAS ports, physical drives, and logical drives.
To clear statistical data:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Clear Statistics link.
icon.
The Clear Statistics tab appears in Management View.
4.
Click the Submit button.
5.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
115
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Saving a System Service Report
To save a System Service Report as a compressed HTML file:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Save System Service Report link.
icon.
4.
On the Information tab, click the Save button.
5.
In the dialog box, click the Save File option, then click the OK button.
The service report is saved to the Host PC from which you access WebPAM
PROe. The file name includes subsysteminfo, the date, and html.
116
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Shutting Down the Subsystem
Important
If you have a JBOD Expansion, always power off the RAID
subsystem first. Then power off the JBOD subsystems.
To shutdown the RAID subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3.
Click the Shutdown link in Management View.
4.
On the Shutdown or Restart tab, choose Shutdown from the Option menu.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
When the controller shuts down, your WebPAM PROe connection is lost.
7.
Wait no less than two minutes.
8.
Manually turn off the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.
Monitoring the Shutdown
To monitor a shutdown, you must use the Command Line Interface (CLI) though
a serial connection to the VTrak.
Turn off both power supply switches when the following this message appears:
Shutdown complete. It is now safe to power off the subsystem.
117
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Starting Up After Shutdown
Important
If you have a JBOD Expansion, always power on the JBOD
subsystems first. Then power on the RAID subsystem.
To start the RAID subsystem:
1.
Manually turn on the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.
2.
Wait about two minutes.
3.
Open your browser and log into WebPAM PROe.
See “Logging into WebPAM PROe” on page 54.
If you cannot log in, wait 30 seconds and try again.
Monitoring the Startup
To monitor a startup, you must use the Command Line Interface (CLI) though a
serial connection to the VTrak.
When the Login: prompt appears, the start up is finished.
118
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Restarting the Subsystem
Note
If you have a JBOD Expansion, you are not required to restart the
JBOD subsystems when you restart the RAID subsystem.
To restart the RAID subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
icon.
3.
Click the Shutdown link in Management View.
4.
On the Shutdown or Restart tab, choose Restart from the Option menu.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
When the controller shuts down, your WebPAM PROe connection is lost.
7.
Wait about two minutes.
8.
In your browser, click Logout in the Header, then log into WebPAM PROe
once again.
If you cannot log in, wait 30 seconds and try again.
Monitoring the Restart
To monitor a restart, you must use the Command Line Interface (CLI) though a
serial connection to the VTrak.
When the Login: prompt appears, the restart is finished.
119
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing Controllers
The RAID controllers are the heart of the VTrak subsystem. VTrak E-Class
models have one or two controllers. Management of Controllers includes the
following functions:
•
Viewing the Controllers (page 120)
•
Locating a Controller (page 120)
•
Viewing Controller Information (page 121)
•
Viewing Controller Statistics (page 122)
•
Making Controller Settings (page 122)
•
Clearing an Orphan Watermark (page 124)
Viewing the Controllers
To view information about the controllers:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Controllers
icon.
The controller information appears under the Information tab in Management
View. Controller information includes:
•
Controller ID – 1 or 2
•
Alias – if assigned
•
Model – if applicable
•
Status – OK means normal. Also shows BGA running. Not present
indicates a malfunction or no controller is installed
•
Readiness Status – Active or Standby is normal. N/A means not
accessible
•
Locate – Click the button to locate the controller. See below
VTrak subsystems with only one controller will always show that the second
controller is “Not present.”
If your VTrak subsystem has two controllers and one is “Not present,” see
“Controller Enters Maintenance Mode” on page 345 for more information.
Locating a Controller
To identify a specific controller in the VTrak subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Controllers
icon.
3.
In Management View, click the Locate Controller button.
120
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
4.
The Controller Dirty Cache
LED and Status
LED, on the back of the
Controller, will flash for one minute. See the illustrations below.
Figure 7. The VTrak E610f and E310f controller LEDs
Mgmt
FC 1
FC 2
4
2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
Status LED
Dirty Cache LED
Figure 8. The VTrak E610s and E310s controller LEDs
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
Status LED
Dirty Cache LED
Viewing Controller Information
To view Controller information:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Controllers
icon.
3.
Click the Controller
icon.
The controller information appears the Information tab in Management View.
Adjustable items
You can set or adjust the following items:
•
Alias, if assigned
•
LUN Affinity
•
SMART (Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting System for physical
drives)
•
SMART Polling Interval
•
Coercion, enable or disable
•
Coercion Method
•
Write Back Cache Flush Interval
121
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
•
Enclosure Polling Interval
•
Adaptive Writeback Cache
•
Host Cache Flushing
•
Forced Read Ahead Cache
See “Making Controller Settings” on page 122.
Upgradable items
You can upgrade the following items:
•
Boot loader Version
•
Firmware Version number
•
Software Version number
•
Memory Size
See “Chapter 6: Maintenance” on page 249.
Viewing Controller Statistics
To view controller statistics:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Controllers
icon.
3.
Click the Controller
4.
Click the Information tab in Management View and choose Statistics from
dropdown menu.
icon.
Clearing Statistics
To clear statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 115.
Making Controller Settings
If your subsystem has two controllers, any settings you make to one controller
will automatically apply to the other controller.
To make Controller settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Controllers
icon.
3.
Click the Controller
4.
Click the Settings tab in Management View.
5.
icon.
Make the following settings as needed:
•
Optional. Enter a name into the Alias field.
122
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Maximum of 48 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between
words, and underscore.
•
Check the Enable LUN affinity box to enable the LUN affinity feature.
If your subsystem has two controllers and Cache Mirroring is disabled,
LUN Affinity is enabled automatically.
•
Check the SMART Log box to enable the Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and
Reporting System (SMART).
•
Enter a polling interval in SMART Polling Interval field.
The range is 1 to 1440 minutes. 1440 minutes equals one day.
•
Check the Coercion Enabled box to enable disk drive capacity coercion.
When disk drives of different capacities are used in the same array,
coercion reduces the usable capacity of the larger disk drive(s) in order
to match the smallest capacity drive.
For more information, see “Capacity Coercion” on page 293.
•
Select a coercion method from the Coercion Method dropdown menu.
The choices are:
GB Truncate – Default. Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest
1,000,000,000 byte boundary.
10GB Truncate – Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest
10,000,000,000 byte boundary.
Group Rounding – Uses an algorithm to determine how much to
truncate. Results in the maximum amount of usable drive capacity.
Table Rounding – Applies a predefined table to determine how much to
truncate.
•
Enter a time interval in the Write Back Cache Flush Interval field.
The range is 1 to 12 seconds. For more information, see “Cache Policy”
on page 288.
•
Enter a time interval in the Enclosure Polling Interval field.
The range is 15 to 255 seconds.
•
Check the Adaptive Writeback Cache box to enable the Adaptive
Writeback Cache feature.
•
Check the Host Cache Flushing box to enable the Host Cache Flushing
feature.
•
Check the Forced Read Ahead Cache box to enable the Forced Read
Ahead Cache feature.
For more information, see “Adaptive Writeback Cache” on page 289.
For more information, see “Host Cache Flushing” on page 290.
For more information, see “Forced Read Ahead Cache” on page 290.
123
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
6.
Click the Submit button.
The changes take effect immediately.
Clearing an Orphan Watermark
An Orphan Watermark condition is the result of a disk drive failure during an
NVRAM RAID level migration on a disk array.
To clear an Orphan Watermark:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Controllers
icon.
3.
Click the Controller
4.
Click the Clear tab in Management View.
5.
Click the Submit button.
icon.
The changes take effect immediately. If your subsystem has two controllers,
clearing a condition on one controller will automatically apply to the other
controller.
124
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Managing Enclosures
On VTrak E-Class, enclosures include the main VTrak subsystem or Head Unit
as well as additional enclosures that are connected to it through cascading or
expansion. Enclosure Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing the Enclosures Summary (page 125)
•
Locating an Enclosure (page 125)
•
Viewing Enclosure Topology (page 126)
•
Viewing Enclosure Information (page 126)
•
Making Enclosure Settings (page 127)
•
Viewing FRU VPD Information (page 127)
•
Checking the Batteries (page 128)
•
Reconditioning a Battery (page 128)
•
Silencing the Buzzer (page 129)
•
Making Buzzer Settings (page 129)
•
Testing the Buzzer (page 130)
Viewing the Enclosures Summary
To view information about the enclosures:
1.
2.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
The following information is shown:
•
Enclosure ID number
•
Enclosure Type
•
Operational Status
•
Status Description (specific components in need of attention, if any)
Locating an Enclosure
To locate an enclosure (subsystem):
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Locate Enclosure button for the enclosure you want.
The FRU Status and Disk Status LEDs on the front of the enclosure flash for
one minute. See page 126, Figure 9.
125
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 9. VTrak E310f/s front view
Disk Status LEDs Disk Status LEDs Disk Status LEDs Disk Status LEDs
FRU Status LED
Viewing Enclosure Topology
To view Enclosure Topology:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Topology tab in Management View.
Enclosure topology refers to the manner in which the data paths among the
enclosures are connected:
•
Individual Subsystem – One VTrak E-Class subsystem
•
JBOD Expansion – One VTrak E-Class subsystem plus one or more JBOD
expansion subsystems, managed through one subsystem or head unit
•
RAID Subsystem Cascading – Multiple VTrak E-Class subsystems,
managed through one subsystem or head unit
The logical connections for these arrangements are shown the Enclosure
Topology tab. The physical connections for these arrangements are discussed in
“Chapter 2: VTrak Installation” on page 11.
Viewing Enclosure Information
To view enclosure information:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
icon.
Enclosure information appears the Information tab in Management View. You
can monitor power supplies, cooling units, enclosure temperatures and
voltages, and the battery.
126
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Adjustable items
You can set or adjust the following items:
•
Enclosure Warning and Critical temperature thresholds
•
Controller Warning and Critical temperature thresholds
See “Making Enclosure Settings” on page 127.
For information on Enclosure problems, see “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on
page 307.
Making Enclosure Settings
To make Enclosure settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Settings tab in Management View.
5.
Enter a value in the following fields as necessary:
6.
icon.
•
Enclosure Warning Temperature Threshold
•
Enclosure Critical Temperature Threshold
•
Controller Warning Temperature Threshold
•
Controller Critical Temperature Threshold
Click the Submit button.
The changes take effect immediately.
Viewing FRU VPD Information
FRU VPD refers to Vital Product Data (VPD) information about Field Replaceable
Units (FRU) in the enclosure. The number and type of FRU depends on the
subsystem model.
To view FRU VPD information:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the FRU VPD tab in Management View.
icon.
Use this information when communicating with Technical Support and when
ordering replacement units. For contact information, see “Contacting Technical
Support” on page 355.
127
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Checking the Batteries
The Enclosure–Battery tab displays information about the cache backup battery
(or batteries) in the VTrak subsystem enclosure. To check the batteries:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Battery tab in Management View.
icon.
icon.
Battery Notes
Each battery works with a controller. If the battery is present in the subsystem but
the corresponding controller is not present, the battery will not appear in the
interface.
If a battery does not reflect normal conditions and it is not currently under
reconditioning, run the Recondition function before you replace the battery. See
“Reconditioning a Battery” on page 128.
Reconditioning fully discharges, then fully recharges the battery. During
reconditioning, if the Adaptive Writeback Cache function is enabled, the controller
cache is set to Write Thru. After reconditioning, the cache is reset to Write Back.
See “Making Controller Settings” on page 122.
If a battery reaches the threshold temperature while charging or discharging, the
charge or discharge pauses and the blower runs at high speed until the battery
temperature falls below the threshold.
If the battery does not maintain normal values after a Recondition, replace the
battery. See “Replacing a Cache Battery” on page 265.
VTrak automatically reconditions the battery every two months. To set the
schedule, see “Scheduling an Activity” on page 72.
When you install a new battery, the cycle count shows 0. VTrak automatically
runs a recondition on the battery to verify it. If you restart the subsystem or
controller before reconditioning is finished, the battery is charged to 100%, then
reconditioning starts again.
Reconditioning a Battery
To recondition the battery:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
From the Battery tab dropdown menu, choose Recondition.
icon.
128
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
5.
Click the Submit button.
Reconditioning fully discharges, then fully recharges the battery. During
reconditioning, if the Adaptive Writeback Cache function is enabled, the
controller cache is set to Write Thru. After reconditioning, the cache is reset
to Write Back. See “Making Controller Settings” on page 122.
VTrak automatically reconditions the battery every two months. To set the
recondition schedule, see “Scheduling an Activity” on page 72.
Silencing the Buzzer
The buzzer sounds to inform you that the VTrak needs attention. See “VTrak is
Beeping” on page 307 for more information.
Express Method
To silence the buzzer for the current trigger event:
1.
Click the Buzzer
icon in the Header.
The Buzzer tab appears in Management View.
2.
Click the Mute button.
The buzzer goes silent and the icon disappears. If another trigger event
occurs, the buzzer will sound again. To silence the buzzer for all trigger
events, disable it under “Making Buzzer Settings.”
Regular Method
To silence the buzzer for the current trigger event:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Buzzer tab in Management View.
5.
icon.
Click the Mute button.
The buzzer goes silent. If another trigger event occurs, the buzzer will sound
again. To silence the buzzer for all trigger events, disable it under “Making
Buzzer Settings.”
Making Buzzer Settings
To make buzzer settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
icon.
129
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
4.
5.
From the Buzzer tab dropdown menu, choose Settings.
Check the Buzzer Enable box to enable the buzzer.
Uncheck the box to disable the buzzer.
6.
Click the Submit button.
Testing the Buzzer
You must enable the buzzer before you can test it.
To test buzzer function:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Buzzer tab in Management View.
5.
Click the Sound button.
icon.
The buzzer will sound for one minute.
130
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Managing Physical Drives
Managing Physical Drives deals with the physical disk drives installed in the
VTrak subsystem enclosure, including the following functions:
•
Viewing a List of Physical Drives (page 131)
•
Identifying a Physical Drive (page 131)
•
Making Global Physical Drive Settings (page 132)
•
Viewing Physical Drive Information (page 133)
•
Viewing Physical Drive Statistics (page 133)
•
Making Physical Drive Settings (page 134)
•
Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions (page 134)
•
Forcing a Physical Drive Offline or Online (page 135)
Viewing a List of Physical Drives
To view a list of physical drives in this enclosure:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Physical Drives
icon.
icon.
The list of physical drives appears in Management View.
Identifying a Physical Drive
To identify physical drive in the VTrak subsystem enclosure:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
icon.
4.
Click the Physical Drives
5.
In Management View:
•
icon.
Click the physical drive in the Enclosure Front View Diagram.
The physical drive’s drive carrier Disk Status LED flashes for one
minute. See page 132, Figure 10.
•
Click the PD link under Device to highlight the drive’s location in the
Enclosure Front View Diagram.
131
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 10.VTrak drive carrier LEDs
Disk Status LED
Making Global Physical Drive Settings
Global settings apply to all of the physical disk drives installed in the VTrak
subsystem enclosure. To make global physical drive settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Physical Drives
icon.
icon.
5.
Click the Global Settings tab in Management View.
6.
Make the settings as needed.
For SATA drives, check the boxes to enable:
•
Write Cache
•
Read Look Ahead Cache
•
Command Queuing (for disk drives that support Command Queuing)
•
From the DMA Mode dropdown menu, choose a DMA mode.
For SAS drives, check the boxes to enable:
•
Write Cache
•
Read Look Ahead Cache
•
Command Queuing (for disk drives that support Command Queuing)
•
Read Cache
For SATA and SAS drives, type a number into the:
•
7.
Medium Error Threshold field (see below)
Click the Submit button.
The functions you enable here depend on whether the physical drives
support those functions. See “Viewing Physical Drive Information” on
page 133 to determine which functions a particular drive supports.
Medium Error Threshold is the number of bad blocks tolerated before the
controller marks the drive as Dead. The default setting of zero disables this
132
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
function. With the Threshold set to zero, drives are not marked offline even
when errors are detected.
Viewing Physical Drive Information
To view physical drive information:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Physical Drives
5.
Click a Physical Drive
icon.
icon.
icon.
Useful information provided here includes:
•
The location of the physical drive is highlighted in the Enclosure Front View
diagram.
•
Operational Status – OK is normal. Can also show Rebuilding, Forced
Online, Forced Offline, Transition Running, PDM Running, Media Patrol
Running, Stale, PFA, Offline, or Dead.
•
Configuration Status – The array to which the drive is assigned or its spare
designation. Visible to Fibre Channel subsystems with dual controllers and
LUN Affinity enabled shows Controller 1 or Controller 2. Other configurations
and subsystem models show All Controllers.
Adjustable Items
•
Write Cache
•
Read Look Ahead Cache
•
Read Cache (SAS drive only)
•
Command Queuing
•
DMA Mode (SATA drives only)
•
Medium Error Threshold
See “Making Global Physical Drive Settings” on page 132.
Viewing Physical Drive Statistics
To view physical drive statistics:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Physical Drives
icon.
icon.
133
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
5.
Click a Physical Drive
6.
From the dropdown menu on the Information tab, choose Statistics.
icon.
Clearing Statistics
To clear statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 115.
Making Physical Drive Settings
An alias is the only setting you can make to an individual physical drive. All other
settings are global. See “Making Global Physical Drive Settings” on page 132.
To make physical drive settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Physical Drives
5.
Click a Physical Drive
icon.
icon.
icon.
6.
Click the Settings tab in Management View.
7.
Type an alias into the Physical Drive Alias field.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,
and underscore. An alias is optional.
8.
Click the Submit button.
Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions
The Clear tab only appears when those conditions are present.
•
Stale – The physical drive contains obsolete disk array information.
•
PFA – The physical drive has errors resulting in a prediction of failure.
Be sure you have corrected the condition by a physical drive replacement, rebuild
operation, etc., first. Then clear the condition. See “Physical Drive Problems” on
page 340 for more information.
To clear a Stale or PFA status from a physical drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Physical Drives
5.
Click a Physical Drive
6.
In Management View, click the Clear tab.
icon.
icon.
icon.
134
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Note
If a physical drive has both a Stale and a PFA condition, click the
Clear tab once to clear the Stale condition, then click again to
clear the PFA condition.
Forcing a Physical Drive Offline or Online
The Physical Drive–Force Offline/Online tab enables you to force an:
•
Online physical drive to go Offline
•
Offline physical drive to go Online
The Force Offline/Online tab appears only for physical drives that are assigned to
disk arrays.
Caution
Forcing a physical drive offline or online is likely to cause data
loss. Back up your data before you proceed. Use these functions
only when required.
Important
Forcing a physical drive offline will cause your logical drives to
become degraded. If Auto Rebuild is enabled and a spare drive is
available, the disk array will begin rebuilding itself automatically.
To force a physical drive offline or online:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Enclosures
icon.
3.
Click the Enclosure
4.
Click the Physical Drives
icon.
icon.
5.
Click a Physical Drive
6.
Click the Force Offline/Online tab in Management View.
icon.
7.
Click the Submit button.
8.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.
9.
Click the OK button.
135
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing UPS Units
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Management includes the following
functions:
•
Viewing a List of UPS Units (below)
•
Making UPS Settings (page 137)
•
Viewing UPS Information (page 138)
Viewing a List of UPS Units
To view a list of UPS units supporting the VTrak:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the UPS
3.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
Click the Information tab in Management View.
Information in the UPS List includes:
•
UPS ID – Click the ID number to view the UPS Tab.
•
Operational Status – OK means Normal.
On AC means the UPS is connected to a viable external AC power
source.
On Battery means the external AC power source is offline and the UPS
is running on battery power.
•
Model Name or Number
•
Battery Capacity – Backup capacity expressed as a percentage.
•
Loading Ratio – Actual output of UPS as a percentage of the rated
output. See the Note below.
•
Remaining Backup Time – Number of minutes the UPS is expected to
power your system in the event of a power failure.
Note
The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models
of UPS units. The general range is 60% to 80%. If the reported
Loading Ratio exceeds the recommended value for your UPS unit:
•
Have fewer subsystems or peripherals connected to this UPS
unit.
•
Add more UPS units, or use a higher-capacity UPS unit, to
protect your RAID systems.
136
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Making UPS Settings
These settings control how the VTrak subsystem detects the UPS unit and
responds to data reported by the UPS unit.
To make UPS settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the UPS
icon in Tree View.
icon.
3.
Click the Settings tab in Management View.
4.
Perform the following actions as required:
•
•
•
•
5.
Verify the Current UPS Communication method. See Note 1:
•
SNMP – Network connection.
•
Serial – Serial connection.
•
Unknown – No connection.
Choose a Detection Setting from the dropdown menu:
•
Automatic – Default. If a UPS is detected when the subsystem
boots, the setting changes to Enable.
•
Enable – Monitors UPS. Settings changes, reports warnings, and
logs events.
•
Disable – Monitors UPS only.
Type values into the Threshold fields. See Note 2:
•
Runtime Remaining Threshold – Actual time below this value
resets adaptive writeback cache to writethrough.
•
Warning Temperature Threshold – Actual temperature above this
value triggers a warning and logs an event.
•
Loading Ratio Threshold – Actual loading ratio (percentage)
above this threshold triggers a warning and logs an event. See
Note 3.
•
Battery Charge Remaining Threshold – Reserve capacity below
this percentage triggers a warning and logs an event.
For UPS units with network cards, type the IP addresses or DNS names
in fields UPS 1 and UPS 2. See Note 4.
Click the Submit button to apply your settings.
Note 1: VTrak supports multiple UPS units using network or serial
connections, but not a combination of both methods.
Note 2: Detection Setting must be set to Auto. If a UPS is detected, the
setting changes to Enable.
Note 3: The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models of
UPS units. The general range is 60% to 80%.
137
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Note 4: To specify UPS units by DNS names, ask your IT administrator to
add the DNS names to the DNS server, before you make UPS settings.
Viewing UPS Information
To view information about a specific UPS unit:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the UPS
icon in Tree View.
icon.
3.
Click the UPS1
4.
Click the UPS tab in Management View.
or UPS2
icon.
UPS information includes:
•
Model
•
Serial Number
•
Manufacture Date
•
Firmware Version
•
Voltage Rating – Output voltage of the UPS.
•
Battery Capacity – Backup capacity expressed as a percentage.
•
Remaining Backup Time – Number of minutes the UPS is expected to
power your system in the event of a power failure.
•
Loading Ratio – Actual output of UPS as a percentage of the rated
output. See the Note below
•
Temperature – Reported temperature of the UPS unit
Note
The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models
of UPS units. The general range is 60% to 80%. If the reported
Loading Ratio exceeds the recommended value for your UPS unit:
•
Have fewer subsystems or peripherals connected to this UPS
unit.
•
Add more UPS units, or use a higher-capacity UPS unit, to
protect your RAID systems.
138
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Managing Disk Arrays
Disk Array Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing a List of Disk Arrays (page 139)
•
Creating a Disk Array (page 139)
•
Deleting a Disk Array (page 144)
•
Viewing Disk Array Information (page 144)
•
Making Disk Array Settings (page 145)
•
Creating a Logical Drive (page 145)
•
Deleting a Logical Drive (page 147)
•
Migrating a Disk Array (page 147)
•
Rebuilding a Disk Array (page 148)
•
Running PDM on a Disk Array (page 150)
•
Transitioning a Disk Array (page 150)
•
Preparing a Disk Array for Transport (page 151)
Viewing a List of Disk Arrays
To view a list of disk arrays in this enclosure plus any expanded or cascaded
enclosures:
1.
2.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
A list of disk arrays appears in Management View.
Click the DA link to view a specific disk array. See “Viewing Disk Array
Information” on page 144.
Creating a Disk Array
The CLU provides three methods of creating a disk array:
•
Automatic – Creates a new disk array following a default set of parameters.
Makes one logical drive automatically. Also makes a hot spare drive for all
RAID levels except RAID 0, if at least four unconfigured physical drives are
available. See “Creating a Disk Array – Automatic” on page 140.
•
Express – You choose the parameters for a new disk array by specifying the
characteristics you want. You can create multiple logical drives at the same
time, however they will all be identical. You can choose to make a hot spare
drive for all RAID levels except RAID 0, if at least four unconfigured physical
drives are available. See “Creating a Disk Array – Express” on page 140.
•
Advanced – You directly specify all parameters for a new disk array. Makes
one logical drive automatically. You can create additional logical drives at a
139
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
later time, if additional configurable capacity is available. Does not make a
hot spare drive. See “Creating a Disk Array – Advanced” on page 142.
Creating a Disk Array – Automatic
The Disk Array Automatic Creation option enables you to create a new disk array
following a default set of parameters. The Automatic option proposes a disk array
and logical drive arrangement. You can accept or reject the proposed
arrangement but you cannot modify it.
To create a Disk Array using the Automatic function:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Create tab in Management View.
4.
From the Create tab dropdown menu, choose Automatic.
The following parameters display:
5.
•
Disk Arrays – The number of physical drives in the disk array, their slot
numbers, configurable capacity, and the number of logical drives to be
created
•
Logical Drives – The ID number of the logical drives, their RAID level,
capacity, and stripe size
•
Spare Drives – The physical drive slot number of the dedicated hot
spare assigned to this disk array. A hot spare drive is created for all
RAID levels except RAID 0, when five or more unconfigured physical
drives are available
If you accept these parameters, click the Submit button.
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List the Information tab.
If you do NOT accept these parameters, use the Advanced option to create
your disk array.
Creating a Disk Array – Express
The Disk Array Express Creation option enables you to choose the parameters
for a new disk array by specifying the characteristics you want. With this method,
you can create multiple logical drives at the same time you create your disk array.
However, all of the logical drives will be the same.
If you prefer to specific the parameters directly, use the Advanced option to
create your disk array.
If you are uncertain about choosing parameters for your disk array, use the
Automatic option.
140
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
To create a new disk array:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Create tab in Management View.
4.
From the Create tab dropdown menu, choose Express.
5.
Check the boxes to choose any one or combination of:
•
Redundancy – The array will remain available if a physical drive fails
•
Capacity – The greatest possible amount of data capacity
•
Performance – The highest possible read/write speed
•
Spare Drive – A hot spare drive is created when you select
Redundancy, Spare Drive and five or more unconfigured physical drives
are available
•
Mixing SATA/SAS Drive – Check this box if you want to use both SATA
and SAS drives in the same disk array
If the box is unchecked, and you have both SATA and SAS drives,
different arrays will be created for each type of drive.
6.
In the Number of Logical Drives field, enter the number of logical drives you
want to make from this disk array.
7.
From the Application Type menu, choose an application that best describes
your intended use for this disk array:
8.
•
File Server
•
Transaction Data
•
Video Stream
•
Transaction Log
•
Other
Click the Update button.
Or check the Automatic Update box and updates will occur automatically.
The following parameters display:
•
Disk Arrays – The number of physical drives in the disk array, their slot
numbers, configurable capacity, and the number of logical drives to be
created
•
Logical Drives – The slot number of the logical drive(s), their RAID
level, capacity, and stripe size
•
Spare Drives – The physical drive slot number of the dedicated hot
spare assigned to this disk array (all RAID levels except RAID 0)
If you accept these parameters, proceed to the next step.
If you do NOT accept these parameters, review and modify your selections
in the previous steps.
9.
When you are done, click the Submit button.
141
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List the Information tab.
Creating a Disk Array – Advanced
The Disk Array Advanced Creation option enables you to directly specify all
parameters for a new disk array. One logical drive will be made automatically
when you create the disk array. If you choose less than the total available
capacity, you can use the remaining space to create additional logical drives at a
later time.
If you are uncertain about choosing parameters for your disk array, use the
Express or Automatic option to create your disk array.
To create a new disk array:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
From the Create tab dropdown menu, choose Advanced.
Step 1 – Disk Array Creation
1.
Optional. Enter a name for the disk array in the field provided.
Maximum of 31 characters; letters, numbers, space between characters, and
underline.
2.
Uncheck the boxes if you want to disable Media Patrol or PDM.
Promise recommends leaving these features enabled. See “Media Patrol” on
page 301 and “Predictive Data Migration (PDM)” on page 302.
3.
Highlight physical drives you want in the disk array from the Available list and
press the >> button to move them to the Selected list.
You can also double-click them to move them.
4.
When you are done, click the Next button.
Step 2 – Logical Drive Creation
1.
Optional. Enter an alias for the logical drive in the field provided.
Maximum of 31 characters; letters, numbers, space between characters, and
underline.
2.
Choose a RAID level for the logical drive from the dropdown menu.
The choice of RAID levels depends the number of physical drives you
selected.
3.
RAID 50 and 60 only. Specify the number of axles for your array.
See “RAID 50 Axles” on page 281 or “RAID 60 Axles” on page 283.
4.
Specify a Capacity and the unit of measure (B, KB, MB, GB, TB).
142
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
This value will be the data capacity of the first logical drive in your new disk
array. If you specify less than disk array's maximum capacity, the remaining
capacity is available for additional logical drives that you can create now or
later.
5.
For the following items, accept the default or choose a new value from the
dropdown menu:
•
Stripe size. 64 KB is the default
•
Sector size. 512 B is the default.
•
Read (cache) Policy. Read Ahead is the default.
•
Write (cache) Policy. Write Back is the default.
•
Preferred Controller ID.
64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, and 1 MB are available.
512 B, 1 KB, 2 KB, and 4 KB are available.
Read Cache, Read Ahead Cache, and No Cache are available.
Write Back and Write Through (Thru) are available.
The choices are Controller 1 or 2, or Automatic. This feature is only
available on subsystems with two controllers with LUN Affinity enabled.
6.
Click the Update button.
A new logical drive is displayed under New Logical Drives. If there is free
capacity remaining, you can specify another logical drive now or wait until
later.
7.
When you are done specifying logical drives, click the Next button.
Step 3 – Summary
The Summary lists the disk array and logical drive information you specified.
To proceed with disk array and logical drive creation, click the Submit button.
Note
This function does not automatically create a hot spare drive. After
the disk array is created, you can create a hot spare drive for it.
See “Creating a Spare Drive” on page 160.
143
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Deleting a Disk Array
The Disk Arrays–Delete tab enables you to delete existing disk arrays.
Caution
If you delete a disk array, you also delete any logical drives that
belong to it, along with the data in those logical drives. Back up
any important data before deleting a disk array.
To delete a disk array:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Delete tab in Management View.
4.
Check the box to the left of the disk array you want to delete.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
The selected disk array disappears from the Disk Array List the Information tab.
Viewing Disk Array Information
To view Disk Array information:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
icon.
The disk array information is shown in Management View.
Disk Array Operational Status
•
OK – This is the normal state of a logical drive. When a logical drive is
Functional, it is ready for immediate use. For RAID Levels other than RAID 0
(Striping), the logical drive has full redundancy.
•
Synchronizing – This condition is temporary. Synchronizing is a
maintenance function that verifies the integrity of data and redundancy in the
logical drive. When a logical drive is Synchronizing, it will function and your
data is available. However, access will be slower due to the synchronizing
operation.
•
Critical/Degraded – This condition arises as the result of a physical drive
failure. A degraded logical drive will still function and your data is still
144
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
available. However, the logical drive has lost redundancy (fault tolerance).
You must determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
•
Rebuilding – This condition is temporary. When a physical drive has been
replaced, the logical drive automatically begins rebuilding in order to restore
redundancy (fault tolerance). When a logical drive is rebuilding, it will
function and your data is available. However, access will be slower due to
the rebuilding operation.
•
Transport Ready – After you perform a successful Prepare for Transport
operation, this condition means you can remove the physical drives of this
disk array and move them to another enclosure or different drive slots. After
you relocate the physical drives, the disk array status will show OK.
Adjustable Items
•
Alias – Optional.
•
Media Patrol – Enabled is the default and recommended setting
•
PDM – Enabled is the default and recommended setting
See “Making Disk Array Settings” on page 145.
Making Disk Array Settings
To make Disk Array settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Settings tab in Management View.
5.
icon.
Optional. Enter an alias in the Disk Array Alias field.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,
and underscore.
6.
7.
Check the following boxes to enable, uncheck to disable:
•
Media Patrol
•
PDM
Click the Submit button.
Creating a Logical Drive
When you create a disk array, you automatically create one logical drive also. If
the initial logical drive used less than the full capacity of the disk array, you can
create additional logical drives from the same disk array.
145
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
To create a logical drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Create LD tab in Management View.
5.
icon.
Optional. Enter an alias (name) in the Alias field.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words,
and underscore.
6.
From the RAID Level dropdown list, choose a RAID level for this logical
drive.
All RAID levels supported by the disk array appear in the list. See “Choosing
a RAID Level” on page 284.
7.
RAID 50 and 60 only. Specify the number of axles for your logical drive.
See “RAID 50 Axles” on page 281 or “RAID 60 Axles” on page 283.
8.
Enter a capacity and choose unit of measure (B, KB, MB, GB, TB).
The default value is the available capacity of the disk array. If you specify
less than the maximum capacity, the remaining capacity is available for
additional logical drives that you can create now or later.
9.
For the following items, accept the default or choose a new value from the
dropdown menu:
•
Stripe size. 64 KB is the default
64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, and 1 MB are available.
•
Sector size. 512 B is the default.
512 B, 1 KB, 2 KB, and 4 KB are available.
•
Read (cache) Policy. Read Ahead is the default.
Read Cache, Read Ahead Cache, and No Cache are available.
•
Write (cache) Policy. Write Back is the default.
Write Back and Write Through (Thru) are available.
•
Preferred Controller ID.
The choices are Controller 1 or 2, or Automatic. This feature is only
available on subsystems with two controllers with LUN Affinity enabled.
10. Click the Update button to enter the logical drive parameters.
11. Review the results. If there is remaining space the disk array, you can create
another logical drive, following the steps above. Each logical drive can have
a different set of parameters.
12. Click the Next button when you are done.
146
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
A new window displays with the disk array information and the proposed
logical drives with their parameters.
13. Click the Submit button create the logical drives.
The new logical drive appears in the Logical Drive List the Information tab.
If you created a fault-tolerant logical drive (any RAID level except RAID 0), the
Operational Status of new logical drive will display Synchronizing for several
minutes after creation. You can use the logical drive during this period but read/
write performance could be slower than normal.
Deleting a Logical Drive
Caution
All data the logical drive will be lost. Back up any valuable data
before deleting the logical drive.
To delete a logical drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Delete LD tab in Management View.
5.
Check the box to the left of the logical drive you want to delete.
icon.
6.
Click the Submit button.
7.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
The logical drive disappears from the list on the Information tab.
Migrating a Disk Array
The action of migrating a disk array means either or both:
•
Change the RAID Level
•
Expand the storage capacity
For a list of Migration options and other important information, see “RAID Level
Migration” on page 294.
To Migrate an existing disk array:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
147
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
3.
Click the Disk Array
icon.
4.
From the dropdown menu the Background Activities tab, choose Start
Migration.
5.
Highlight physical drives you want in the disk array from the Available list and
press the >> button to move them to the Selected list.
You can also double-click them to move them.
6.
When you are done, click the Next button.
7.
Select a new RAID Level, if desired.
8.
To expand the disk array's capacity, check the Expand Capacity box.
If you checked the Expand Capacity box, enter a number into the Capacity
field and choose the appropriate unit of measure (B, KB, MB, GB, TB).
9.
Under Capacity Usage, highlight the logical drive whose RAID level you want
to change or whose capacity you want to expand.
10. Click the Update button.
The logical drive changes to reflect your choices.
Update other logical drives using the same method.
11. When you are done making the changes, click the Next button.
12. Click the Submit button to begin Migration.
13. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
To set Migration priority, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 70.
Rebuilding a Disk Array
When you rebuild a disk array, you are actually rebuilding the data on a
replacement physical drive.
Rebuilding Automatically
Normally, a disk array would rebuild itself using a hot disk drive, after going
Critical. However, if the Auto Rebuild function is disabled or no spare drives are
available, you must initiate the procedure.
To enable Auto Rebuild, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 70.
To create a spare drive, see “Creating a Spare Drive” on page 160.
For more information, see “Hot Spare Drive(s)” on page 294.
148
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Rebuilding Manually
If a physical drive has failed, identify and replace the drive, then rebuild the disk
array as described below:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
icon.
If there are multiple disk arrays, choose the icon with the yellow !.
4.
5.
From the dropdown menu the Background Activities tab, choose Start
Rebuild.
Choose the Source physical drive.
The source drive is a remaining functional physical drive in the disk array.
6.
Choose the Target physical drive.
The target drive is the replacement physical drive.
7.
Click the Submit button.
The Disk Array Background Activity tab shows the rebuild progress on the
replacement (target) physical drive. Depending the size of the physical disk
involved, this process will take some time.
To view more information, click the Rebuild on PDx link.
To set Rebuild priority, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 70.
Running Media Patrol on a Disk Array
Media Patrol checks the magnetic media on physical drives. When it finds the
specified number of bad blocks, it will trigger PDM. See “Making Background
Activity Settings” on page 70 and “Running PDM” on page 71.
You can schedule Media Patrol to run automatically, see “Scheduling an Activity”
on page 72.
To start Media Patrol:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
From the dropdown menu the Background Activities tab, choose Start
Media Patrol.
icon.
5.
Click the Start button.
149
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Running PDM on a Disk Array
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) migrates data from the suspect physical drive to
a spare physical drive, similar to Rebuilding. Unlike Rebuilding, PDM acts before
the disk drive fails and your Logical Drive goes Critical. See “Predictive Data
Migration (PDM)” on page 302.
To start PDM:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
From the dropdown menu the Background Activities tab, choose Start
PDM.
5.
icon.
Choose the Source physical drive.
The source drive is the physical drive at risk of failure.
6.
Choose the Target physical drive.
The target drive is the replacement physical drive.
7.
Click the Submit button.
Transitioning a Disk Array
Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part
of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non-revertible spare. The
revertible spare drive returns to its original status. For more information, see
“Transition” on page 303.
In order to run the Transition function:
•
The spare drive must be Revertible.
•
You must specify an unconfigured physical drive of the same or larger
capacity to replace the revertible spare drive.
To run Transition:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose Start
Transition.
3.
Choose an unconfigured physical drive from the list of available drives.
4.
From the Target Physical Drive dropdown menu, choose an unconfigured
physical drive.
5.
Click the Submit button.
150
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
After the Transition is completed, refresh the screen. The revertible spare drive is
listed under the Spare Drives
icon and the disk array’s operational status
shows OK.
To set Transition priority, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 70.
Preparing a Disk Array for Transport
Transport is the action of moving the physical drives of a disk array:
•
To different slots in the same VTrak enclosure
•
From one VTrak enclosure to another
Important
Before you can use this feature, the disk array’s Operational
Status must be OK.
To prepare a disk array for transport:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Transport tab in Management View.
icon.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
7.
After the Transition is complete, move the physical drives comprising the
disk array to their new locations.
8.
Click the Refresh button in your Browser.
The drives appear in their new locations and disk array status displays OK.
151
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing Logical Drives
Logical drives are made from disk arrays. In the Tree, you can see a graphic
representation of the logical drives that belong to each array. You can see a
summary of all logical drives in the subsystem under Logical Drive Summary.
Logical drive management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing Information for All Logical Drives (page 152)
•
Viewing Logical Drive Information (page 153)
•
Viewing Logical Drive Statistics (page 154)
•
Making Logical Drive Settings (page 154)
•
Initializing a Logical Drive (page 155)
•
Running Redundancy Check (page 155)
•
Viewing the Logical Drive Check Table (page 156)
•
Making Logical Drive LUN Settings (page 157)
Viewing Information for All Logical Drives
To view information about all logical drives in a disk array:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Logical Drives
icon.
icon
Logical Drive Status
•
OK – This is the normal state of a logical drive. When a logical drive is
Functional, it is ready for immediate use. For RAID Levels other than RAID 0
(Striping), the logical drive has full redundancy.
•
Synchronizing – This condition is temporary. Synchronizing is a
maintenance function that verifies the integrity of data and redundancy in the
logical drive. When a logical drive is Synchronizing, it will function and your
data is available. However, access will be slower due to the synchronizing
operation.
•
Rebuilding – This condition is temporary. When a physical drive has been
replaced, the logical drive automatically begins rebuilding in order to restore
redundancy (fault tolerance). When a logical drive is rebuilding, it will
function and your data is available. However, access will be slower due to
the rebuilding operation.
•
Critical – This condition arises as the result of a physical drive failure. A
degraded logical drive will still function and your data is still available.
152
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
However, the logical drive has lost redundancy (fault tolerance). You must
determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
•
Offline – This condition arises as the result of a second physical drive
failure. An Offline logical drive is not accessible but some or all of your data
may remain intact. You must determine the cause of the problem and correct
it.
•
Transport Ready – After you perform a successful Prepare for Transport
operation, this condition means you can remove the physical drives of this
disk array and move them to another enclosure or different drive slots. After
you relocate the physical drives, the disk array status will show OK.
To create a logical drive, see “Creating a Logical Drive” on page 145.
To delete a logical drive, see “Deleting a Logical Drive” on page 147.
For a Degraded or Offline logical drive, see “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on
page 336.
Viewing Logical Drive Information
To view information for a single logical drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Logical Drives
5.
Click the Logical Drive
icon.
icon.
icon.
Logical drive information appears on the Information tab. For logical drive status
definitions, see page 152.
Synchronization is an automatic procedure applied to logical drives when they
are created. Yes means the logical drive was synchronized.
Adjustable Items
•
Alias (optional)
•
Read Policy
•
Write Policy
•
Preferred Controller ID
See “Making Logical Drive Settings” on page 154.
153
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Viewing Logical Drive Statistics
To view information for a single logical drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
icon.
4.
Click the Logical Drives
5.
Click the Logical Drive
icon.
6.
From the dropdown menu on the Information tab, choose Statistics.
icon.
Clearing Statistics
To clear statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 115.
Making Logical Drive Settings
To make Logical Drive settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Logical Drives
5.
Click the Logical Drive
6.
Click the Settings tab in Management View.
7.
icon.
icon.
icon.
For the following items, accept the existing setting choose a new one:
•
Optional. Enter an alias in the Logical Drive Alias field.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between
words, and underscore.
•
From the Read Policy dropdown menu, choose a Read Cache policy.
•
From the Write Policy dropdown menu, choose a Write Cache policy.
The choices are Read Cache, Read Ahead, and No Cache.
The choices are Write Back and Write Through (Thru). If you choose No
Read Cache, Write policy is automatically Write Through.
•
From the Preferred Controller ID dropdown menu, choose the preferred
controller to access this logical drive.
The choices are 1 and 2. This feature is only available on subsystems
with two controllers and LUN Affinity enabled. If N/A is shown, there is
only one controller in the enclosure.
8.
Click the Submit button.
154
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Initializing a Logical Drive
Initialization is done to logical drives after they are created from a disk array. Full
initialization sets all data bits in the logical drive to a specified pattern, such as all
zeros. The action is useful because there may be residual data the logical drives
left behind from earlier configurations. For this reason, Initialization is
recommended for all new logical drives.
Caution
When you initialize a logical drive, all the data the logical drive will
be lost. Backup any important data before you initialize a logical
drive.
Initialize a Logical Drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Logical Drives
5.
Click the
6.
From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose
Initialization.
7.
icon.
icon.
icon of the logical drive you want to initialize.
To choose Quick Initialization, check the box.
If you checked the box, enter a value in the Quick Initialization Size field.
This value is the size of the initialization blocks in MB.
8.
If you did not choose Quick Initialization, enter a hexidecimal value in the
Initialization Pattern in Hex field or use the default 00000000 value.
9.
Click the Submit button.
10. In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
To view Initialization progress, click the Background Activity tab.
To set Initialization priority, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on
page 70.
Running Redundancy Check
Redundancy Check is a routine maintenance procedure for fault-tolerant logical
drives (those with redundancy) that ensures all the data matches exactly.
Redundancy Check can also correct inconsistencies. You can also schedule a
Redundancy Check. See “Scheduling an Activity” on page 72.
155
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
To Redundancy Check a Logical Drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Logical Drives
icon.
icon.
5.
Click the
6.
From the dropdown menu on the Background Activities tab, choose
Redundancy Check.
7.
icon of the logical drive you want to check.
To choose Auto Fix, check the box.
This feature attempts to repair the problem when it finds an error.
8.
To choose Pause On Error, check the box.
This feature stops the process when it finds an error.
If Auto Fix is also checked, the process stops only when it finds a nonrepairable error.
9.
Click the Submit button.
To view Redundancy Check progress, click the Background Activity tab.
To set Redundancy Check priority, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on
page 70.
Viewing the Logical Drive Check Table
The Logical Drive Check Table displays errors related to a logical drive. Use this
information to evaluate the integrity of the logical drive and to determine whether
corrective action is needed.
To view the Logical Drive Check Tables:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Logical Drives
5.
Click the Logical Drive
6.
Click the Check Table tab in Management View.
7.
icon.
icon.
icon.
Click the option for the table you want to see.
The default is All tables.
If there are entries, they are listed as follows:
•
Entry Number – A number assigned to each block of entry.
156
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
•
Table Type – Read Check, Write Check or Inconsistent Block (see
below).
•
Start Logical Block Address – LBA of the first block for this entry.
•
Count – Number of continuous blocks starting from this LBA.
Table Definitions
•
Read Check Table – Contains a list of read errors for this logical drive.
•
Write Check Table – Contains a list of write errors for this logical drive.
•
Inconsistent Block Table – Contains a list of inconsistent blocks for
this logical drive.
Mirror data for RAID Levels 1, 1E, and 10; and Parity data for RAID
Levels 5, 6, 50, and 60 are identified by the Redundancy Check.
Making Logical Drive LUN Settings
For Fibre Channel and SAS, LUN Masking is the process of applying a LUN Map
so that each initiator can only access the LUNs specified for it.
Before you can specify an initiator for your LUN map, you must add the initiator to
the VTrak 's initiator list. See “Adding an Initiator” on page 89 or page 92.
You must enable LUN Masking in order apply a LUN map. See “Enabling LUN
Masking” on page 94.
To specify a LUN Map:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Disk Arrays
icon.
3.
Click the Disk Array
4.
Click the Logical Drives
5.
Click the Logical Drive
icon.
icon.
icon.
6.
Click the LUN Map tab in Management View.
7.
From the Unassigned Initiator List, click an initiator to choose it.
Or type the initiator name into the Initiator Name field.
8.
9.
Type a LUN into the Map to LUN field.
Click the Assign button.
The initiator appears in the Assigned Initiator List.
10. Click the Submit button.
157
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Notes
•
Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your Host
PC.
•
The initiator name you input must match exactly in order for
the connection to work.
LUN Mapping Parameters
•
Initiator Name
•
Fibre Channel – A Fibre Channel initiator name is the World Wide Port
Name of the device and is composed of a series of eight, two-digit
hexadecimal numbers.
•
SAS – A SAS initiator name is the SAS address of the HBA card in the
Host PC.
•
Symbolic Name – Optional. A common name for a Fibre Channel initiator
•
Port ID – Port ID of the Fibre Channel port for this initiator
•
LUN – Logical Unit Number on this logical drive for the selected initiator. You
must enter a different LUN for each logical drive
158
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Managing Spare Drives
When a physical drive in a disk array fails and a spare drive of adequate capacity
is available, the disk array will begin to rebuild automatically using the spare
drive. See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 336.
Spare drive management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing a List of Spare Drives (page 159)
•
Locating a Spare Drive (page 159)
•
Creating a Spare Drive (page 160)
•
Deleting Spare Drive (page 161)
•
Making Spare Drive Settings (page 161)
•
Running Spare Check (page 162)
Viewing a List of Spare Drives
To view a list of spare drives:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Spare Drives
icon in Tree View.
icon.
The information includes:
•
ID – The unique ID number assigned to the spare drive.
•
Operational Status – OK is normal. Can also show Rebuilding, Transition
Running, PDM Running, or Offline.
•
Physical Drive ID – The ID number of the physical drive in the subsystem
enclosure.
•
Capacity – The data storage capacity of this spare drive.
•
Revertible – Yes or No. A revertible spare drive automatically returns to its
spare drive assignment after the failed physical drive in the disk array is
replaced.
•
Type – Global, can be used by any disk array. Dedicated, can only be used
by the assigned disk array.
•
Dedicated to Array – For dedicated spares, the disk array to which it is
assigned. Global spares show N/A.
Locating a Spare Drive
To locate a physical drive assigned as a spare drive in the VTrak subsystem
enclosure:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Spare Drives
icon in Tree View.
icon.
159
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
3.
Click the Spare Drive
icon.
In Management View, the Enclosure Front View diagram appears with the
location of the spare drive highlighted.
Creating a Spare Drive
Important
•
There must be an unconfigured physical drive available for
selection as a spare drive. See “Viewing a List of Physical
Drives” on page 131.
•
Be sure the unconfigured physical drive has adequate
capacity to replace the largest drive in the disk array.
To create a spare drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Spare Drives
3.
Click the Create tab in Management View.
4.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
Select a spare type, Global or Dedicated.
Global can be used by any disk array. Dedicated can only be used by the
assigned disk arrays
5.
To make a revertible spare drive, check the Revertible box.
A revertible spare drive can be returned to spare drive status after it replaces
a failed drive in a disk array. See “Transition” on page 303 for more
information.
6.
In the Physical drives field, highlight the physical drive you want to assign as
a spare drive in the Available list and press the >> button to move the drive
to the Selected list.
You can also double-click drives to move them.
7.
If you selected a Dedicated spare drive, in the Dedicated to Disk Arrays field,
highlight disk arrays to which you want assign the spare drive from the
Available list and press the >> button to move the array to the Selected list.
You can also double-click arrays to move them.
8.
Click the Update button.
Your choices are displayed under New Hot Spare Drives.
9.
If you agree with the proposed choices, click the Submit button.
160
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Deleting Spare Drive
Note
If an existing spare drive has the wrong parameters for your
needs, click the Settings tab to change the parameters rather
than delete the spare drive and create a new one.
To delete a spare drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Spare Drives
3.
Click the Delete tab in Management View.
4.
Check the box to the left of the spare drive you want to delete.
5.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
Click the Submit button.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided.
6.
Click the OK button.
Making Spare Drive Settings
The Spare Drive–Settings tab enables you to change the settings of an existing
spare drive. To change spare drive settings:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Spare Drives
3.
Click the Spare Drive
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
4.
Click the Settings tab in Management View.
5.
Select a spare type, Global or Dedicated.
Global can be used by any disk array. Dedicated can only be used by the
assigned disk arrays
6.
To make a revertible spare drive, check the Revertible box.
A revertible spare drive automatically returns to its spare drive assignment
after the failed physical drive in the disk array is replaced.
7.
If you selected a Dedicated spare drive, in the Dedicated to Disk Arrays field,
highlight the disk arrays to which you want assign the spare drive from the
Available list and press the >> button to move them to the Selected list.
You can also double-click array to move it.
8.
Click the Submit button.
161
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Running Spare Check
Spare Check verifies the operational status of your spare drives. You can also
schedule a Spare Check. See “Scheduling an Activity” on page 72.
To check a spare drive:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Spare Drives
icon in Tree View.
icon.
3.
Click the Spare Check tab in Management View.
4.
From the Physical Drive dropdown menu, choose the spare drive you want
to check.
Or choose All to check all the spare drives at the same time.
5.
Click the Submit button.
The results of the Spare Check appear under Spare Check Status in the
Information tab. “Healthy” means normal condition.
162
Chapter 4: Management with WebPAM PROe
Working with the Logical Drive Summary
The Logical Drive Summary displays a list of all logical drives in the VTrak
enclosure plus the expanded or cascaded enclosures. This list does not arrange
the logical drives under the disk array to which they belong nor under the
enclosure in which they are located.
Logical Drive Summary includes the following functions:
•
Viewing a List of All Logical Drives (page 163)
•
Viewing Individual Logical Drive Information (page 163)
Viewing a List of All Logical Drives
To view a list of all logical drives in all enclosures:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Drive Summary
icon.
Viewing Individual Logical Drive Information
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Drive Summary
3.
Click the Logical Drive
icon in Tree View.
icon.
icon.
The information and location for the logical drive appear in Management
View. See “Viewing Logical Drive Information” on page 153.
163
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
164
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Initial Connection (page 166)
•
Running Quick Setup (page 171)
•
Managing the Subsystem (page 172)
•
Managing the Controllers (page 176)
•
Managing the Enclosure (page 179)
•
Managing Physical Drives (page 185)
•
Managing Disk Arrays (page 189)
•
Managing Spare Drives (page 201)
•
Managing Logical Drives (page 204)
•
Managing the Network Connection (page 208)
•
Managing Fibre Channel Connections (page 210)
•
Managing SAS Connections (page 214)
•
Managing Background Activity (page 216)
•
Working with the Event Viewer (page 218)
•
Working with LUN Mapping (page 220)
•
Managing UPS Units (page 222)
•
Managing Users (page 225)
•
Working with Software Management (page 229)
•
Flashing through TFTP (page 237)
•
Viewing Flash Image Information (page 238)
•
Clearing Statistics (page 239)
•
Restoring Factory Defaults (page 240)
•
Shutting Down the Subsystem (page 241)
•
Starting Up After Shutdown (page 243)
•
Restarting the Subsystem (page 245)
•
Making Buzzer Settings (page 247)
For information about VTrak’s audible alarm and LEDs, see “Chapter 8:
Troubleshooting” on page 307.
165
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Initial Connection
Making an initial connection includes the following functions:
•
Making a Serial Connection (page 166)
•
Making a Telnet Connection (page 167)
•
Making a SSH Connection (page 167)
•
Logging In (page 168)
•
Accessing Online Help (page 169)
•
Exiting the CLU (page 169)
•
Logging Out of the CLI (page 170)
•
Logging Back Into the CLI and CLU (page 170)
Making a Serial Connection
Before you begin, be sure the RJ11-to-DB9 serial data cable is connected
between the Host PC and VTrak, and that both machines are booted and
running.
Figure 1. Serial port on the controller
Mgmt
FC 1
4
FC 2
UPS
4
2
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
Serial port
Then do the following actions:
1.
Change your terminal emulation program settings to match the following
specifications:
•
Bits per second: 115200
•
Data bits: 8
•
Parity: None
•
Stop bits: 1
•
Flow control: none
2.
Start your PC’s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program.
3.
Press Enter once to launch the CLI.
166
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Making a Telnet Connection
A Telnet connection requires a network connection between the Host PC and
VTrak controller’s Management (Ethernet) port.
Figure 2. Management port on the controller
Mgmt
FC 1
4
FC 2
2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
Management port
To start the telnet program:
1.
Go to the command line prompt (Windows) or click the terminal icon (Linux).
2.
Type telnet 192.168.1.56 2300 and press Enter.
The IP address above is only an example.
Use your VTrak's Management port IP address.
The VTrak's Telnet port number is 2300.
3.
Press Enter once to launch the CLI.
Making a SSH Connection
A Secure Shell (SSH) connection requires a network connection between the
Host PC and VTrak controller’s Management (Ethernet) port.
Windows PCs require you to install a SSH application.
Figure 3. Management port on the controller
Mgmt
FC 1
4
FC 2
2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
Management port
Windows
To start the Windows SSH program:
1.
2.
Open the SSH application from the Start menu.
Enter the VTrak's IP address and SSH port number in the fields provided.
The VTrak's SSH default port number is 22.
3.
Press Enter once to launch the CLI.
167
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Linux
To start the Linux SSH program:
1.
Click the terminal icon.
2.
Type ssh 192.168.1.56 22 and press Enter.
The IP address above is only an example.
Use your VTrak's Management port IP address.
The VTrak's SSH default port number is 22.
3.
Press Enter once to launch the CLI.
Logging In
1.
At the Login prompt, type the user name and press Enter.
The default user name is administrator.
2.
At the Password prompt, type the password and press Enter.
The default password is password.
The CLI screen appears.
3.
At the administrator@cli> prompt, type menu and press Enter.
The CLU Main Menu appears.
Figure 4. CLU main menu
Quick Setup – A sequence of four steps to setup System Date & Time,
Management Port, and RAID Configuration.
168
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Subsystem Management – Subsystem settings, Controller settings, statistics,
lock/unlock the subsystem, set date and time, Enclosure settings, FRUs and
Topology.
Physical Drive Management – View disk drive assignments and parameters,
change global physical drive settings, and locate a physical drive.
Disk Array Management – View disk array information, create and delete disk
arrays, transport, rebuild, PDM, and transition functions, and locate a disk array,
create and delete logical drives.
Spare Drive Management – View a list of spare drives, create, modify, and
delete spare drives, and run spare check.
Logical Drive Management – View logical drive information, name logical
drives, initialization and redundancy check, and locate a logical drive.
Network Management – Set IP addresses for Virtual and Maintenance Mode
Ports, gateway, and DNS server; subnet mask.
Fibre Channel Management – Node information, Port information, settings and
statistics, list of logged-in devices, list of initiators.
SAS Management – Node information, Port information, settings, status, and
statistics; SFP information, list initiators.
Background Activity – Summary of Activity, Settings for Media Patrol, Auto
Rebuild, Rebuild, Migration, PDM, Transition, Synchronization, Initialization,
Redundancy Check rate, and thresholds.
Event Viewer – View the event logs.
Additional Info and Management – LUN Mapping, User Management, Flash
through TFTP (Firmware update), Clear Statistics, Restore Default Settings,
Shutdown or Restart the subsystem.
Buzzer – Enable, disable or silence the buzzer (audible alarm).
Accessing Online Help
To access online help on any CLU screen, press Ctrl-E.
To return to the CLU, press Enter.
Exiting the CLU
1.
Highlight Return to Previous Menu and press Enter.
Repeat this action until you arrive at the Main Menu.
2.
From the Main Menu, highlight Return to CLI and press Enter to exit
3.
Close the terminal emulation, Telnet or terminal window.
169
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Logging Out of the CLI
When you shut down or restart the VTrak subsystem, you are automatically
logged out of the CLI.
To manually log out of the CLI (no shut down or restart):
At the username@cli> prompt, type logout and press Enter.
The prompt changes to cli>.
Logging Back Into the CLI and CLU
To log into the CLI and CLU after a manual logout:
1.
At the cli:> prompt, type login followed by your user name and press Enter.
2.
At the Password: prompt, type your password and press Enter.
3.
At the username@cli> prompt, type menu and press Enter to open the CLU.
170
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Running Quick Setup
Quick Setup is discussed under “Setting up VTrak with the CLU” on page 43.
171
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing the Subsystem
Subsystem Management includes the following functions:
•
Setting an Alias for the Subsystem (page 172)
•
Setting Redundancy for the Subsystem (page 172)
•
Setting Cache Mirroring for the Subsystem (page 172)
•
Running Media Patrol (page 173)
•
Locking or Unlocking the Subsystem (page 173)
•
Setting Subsystem Date and Time (page 174)
•
Making NTP Settings (page 174)
•
Synchronizing with a NTP Server (page 175)
Setting an Alias for the Subsystem
An alias is optional. To set an Alias for this subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Subsystem Settings and press Enter.
3.
Type and alias into the Alias field.
Maximum of 48 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words
and underscore.
4.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Setting Redundancy for the Subsystem
This feature applies to models with dual controllers.
To set redundancy:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Subsystem Settings and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Redundancy Type and press the spacebar to toggle between
Active-Active and Active-Standby.
4.
•
Active-Active – Both RAID controllers are active and can share the
load
•
Active-Standby – One RAID controller is in standby mode and goes
active if the other fails
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Setting Cache Mirroring for the Subsystem
This option applies only to subsystems with two controllers. To use Cache
Mirroring, the Redundancy Type must be set to Active-Active.
172
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
To change Cache Mirroring for this subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Subsystem Settings and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Cache Mirroring and press the spacebar to toggle between
Enabled and Disabled.
4.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
5.
Restart the subsystem.
See “Restarting the Subsystem” on page 245.
Notes
•
If you disable Cache Mirroring, LUN Affinity will be enabled
automatically.
•
If you change Cache Mirroring, be sure both controllers are
properly installed in the subsystem before you restart.
Running Media Patrol
Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media
on each disk drive. Media Patrol checks all physical drives assigned to disk
arrays and spare drives. It does not check unconfigured drives.
To start, stop, pause or resume Media Patrol:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Media Patrol and press enter.
3.
Highlight Start, Stop, Pause, or Resume and press Enter.
4.
If you chose Stop, press Y to confirm.
Locking or Unlocking the Subsystem
The lock prevents other sessions (including sessions with the same user) from
making a configuration change to the controller until the lock expires or a forced
unlock is done. When the user who locked the controller logs out, the lock is
automatically released.
Setting the Lock
To set the lock:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Lock Management and press Enter.
3.
In the Lock Time field, type a lock time in minutes.
1440 minutes = 24 hours
173
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
4.
Highlight Lock and press Enter.
Resetting the Lock
To reset the lock with a new time:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Lock Management and press Enter.
3.
In the Lock Time field, type a lock time in minutes.
1 to 1440 minutes (24 hours)
4.
Highlight Renew and press Enter.
Releasing the Lock
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Lock Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Unlock and press Enter.
Releasing a Lock set by another user
To release somebody else’s lock:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Lock Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Force Unlock and press the Spacebar to change to Yes.
4.
Highlight Unlock and press Enter.
Setting Subsystem Date and Time
Use this screen to make Date and Time settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Modify System Date & Time and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the System Date or System Time setting.
4.
Press the backspace key to erase the current value.
5.
Type in a new value.
6.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Making NTP Settings
After you have made Network Time Protocol (NTP) settings, the VTrak
subsystem synchronizes with a NTP server.
•
At startup
•
Every night
•
When you synchronize manually
174
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
To make NTP settings for the subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight NTP Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight NTP Settings and press Enter.
4.
Make the following settings as required:
•
Highlight NTP Service and press the spacebar to toggle between
Enabled and Disabled.
•
Highlight Time Server (1), Time Server (2), or Time Server (3) and type
a server name.
Example: 0.us.pool.ntp.org
You can have up to 3 NTP servers.
•
Highlight Time Zone and press the spacebar to toggle through GMT,
GMT+, and GMT-.
For GMT+ and GMT-, type the hour from 0:00 to 13:00 GMT for your
time zone.
•
Highlight Daylight Savings Time and press the spacebar to toggle
between Enable and Disable.
If Daylight Savings Time is Enabled, highlight the Start Month and End
Month and enter a number from 1 to 12.
Then highlight the Week and Day and toggle to make your choices.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Notes
•
The NTP server name shown is an example only. You must
find and enter your local NTP server name.
•
GMT is the older designation for UTC.
Synchronizing with a NTP Server
The VTrak subsystem automatically synchronizes with a NTP server every night
and a startup. You have the option of synchronizing manually at any time.
To manually synchronize the VTrak with a NTP server:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight NTP Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Start Time Sync and press Enter.
4.
Press Y to confirm.
To verify, check Last Synchronization Time and Last Synchronization Result.
175
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing the Controllers
Controller Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing Controller Information (page 176)
•
Clearing an Orphan Watermark (page 176)
•
Making Controller Settings (page 177)
•
Locating the Controller (page 178)
Viewing Controller Information
Controller Management includes information, settings and statistics.
To access Controller Management:
1.
2.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
Highlight Controller Management and press Enter.
The Controller summary information includes:
3.
•
Controller ID – 1 or 2
•
Alias – if assigned
•
Operational Status – OK means normal. Might show BGA running. Not
present indicates a malfunction or no controller is installed
•
Readiness Status – Active or Standby is normal. N/A means not
accessible
Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.
To access additional controller information, highlight Advanced Information and
press Enter.
To access controller statistics, highlight Controller Statistics and press Enter.
Clearing Statistics
To clear controller statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 239.
Clearing an Orphan Watermark
This condition is the result of a disk drive failure during an NVRAM RAID level
migration on a disk array.
To clear an orphan watermark:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Controller Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight one of the controllers and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Clear Orphan Watermark and press Enter.
176
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
The condition is cleared. See “Physical Drive Failed” on page 340 for more
information.
Making Controller Settings
If your subsystem has two controllers, any settings you make to one controller
will automatically apply to the other controller.
To make Controller settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Controller Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Controller Settings and press Enter.
5.
Make the following settings as required:
•
Type an alias into the Alias field.
Maximum of 48 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words
and underscore. An alias is optional.
•
Highlight LUN Affinity and press the spacebar to toggle between
Enabled and Disabled.
If your subsystem has two controllers and Cache Mirroring is disabled,
LUN Affinity is enabled automatically.
•
Highlight Coercion and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled
and Disabled.
•
Highlight Coercion Method and press the spacebar to toggle through:
For more information, see “Capacity Coercion” on page 293.
GB Truncate – Reduces the capacity to the nearest 1 GB boundary
10 GB Truncate – Reduces the capacity to the nearest 10 GB boundary
Grp (group) Rounding – Uses an algorithm to determine truncation.
Results in the maximum amount of usable drive capacity
Table Rounding – Applies a predefined table to determine truncation
•
Highlight Host Cache Flushing and press the spacebar to toggle
between Enable and Disable.
•
Highlight Cache Flush Interval and press the backspace key to erase
the current value. Type a new interval value.
For more information, see “Host Cache Flushing” on page 290.
The range is 1 to 12 seconds. For more information, see “Cache Policy”
on page 288.
•
Highlight SMART and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and
Disable.
177
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
•
Highlight SMART Poll Interval and press the backspace key to erase the
current value. Type a new interval value (1 to 1440 minutes).
•
Highlight Poll Interval and press the backspace key to erase the current
value. Type a new interval value (15 to 255 seconds).
•
Highlight Adaptive Writeback Cache and press the spacebar to toggle
between Enabled and Disabled.
For more information, see “Adaptive Writeback Cache” on page 289.
•
Highlight Forced Read Ahead Cache and press the spacebar to toggle
between Enabled and Disabled.
For more information, see “Forced Read Ahead Cache” on page 290.
6.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Locating the Controller
To locate this controller:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Controller Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Controller Settings and press Enter.
5.
Highlight Locate Controller and press Enter.
Controller Dirty Cache
LED and Status
Controller, will flash for one minute.
178
LED, on the back of the
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Managing the Enclosure
Enclosure Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing the Enclosures Summary (page 179)
•
Viewing Enclosure Information (page 179)
•
Making Enclosure Settings (page 180)
•
Viewing FRU VPD Information (page 180)
•
Viewing Power Supply Status (page 180)
•
Locating a Power Supply (page 181)
•
Viewing Cooling Unit Status (page 181)
•
Viewing Temperature Sensor Status (page 181)
•
Viewing Voltage Sensor Status (page 182)
•
Checking the Batteries (page 182)
•
Reconditioning a Battery (page 183)
•
Locating an Enclosure (page 183)
•
Viewing Enclosure Topology (page 183)
Viewing the Enclosures Summary
Enclosure Management includes information, status, settings and location. To
access Enclosure Management:
1.
2.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
The following information is shown:
•
Enclosure ID number
•
Enclosure Type
•
Operational Status
•
Status Description (specific components in need of attention, if any)
Viewing Enclosure Information
To view enclosure information:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
Enclosure information appears the Information tab in Management View. You
can monitor power supplies, cooling units, enclosure temperatures and
voltages, and the battery.
179
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Adjustable items
You can set or adjust the following items:
•
Enclosure Warning and Critical temperature thresholds
•
Controller Warning and Critical temperature thresholds
See “Making Enclosure Settings” on page 180.
For information on Enclosure problems, see “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on
page 307.
Making Enclosure Settings
To make Enclosure settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Enclosure Settings and press Enter.
5.
Highlight the Temperature Warning threshold you want to change.
6.
Press the backspace key to erase the current value.
7.
Type a new interval value in degrees C.
8.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Viewing FRU VPD Information
FRU VPD refers to Vital Product Data (VPD) information about Field Replaceable
Units (FRU) in the enclosure. The number and type of FRU depends on the
subsystem model.
To view FRU VPD information:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight FRU VPD Information and press Enter.
Use this information when communicating with Technical Support and when
ordering replacement units. For contact information, see “Contacting
Technical Support” on page 355.
Viewing Power Supply Status
To view the status of the power supplies:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
180
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Power Supplies and press Enter.
The screen displays the operational and fan status of VTrak’s two power
supplies. If any status differs from normal or the fan speed is below the
Healthy Threshold value, there is a fan/power supply malfunction. See
“Replacing a Power Supply” on page 259.
Locating a Power Supply
To locate a power supply:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Power Supplies and press Enter.
5.
Highlight Locate Power Supply and press Enter.
The LED on the selected power supply blinks for one minute.
Viewing Cooling Unit Status
To view the status of the blowers:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Cooling Units and press Enter.
The screen displays the status and speed of VTrak’s cooling units. If fan or
blower speed is below the Healthy Threshold, there is a malfunction. See
“Replacing a Cooling Unit Fan or Blower” on page 260.
Viewing Temperature Sensor Status
To view the status of the temperature sensors:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Temperature Sensors and press Enter.
If any temperature exceeds the Healthy Threshold value, there is an
overheat condition in the enclosure. See “Making Enclosure Settings” on
page 180 and “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on page 307.
181
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Viewing Voltage Sensor Status
To view the status of the voltage sensors:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Voltage Sensors and press Enter.
If any voltage is outside the Healthy Threshold values, there is a voltage
malfunction in the enclosure. See “Chapter 8: Troubleshooting” on page 307.
Checking the Batteries
This feature enables you monitor and recondition the subsystem battery or
batteries.
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Batteries and press Enter.
5.
Highlight the battery you want to monitor and press Enter.
Battery Notes
Each battery works with a controller. If the battery is present in the subsystem but
the corresponding controller is not present, the battery will not appear in the
interface.
If a battery does not reflect normal conditions and it is not currently under
reconditioning, run the Recondition function before you replace the battery. See
“Reconditioning a Battery” on page 183.
Reconditioning fully discharges, then fully recharges the battery. During
reconditioning, if the Adaptive Writeback Cache function is enabled, the controller
cache is set to Write Thru. After reconditioning, the cache is reset to Write Back.
See “Making Controller Settings” on page 177.
If a battery reaches the threshold temperature while charging or discharging, the
charge or discharge pauses and the blower runs at high speed until the battery
temperature falls below the threshold.
If the battery does not maintain normal values after a Recondition, replace the
battery. See “Replacing a Cache Battery” on page 265.
VTrak automatically reconditions the battery every two months.
When you install a new battery, the cycle count shows 0. VTrak automatically
runs a recondition on the battery to verify it. If you restart the subsystem or
182
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
controller before reconditioning is finished, the battery is charged to 100%, then
reconditioning starts again.
Reconditioning a Battery
To recondition the subsystem battery:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Batteries and press Enter.
5.
Highlight the battery you want to recondition and press Enter.
6.
Highlight Start Reconditioning and press Enter.
7.
Press Y to confirm.
Reconditioning fully discharges, then fully recharges the battery. During
reconditioning, if the Adaptive Writeback Cache function is enabled, the
controller cache is set to Write Thru. After reconditioning, the cache is reset
to Write Back. See “Making Controller Settings” on page 177.
Locating an Enclosure
This feature helps you identify the physical VTrak enclosure you are working with
through the CLU.
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Locate Enclosure and press Enter.
The LEDs on the front of the VTrak will blink for one minute.
Viewing Enclosure Topology
This feature displays the connection topology of the VTrak subsystem. Topology
refers to the manner in which the data paths among the enclosures are
connected. There are three methods:
•
Individual Subsystem – A single subsystem
•
JBOD Expansion – Managed through one subsystem or head unit
•
RAID Subsystem Cascading – Managed through one subsystem or head
unit
For more information about connections, see “Making Management and Data
Connections” on page 19.
183
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
To view enclosure topology:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Enclosure Topology and press Enter.
The following information applies to the Head Unit:
•
Enclosure number – 1
•
Controller number – 1 or 2
•
Port number
•
Status – OK is normal. N/C is not connected
•
Link Width
The following information applies to RAID cascaded units or JBOD
expansion units:
•
Connected EnclWWN – The subsystem identified by its World Wide
Number (WWN)
•
Connected(Encl,Ctrl,Port) – The subsystem’s enclosure, controller,
and port numbers where the data connection was made
If there is no connection, the value shows N/A.
184
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Managing Physical Drives
Physical Drive Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing a List of Physical Drives (page 185)
•
Making Global Physical Drive Settings (page 185)
•
Viewing Physical Drive Information (page 186)
•
Viewing Physical Drive Statistics (page 186)
•
Setting an Alias (page 186)
•
Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions (page 187)
•
Forcing a Physical Drive Offline or Online (page 187)
•
Locating a Physical Drive (page 188)
Viewing a List of Physical Drives
To view a list of physical drives:
From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.
The list of physical drives displays.
Making Global Physical Drive Settings
All physical drive settings are made globally, except for setting an alias, which
applies to individual drives.
To make global physical drive settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter.
3.
Change the following settings as required.
For SATA drives:
•
Highlight Write Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between
Enabled and Disabled.
•
Highlight Read Look Ahead Cache and press the spacebar to toggle
between Enabled and Disabled.
•
Highlight CmdQueuing and press the spacebar to toggle between
Enabled and Disabled.
•
Highlight MediumErrorThreshold and press the backspace key to
remove the current value, then type a new smaller value.
•
Highlight DMA Mode and press the spacebar to toggle through UDMA
0–5 and MDMA 0–2.
See note on next page.
185
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
For SAS drives:
•
Highlight Write Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between
Enabled and Disabled.
•
Highlight Read Look Ahead Cache and press the spacebar to toggle
between Enabled and Disabled.
•
Highlight CmdQueuing and press the spacebar to toggle between
Enabled and Disabled.
•
Highlight MediumErrorThreshold and press the backspace key to
remove the current value, then type a new smaller value.
•
Highlight Read Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between
Enabled and Disabled.
See note below.
4.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Medium Error Threshold is the number of bad blocks tolerated before the
controller marks the drive as Dead. The default setting of zero disables this
function. With the Threshold set to zero, drives are not marked offline even
when errors are detected.
Viewing Physical Drive Information
To view information about a physical drive:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter.
Basic information displays.
3.
Highlight Advanced Information and press Enter.
Advanced information displays.
Viewing Physical Drive Statistics
To view the statistics for the selected physical drive:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Physical Drive Statistics and press Enter.
Clearing Statistics
To clear physical drive statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 239
Setting an Alias
An alias is optional. To set an Alias for a physical drive:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.
186
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
2.
Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter.
3.
Type an alias into the field provided.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words
and underscore.
4.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions
The Clear Stale and Clear PFA functions only appear when those conditions exist
on the physical drive. To clear a Stale or PFA condition on a physical drive:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Clear Stale or Clear PFA and press Enter.
If a physical drive is still online and shows a PFA error but “Clear PFA” does
not appear, use PDM to copy the data to a new physical drive. Go to Disk
Array Info and Settings.
If a physical drive is offline and shows a PFA error, rebuild the disk array. Go
to Disk Array Info and Settings. After rebuilding, the drive will show Stale.
Run Clear Stale then run Clear PFA.
If the physical drive with a PFA error is a spare, you must delete the drive as
a spare, then Clear PFA will be available.
After you clear a PFA error, watch for another PFA error to appear. If it does,
replace the physical drive.
Forcing a Physical Drive Offline or Online
This function enables you to force an:
•
Online physical drive to go Offline
•
Offline physical drive to go Online
The Force Offline/Online function appears only for physical drives that are
assigned to disk arrays.
Caution
Forcing a physical drive offline or online is likely to cause data
loss. Back up your data before you proceed. Use these functions
only when required.
To force a physical drive offline or online:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter.
187
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
3.
Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Force Offline or Force Online and press Enter.
5.
Press Y to confirm.
Locating a Physical Drive
This feature helps you identify a physical drive within the VTrak enclosure you
are working with through the CLU. To locate a physical drive:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Locate Physical Drive and press Enter.
The drive carrier LEDs on the front of the VTrak will blink for one minute.
188
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Managing Disk Arrays
Disk Array Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing a List of Disk Arrays (page 189)
•
Creating a Disk Array (page 189)
•
Deleting a Disk Array (page 193)
•
Viewing Disk Array Information (page 194)
•
Setting an Alias for a Disk Array (page 194)
•
Enabling Media Patrol and PDM on a Disk Array (page 195)
•
Preparing the Disk Array for Transport (page 195)
•
Rebuilding a Disk Array (page 196)
•
Migrating a Disk Array (page 196)
•
Running PDM (page 197)
•
Running Transition on a Disk Array (page 198)
•
Locating a Disk Array (page 198)
•
Locating a Disk Array (page 198)
•
Creating a Logical Drive (page 198)
•
Deleting a Logical Drive (page 200)
Viewing a List of Disk Arrays
To view a list of disk arrays:
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
The list of disk arrays displays.
Creating a Disk Array
The CLU provides three methods of creating a disk array:
•
Automatic – Creates a default disk array and logical drive based on
unconfigured physical drives in the system. No user choices. See “Creating
a Disk Array – Automatic” on page 190.
•
Express – You choose the RAID characteristics and type of application.
Creates a disk array and logical drive(s) based on your input. See “Creating
a Disk Array – Express” on page 191.
•
Advanced – You specify all parameters for a new disk array. One logical
drive will be made automatically when you create the disk array. If you
choose less than the total available capacity, you can use the remaining
space to create additional logical drives at a later time. See “Creating a Disk
Array – Advanced” on page 192.
189
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Creating a Disk Array – Automatic
To create a disk array using the Automatic feature:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Create New Array and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Configuration Method and press the spacebar to toggle to
Automatic.
4.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings and move to the next screen.
5.
Review the proposed configuration of disk array and logical drive(s).
•
To accept the proposed configuration and create the disk array and
logical drive(s), highlight Save Configuration and press Enter.
•
To reject the proposed configuration, highlight Cancel Array
Configuration and press Enter. You will return to the Disk Arrays
Summary screen.
To create a disk array with different characteristics, repeat the steps
above specifying different parameters but choose the Express or
Advanced option.
190
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Creating a Disk Array – Express
To create a disk array using the Express feature:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Create New Array and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Configuration Method and press the spacebar to toggle to Express.
4.
Highlight the following options and press to spacebar to choose Yes or No:
•
Redundancy
•
Capacity
•
Performance
•
Spare Drive
•
Mixing SATA/SAS Drive
If you choose No, and you have both SATA and SAS drives, different
arrays will be created for each type of drive.
5.
Highlight Number of Logical Drives and press the backspace key to erase
the current value, then enter the number of logical drives you want.
6.
Highlight Application Type and press the spacebar to toggle though the
applications and choose the best one for your disk array.
7.
8.
•
File Server
•
Video Stream
•
Transaction Data
•
Transaction Log
•
Other
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings and move to the next screen.
Review the proposed configuration of disk array and logical drive(s).
To accept the proposed configuration and create the disk array and logical
drive(s), highlight Save Configuration and press Enter.
To reject the proposed configuration, highlight Cancel Array Configuration
and press Enter. You will return to the Disk Arrays Summary screen.
To create a disk array with different characteristics, highlight Create New
Array and press Enter. Repeat the steps above specifying different
parameters. Or choose the Advanced option.
191
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Creating a Disk Array – Advanced
For more information on the choices below, see “Chapter 7: Technology
Background” on page 273.
To create a disk array using the Advanced feature:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Create New Array and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Configuration Method and press the spacebar to toggle to
Advanced.
Step 1 – Disk Array Creation
1.
Choose whether to enable Media Patrol and PDM.
2.
If you want to specify an alias to the disk array, highlight Alias and type a
name.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words and
underscore.
3.
Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter.
4.
Highlight a physical drive you want to add to your array and press the
spacebar to choose it.
Repeat this action until you have selected all the physical drives for your
array.
5.
Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter.
Step 2 – Logical Drive Creation
1.
If you want to specify an alias to the logical drive, highlight Alias and type a
name.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words and
underscore.
2.
Highlight RAID Level and press the spacebar to toggle though a list of
available RAID levels.
3.
If you want to create multiple logical drives, highlight Capacity, press the
backspace key to remove the current value, then type a new smaller value.
4.
RAID 50 and 60 only. Highlight Number of Axles and press the spacebar to
choose the number of axles.
See “RAID 50 Axles” on page 281 or “RAID 60 Axles” on page 283.
5.
For the following items, accept the default value or highlight and press the
spacebar to choose a new value:
•
Highlight Stripe and press the spacebar to toggle through stripe sizes
and choose 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, or 1 MB.
192
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
6.
•
Highlight Sector and press the spacebar to toggle through sector sizes
and choose 512 B, 1 KB, 2 KB, or 4 KB.
•
Highlight Write Policy and press the spacebar to toggle write cache
policy between WriteBack and WriteThru (write though).
•
Highlight Read Policy and press the spacebar to toggle read cache
policy though ReadCache, ReadAhead, and NoCache.
•
Highlight Preferred Controller ID and press the spacebar to toggle
among 1, 2, or Automatic. Applies to dual-controller capable Fibre
Channel models only.
Highlight Save Logical Drive and press Enter.
Step 3 – Summary
Review logical drive(s) you are about to create for your new array. Then do one of
the following actions:
•
If you agree with the logical drive(s) as specified, highlight Complete Disk
Array Creation and press Enter.
•
If you specified less than the full capacity for the logical drive in the previous
screen, and you want to add another logical drive now, highlight Create New
Logical Drive and press Enter.
•
If you do not agree with the logical drive(s), highlight Return to Previous
Screen and press Enter to begin the process again.
Deleting a Disk Array
Caution
When you delete a disk array, you delete all the logical drives and
the data they contain. Back up all important data before deleting a
disk array.
1.
2.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
Highlight the disk array you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.
3.
Highlight Delete Marked Arrays and press Enter.
4.
Press Y to confirm the deletion.
5.
Press Y again to reconfirm.
193
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Viewing Disk Array Information
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
The information and settings screen appears.
3.
Highlight any of the following and press Enter to view a list of:
•
Physical drives in this array
•
Logical drives in this array
•
Spare drives in this array, dedicated and global
Disk Array Operational Status
•
OK – This is the normal state of a logical drive. When a logical drive is
Functional, it is ready for immediate use. For RAID Levels other than RAID 0
(Striping), the logical drive has full redundancy.
•
Synchronizing – This condition is temporary. Synchronizing is a
maintenance function that verifies the integrity of data and redundancy in the
logical drive. When a logical drive is Synchronizing, it will function and your
data is available. However, access will be slower due to the synchronizing
operation.
•
Critical/Degraded – This condition arises as the result of a physical drive
failure. A degraded logical drive will still function and your data is still
available. However, the logical drive has lost redundancy (fault tolerance).
You must determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
•
Rebuilding – This condition is temporary. When a physical drive has been
replaced, the logical drive automatically begins rebuilding in order to restore
redundancy (fault tolerance). When a logical drive is rebuilding, it will
function and your data is available. However, access will be slower due to
the rebuilding operation.
•
Transport Ready – After you perform a successful Prepare for Transport
operation, this condition means you can remove the physical drives of this
disk array and move them to another enclosure or different drive slots. After
you relocate the physical drives, the disk array status will show OK.
Setting an Alias for a Disk Array
This function sets an alias for the disk array. To set an alias:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Alias and type an alias into the field provided.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words and
underscore. An alias is optional.
194
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
4.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Accepting an Incomplete Array
This condition is the result of a missing physical drive. See “Incomplete Array” on
page 339 before you use this function.
To accept an incomplete array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Accept Incomplete Array and press Enter.
Enabling Media Patrol and PDM on a Disk Array
Media Patrol checks the magnetic media on physical drives. Predictive Data
Migration (PDM) migrates data from the suspect physical drive to a spare
physical drive before the disk drive fails.
Media Patrol and PDM are enabled by default. Enabled is the recommended
setting for both features.
To enable Media Patrol or PDM on a disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Media Patrol and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and
Disable.
4.
Highlight PDM and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and
Disable.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
See “Running PDM” on page 197.
For PDM rate, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 216.
Preparing the Disk Array for Transport
To run the Transport function on a disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Transport and press Enter.
4.
Press Y to confirm.
195
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Rebuilding a Disk Array
Before you can rebuild, you must have a replacement or target physical drive of
adequate capacity for your disk array.
To rebuild a disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Background Activities and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Rebuild and press Enter.
Default source and target drives are shown with possible alternative choices.
5.
To choose different drive, highlight the drive, press the backspace key to
remove the current number, then type a new number.
6.
Highlight Start and press Enter.
For rebuild rate, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 216.
Migrating a Disk Array
In order to migrate RAID level, you may have to add physical drives. For more
information, see “RAID Level Migration” on page 294.
To migrate a disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Background Activities and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Migration and press Enter.
5.
Highlight the physical drives you want to add and press the spacebar to
choose them.
Notes
6.
•
You can add physical drives to a RAID 50 or 60 array but you
cannot change the number of axles.
•
If you add an odd number of physical drives to a RAID 10
array, it will become a RAID 1E array by default.
Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter.
7.
Highlight a logical drive in the list that you want to migrate and press Enter.
8.
Highlight RAID Level and press the spacebar to toggle through the available
RAID levels.
9.
Optional. If you want to increase capacity of the logical drive, highlight
Expand Capacity and press the spacebar to toggle to Yes.
196
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Highlight Capacity, press the backspace key to erase the current capacity
and type in the new value.
The new value must be equal or larger than the current capacity.
10. Highlight Save Logical Drive and press Enter.
The screen returns to Disk Array Migration Logical Drives.
At this point, if you have other logical drives in the same disk array, you can
choose them for migration at the same time.
11. Highlight Complete Disk Array Migration and press Enter.
12. Press Y to confirm.
The screen returns to Disk Arrays Summary.
For migration rate, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 216.
Running PDM
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) migrates data from the suspect physical drive to
a spare physical drive before the disk drive fails.
Before you can run PDM, you must have a replacement or target physical drive of
adequate capacity for your disk array.
To run PDM on a disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Background Activities and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Predictive Data Migration and press Enter.
Default source and target drives are shown with possible alternative choices.
5.
To choose different drive, highlight the drive, press the backspace key to
remove the current number, then type a new number.
6.
Highlight Start and press Enter.
See “Enabling Media Patrol and PDM on a Disk Array” on page 195.
For PDM rate, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 216.
197
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Running Transition on a Disk Array
Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part
of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non-revertible spare drive.
For more information, see “Transition” on page 303.
In order to run Transition:
•
The spare drive must be Revertible.
•
You must have an unconfigured physical drive of the same or larger capacity
to replace the spare drive.
To run Transition on a disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Background Activities and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Transition and press Enter.
Default source and target drives are shown with possible alternative choices.
5.
To choose different drive, highlight the drive, press the backspace key to
remove the current number, then type a new number.
6.
Highlight Start and press Enter.
For transition rate, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 216.
Locating a Disk Array
This feature helps you identify the physical drives assigned to the disk array you
are working with in the CLU.
To locate a disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Locate Disk Array and press Enter.
The drive carrier LEDs pertaining to this disk array will blink for one minute.
Creating a Logical Drive
You can create logical drives on existing disk arrays if there is available space in
the array. For more information on the choices below, see “Chapter 7:
Technology Background” on page 273.
To create a logical drive from an existing disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array in which you want to create a logical drive and press
Enter.
198
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
3.
4.
Highlight Logical Drives in the Disk Array and press Enter.
Highlight Create New Logical Drive and press Enter.
The Disk Array ID number and Maximum capacity available for the new
logical drive are displayed.
5.
6.
Highlight the following parameters and press the backspace key to erase the
current value:
•
Alias – Type an alias into the field, if desired. Maximum of 32
characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words and
underscore.
•
Capacity – Maximum capacity shown. Enter a smaller capacity if
desired.
Highlight the following parameters and press the spacebar to toggle though
the available choices:
•
Stripe size – Press the spacebar to choose: 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB,
512 KB, or 1 MB
•
Sector size – Press the spacebar to choose: 512 B; 1 KB, 2 KB, or 4 KB
•
Write Policy – Press spacebar to choose: Write Back or Write Through
•
Read Policy – Press spacebar to choose: No Cache, Read Cache, or
Read Ahead Cache
7.
Highlight Preferred Controller ID and press the spacebar to toggle among 1,
2, or Automatic. Applies to dual-controller capable Fibre Channel models
only.
8.
RAID 50 and 60 only. Highlight Number of Axles and press the spacebar to
choose the number of axles.
9.
Highlight Save Logical Drive and press Enter.
Note
If you did not use all of the available capacity of the disk array, you
can create an additional logical drive at this point.
199
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Deleting a Logical Drive
Caution
When you delete a logical drive, you delete all the data it contains.
Back up all important data before deleting a logical drive.
To delete a logical drive from a disk array:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array that contains the logical drive you want to delete and
press Enter.
3.
Highlight Logical Drives in the Disk Array and press Enter.
4.
Highlight the logical drive you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark
it.
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.
5.
Highlight Delete Marked Logical Drives and press Enter.
6.
Press Y to confirm the deletion.
7.
Press Y again to re-confirm.
200
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Managing Spare Drives
Spare Drive Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing a list of Spare Drives (page 201)
•
Creating a Spare Drive (page 201)
•
Making Spare Drive Settings (page 202)
•
Running Spare Check (page 202)
•
Deleting a Spare Drive (page 203)
Viewing a list of Spare Drives
To view a list of spare drives:
From the Main Menu, highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter.
A list of the current spare drives appears, including the following parameters:
•
ID number
•
Operational Status
•
Physical Drive ID number
•
Configured Capacity
•
Revertible – The spare drive returns to spare status after you replace
the failed drive in the disk array. See “Transition” on page 303 for more
information.
•
Type – Global (all disk arrays) or Dedicated (to specified disk arrays)
•
Dedicated to Array – The array to which a dedicated spare is assigned
See “Hot Spare Drive(s)” on page 294.
Creating a Spare Drive
Only unconfigured physical drives can be used to make spares. Check your
available drives under Physical Drive Management. See “Managing Physical
Drives” on page 185.
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Create New Spare Drive and press Enter.
A default physical drive is shown with possible alternative choices.
3.
To choose different drive, highlight the drive, press the backspace key to
remove the current number, then type a new number.
4.
Highlight Revertible and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No.
A revertible drive can be returned to spare status after you replace the failed
drive in a disk array. See “Transition” on page 303 for more information.
201
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
5.
Highlight Spare Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Dedicated
and Global.
Dedicated means this spare drive can only be used with the specified disk
arrays. Global means this spare drive can be used by any disk array.
If you chose Dedicated, a default disk array is shown with possible
alternative choices.
To choose different array, highlight the array and press the backspace key to
erase the current number, then type the new number.
6.
Press Ctrl-A to save the spare drive.
Making Spare Drive Settings
To change spare drive settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter.
A list of the current spare drives appears, including the following parameters:
2.
3.
Highlight the spare drive you want to change and press Enter.
Highlight the setting you want to change:
•
Revertible – A revertible drive can be returned to spare status after you
replace the failed drive in a disk array. See “Transition” on page 303 for
more information.
•
Type – Dedicated means this spare drive can only be used with the
specified disk array(s). Global means this spare drive can be used by
any disk array.
4.
Press the spacebar to toggle between the choices.
5.
For dedicated spares, type the array number the spare is assigned to.
6.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Running Spare Check
To run Spare Check:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter.
A list of the current spare drives appears.
2.
Highlight the spare drive you want to check and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Start Spare Check and press Enter.
The results appear next to Spare Check Status in the same window. Healthy
means normal.
202
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Deleting a Spare Drive
Caution
If the spare drive you delete is the only spare, the controller will not
rebuild a critical array until you provide a new spare drive.
To delete a spare drive:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter.
A list of the current spare drives appears.
2.
Highlight the spare drive you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark
it.
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.
3.
Highlight Delete Marked Spare Drives and press Enter.
4.
Press Y to confirm the deletion.
203
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing Logical Drives
Logical drive management includes:
•
Viewing Logical Drive Information (page 204)
•
Viewing Logical Drive Statistics (page 204)
•
Viewing the Logical Drive Check Table (page 205)
•
Making Logical Drive Settings (page 205)
•
Initializing a Logical Drive (page 205)
•
Running Redundancy Check (page 206)
•
Locating a Logical Drive (page 207)
To create or delete a logical drive, see “Managing Disk Arrays” on page 189.
For LUN mapping, see “Working with LUN Mapping” on page 220.
Viewing Logical Drive Information
To view logical drive information:
1.
2.
From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.
Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter.
The information and settings screen appears.
3.
Highlight any of the following and press Enter to view more information:
•
Check Table – Read Check, Write Check, and Inconsistency Check
Tables
•
Logical Drive Statistics
Viewing Logical Drive Statistics
To view logical drive information:
1.
2.
From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.
Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter.
The information and settings screen appears.
3.
Highlight Logical Drive Statistics and press Enter.
The statistics screen appears.
Clearing Statistics
To clear logical drive statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 239.
204
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Viewing the Logical Drive Check Table
To view logical drive information:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Check Table and press Enter.
4.
Highlight one of the following options and press Enter:
•
Show All Records
•
Read Check Table
•
Write Check Table
•
Inconsistent Check Table
Making Logical Drive Settings
To make Logical Drive settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter.
3.
For the following items, accept the existing setting choose a new one:
•
Highlight Alias and type an alias into the field provided.
Maximum of 32 characters. Use letters, numbers, space between words
and underscore. An alias is optional.
4.
•
Highlight WritePolicy and press the spacebar to toggle between
WriteBack and WriteThru (write though).
•
Highlight ReadPolicy and press the spacebar to toggle though
ReadCache, ReadAhead and None.
•
Highlight Preferred Controller ID and press the spacebar to toggle
between 1 and 2.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Initializing a Logical Drive
This function sets all data bits in the logical drive to zero.
Caution
When you initialize a logical drive, you delete all the data it
contains. Back up all important data before initializing a logical
drive.
To initialize a logical drive:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.
205
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
2.
Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Background Activity and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Start Initialization and press Enter.
The initialization parameters appear.
•
Initialization pattern – The default 00000000 is best for most
applications
•
Quick Initialization – Yes means only the first and last sections of the
logical drives are initialized. No means the entire logical drive is
initialized.
To change a parameter, highlight it and press the backspace key to erase the
current value, then type the new value.
5.
Highlight Start and press Enter.
If necessary, you can pause and resume or stop and restart the Initialization.
You cannot access the logical drive until Initialization has finished.
For initialization rate, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 216.
Running Redundancy Check
Redundancy Check is a maintenance procedure for logical drives in fault-tolerant
disk arrays that ensures all the data matches exactly.
To run Redundancy Check:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Background Activity and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Start Redundancy Check and press Enter.
The redundancy check parameters appear.
•
Auto Fix – Corrects inconsistencies automatically
•
Pause On Error – Pauses the Redundancy Check when an error is
found
To change a parameter, highlight it and press the backspace toggle between
Yes and No.
5.
Highlight Start and press Enter.
If necessary, you can pause and resume or stop and restart the Redundancy
Check. You can use the logical drive while Redundancy Check is running.
For Redundancy Check rate, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on page
216.
206
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Locating a Logical Drive
This feature helps you identify the physical drives assigned to the logical drive
you are working with in the CLU. To locate a logical drive:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Locate Logical Drive and press Enter.
The drive status LEDs for the physical drives in this logical drive will blink for
one minute.
207
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing the Network Connection
Network Management deals with network connections and settings for the
VTrak’s Management ports. Each Management Port can be configured:
•
Making Virtual Management Port Settings (page 208)
•
Making Controller Management Port Settings (page 208)
Making Virtual Management Port Settings
The VTrak subsystem has a virtual management port. When you log into the
VTrak over your network, you use the virtual management port, enabling you to
log into a VTrak with two controllers using one IP address.
Before you change settings, please see “Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address”
on page 40.
Making Automatic Settings
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the Virtual management port and press Enter.
3.
Highlight NetMgmt Ethernet Port Settings and press Enter
4.
Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Making Manual Settings
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight the Virtual management port and press Enter.
3.
Highlight NetMgmt Ethernet Port Settings and press Enter
4.
Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.
5.
Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the
current value, then type the new value.
6.
•
IP Address
•
Subnet Mask
•
Default Gateway IP Address
•
DNS Server IP Address
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Making Controller Management Port Settings
Each RAID controller has an IP addresses for access when the controller goes
into maintenance mode. Maintenance mode is only for remedial action in the
event of a problem with the controller. See “Controller Enters Maintenance Mode”
on page 345 for more information.
208
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Before you change settings, please see “Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address”
on page 40.
Making Automatic Settings
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Making Manual Settings
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Network Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the controller you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled.
5.
Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the
current value, then type the new value.
6.
•
IP Address
•
Subnet Mask
•
Default Gateway IP Address
•
DNS Server IP Address
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
209
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing Fibre Channel Connections
The Fibre Channel Management option appears only with VTrak Fibre Channel
models. Fibre Channel Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing Node Information (page 210)
•
Viewing Fibre Channel Logged-in Devices (page 210)
•
Making Fibre Channel Port Settings (page 210)
•
Viewing SFP Information (page 211)
•
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics (page 212)
•
Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators (page 213)
•
Adding a Fibre Channel Initiator (page 213)
Viewing Node Information
These functions affect both VTrak Fibre Channel ports.
1.
2.
From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.
Highlight Fibre Channel Node and press Enter.
Node information appears. There are no user settings on this screen.
Viewing Fibre Channel Logged-in Devices
To view a list of logged-in devices:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the port you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Logged In Devices and press Enter.
If a Fibre Channel switch is attached, it will also appear in this list.
Making Fibre Channel Port Settings
To make Fibre Channel port settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the port you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Fibre Channel Port Settings and press Enter.
5.
Highlight the following parameters and press the spacebar to toggle though
the choices:
•
Configured Link Speed – 1 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 4 Gb/s, or Automatic
selection
210
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
•
6.
Configured Topology – NL-Port (Arbitrated Loop), N-Port (Point to
Point) or Automatic selection
Highlight Hard ALPA and press the backspace key to erase the current
value, then type the new value.
The range is 0 to 255. 255 disables this feature.
7.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
The table below shows the type of attached topology you will achieve based on
your connection type and the configured topology you choose:
Fibre Channel Attached Topology
Configured Topology
Connection Type
N-Port
NL-Port
Switch
Fabric Direct
Public Loop
Direct
Point to Point
Private Loop
Example 1: If you connect the VTrak to a Fibre Channel switch and choose
NL-Port topology, you will create a Public Loop attached topology.
Example 2: If you have a Point to Point attached topology, you made a direct
connection (no switch) and chose N-port topology.
Note
In some cases, HBA settings to N-Port only work if connected to
the switch. Refer to your HBA manual for more information.
Viewing SFP Information
To view information about the SFPs (small form-factor pluggable transceivers):
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the port you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Fibre Channel Port SFP and press Enter.
The screen displays information about the SFP transceiver. There are no
user settings on this screen.
211
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics
To view port statistics:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the port you want and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Fibre Channel Port Statistics and press Enter.
This screen displays statistics for this port. There are no user settings on this
screen.
Clearing Statistics
To clear Fibre Channel statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 239.
Property Definitions
Definitions of the properties for which statistical information is reported appears in
the list below.
•
TimeLastReset – Time in minutes since the system has been running.
•
FramesSent – Number of frames sent since last reset.
•
FramesReceived – Number of frames received since last reset.
•
WordsSent – Number of words sent since last reset.
•
WordsReceived – Number of words received since last reset.
•
LIPCount – Loop Initialization Primitive Sequence. This primitive sequence
applies only to the arbitrated loop topology. It is transmitted by an L_Port to
initialize or re-initialize the loop.
•
NOSCount – Not Operational Primitive Sequence. This primitive sequence
is used during link initialization between two N_Ports in the point-to-point
topology or an N_Port and an F_Port in the fabric topology.
NOS is sent to indicate that the transmitting port has detected a link failure or
is offline. The expected response to a port sending NOS is the OLS primitive
sequence.
•
ErrorFrames – FC devices propagate handshake signals back-and-forth
requesting and acknowledging each byte transferred. FC transfers occur in
one frame of data at a time. In this case, the value reflects the number of
frames with errors.
•
DumpedFrames – This field specifies the number of frames dumped due to
a lack of host buffers.
•
LinkFailureCount – Number of times the link has failed. Can be caused by
a disconnected link or a bad fiber element.
•
LossSyncCount – Number of times a loss of sync has occurred since last
reset.
212
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
•
PrimitiveSeqErrorCount – An ordered set transmitted repeatedly and used
to establish and maintain a link.
LR, LRR, NOS, and OLS are primitive sequences used to establish an active
link in a connection between two N_Ports or an N_Port and an F_Port.
LIP, LPB, and LPE are primitive sequences used in the Arbitrated Loop
topology for initializing the loop and enabling or disabling an L_Port.
•
InvalidWordSentCount – Number of invalid words sent since last reset.
•
InvalidCRCCount – Invalid Cyclical Redundancy Count. Number of frames
received with an invalid CRC since last reset.
•
InitiatorIOCount – I/O Count on the initiator on the host side.
Clearing Statistics
To clear statistics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 239.
Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators
LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize a Fibre Channel.
See “Enabling LUN Mapping” on page 220.
To view Fibre Channel initiators:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Fibre Channel Initiators and press Enter.
A list of all currently logged-in initiators appears on the screen.
Adding a Fibre Channel Initiator
LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to add a Fibre Channel. See
“Enabling LUN Mapping” on page 220.
You must add an initiator to the VTrak’s initiator list in order to use the initiator to
create a LUN for your logical drive.
To add an initiator:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Fibre Channel Initiators and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the initiator you want to add and press the spacebar to choose it.
4.
Highlight Add Marked Initiators and press Enter.
The initiator is added to VTrak’s initiator list.
213
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing SAS Connections
The SAS Management option appears only with VTrak Serial Attached SCSI
models. SAS Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing SAS Port Information (page 214)
•
Making SAS Port Settings (page 214)
•
Viewing SAS Port Statistics (page 215)
•
Viewing SAS Initiators (page 215)
•
Adding a SAS Initiator (page 215)
Viewing SAS Port Information
There are two SAS ports on each controller.
To view information about the SAS ports:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight SAS Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight SAS Ports and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the port you want to see and press Enter.
The port information appears on the screen.
Making SAS Port Settings
There are two SAS ports on each controller.
To make settings to the SAS ports:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight SAS Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight SAS Ports and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the port you want to see and press Enter.
4.
Highlight SAS Port Settings and press Enter.
5.
Highlight Cable Signal Strength, press the backspace key to erase the
current value, then type in the new value.
The range is 1 to 8. 1 is the default. Signal strength correlates to cable length
in meters. Example: If you have a 2 m SAS cable, set signal strength to 2. If
performance is unsatisfactory (see “Viewing SAS Port Statistics” on page
215), try settings of 1 and 3, then use the best setting for your system.
6.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
214
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Viewing SAS Port Statistics
There are two SAS ports on each controller.
To view information about the SAS ports:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight SAS Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight SAS Ports and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the port you want to see and press Enter.
4.
Highlight SAS Port Statistics and press Enter.
The statistics for the selected port appear on the screen.
Clearing Statistics
To clear SAS port statics, see “Clearing Statistics” on page 239.
Viewing SAS Initiators
LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize a SAS initiator.
See “Enabling LUN Mapping” on page 220.
There are two SAS ports on each controller, for a total of four SAS ports.
To a view a list of logged-in initiators:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight SAS Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight SAS Initiators and press Enter.
A list of all currently logged-in initiators appears on the screen.
Adding a SAS Initiator
LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to add a SAS initiator. See
“Enabling LUN Mapping” on page 220.
You must add an initiator to the VTrak’s initiator list in order to use the initiator to
create a LUN for your logical drive.
To add an initiator:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight SAS Management and press Enter.
2.
Highlight SAS Initiators and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the initiator you want to add and press the spacebar to choose it.
4.
Highlight Add Marked Initiators and press Enter.
The initiator is added to VTrak’s initiator list.
215
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing Background Activity
Background activity refers to any of several functions that take place in the
background while normal operation of the VTrak continues.
Background activities work in conjunction with disk arrays and logical drives. See
“Managing Disk Arrays” on page 189 and “Managing Logical Drives” on page 204
for more information about how and when to use background activities.
Background Activity Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing Current Background Activities (page 216)
•
Making Background Activity Settings (page 216)
Viewing Current Background Activities
From the Main Menu, highlight Background Activity and press Enter. A count of
current background activities appears, including:
•
Rebuild
•
PDM (Predictive Data Migration)
•
Synchronization
•
Redundancy Check
•
Migration
•
Transition
•
Initialization
•
Media Patrol
Making Background Activity Settings
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Background Activity and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Background Activity Settings and press Enter.
3.
Highlight following and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and
Disabled.
4.
•
Media Patrol – Checks the magnetic media on physical drives
•
Auto Rebuild – When enabled and no spare drive is available, the disk
array will begin to rebuild as soon as you replace the failed physical
drive with an unconfigured physical drive of equal or greater size
Highlight following and press the spacebar to toggle through Low, Medium,
and High rates:
•
Rebuild – Rebuilds data to a replacement physical drive in a disk array
•
Migration – Change RAID level or add physical drives to disk arrays
216
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
•
PDM – Migrates data from a suspect physical drive to a replacement
drive in a disk array
•
Transition – Returns a revertible spare drive to spare status
•
Synchronization – Checks the data integrity on disk arrays
•
Initialization – Full initialization sets all data bits in the logical drive to a
specified pattern, such as all zeros
•
Redundancy Check – Checks, reports and can correct data
inconsistencies in logical drives
The rates are defined as follows:
5.
6.
•
Low – Fewer resources to activity, more to data read/write.
•
Medium – Balance of resources to activity and data read/write.
•
High – More resources to activity, fewer to data read/write.
Highlight the following PDM trigger settings and press the backspace key to
erase the current value:
•
Reassigned Block Threshold – 1 to 512 blocks
•
Error Block Threshold – 1 to 1024 blocks
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
217
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Working with the Event Viewer
The Event Viewer displays log of subsystem events. Events are classified as:
•
Runtime Events – A list of and information about the 1023 most recent
runtime events recorded since the subsystem was started
•
NVRAM Events – A list of and information about the most important events
over multiple subsystem startups. NVRAM events are stored in non-volatile
memory
Working with the Event Viewer includes the following functions:
•
Viewing Runtime Events (page 218)
•
Clearing Runtime Events (page 218)
•
Viewing NVRAM Events (page 218)
•
Clearing NVRAM Events (page 219)
Viewing Runtime Events
To display Runtime Events:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Event Viewer and press Enter.
The log of Runtime Events appears. Events are added to the top of the list.
Each item includes:
2.
•
Sequence number – Begins with 0 at system startup.
•
Device – Disk Array, Logical Drive, Physical Drive by its ID number.
•
Severity – See Table 1 on page 219
•
Timestamp – Date and time the event happened.
•
Description – A description of the event in plain language.
Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log.
Clearing Runtime Events
To clear the Runtime Event log:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Event Viewer and press Enter.
2.
Highlight Clear Runtime Event Log and press Enter.
3.
Press Y to confirm.
Viewing NVRAM Events
This screen displays a list of and information about the most important events
over multiple subsystem startups.
To display NVRAM events:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Event Viewer and press Enter.
218
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
2.
Highlight NVRAM Events and press Enter.
The log of NVRAM Events appears. Events are added to the top of the list.
Each item includes:
3.
•
Sequence number – Begins with 0 at system startup.
•
Device – Disk Array, Logical Drive, Physical Drive by its ID number.
•
Severity – See Table 1
•
Timestamp – Date and time the event happened.
•
Description – A description of the event in plain language.
Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log.
Clearing NVRAM Events
To clear the Runtime Event log:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Event Viewer and press Enter.
2.
Highlight NVRAM Events and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Clear NVRAM Event Log and press Enter.
4.
Press Y to confirm.
Table 1 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
219
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Working with LUN Mapping
LUN Mapping includes the following functions:
•
Viewing a List of Initiators (page 220)
•
Enabling LUN Mapping (page 220)
•
Adding an Initiator (page 220)
•
Mapping a LUN to an Initiator (page 221)
•
Deleting an Initiator (page 221)
Viewing a List of Initiators
LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize an initiator.
To view a list of initiators:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter.
A list of the current initiators appears.
Enabling LUN Mapping
LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize an initiator.
To enable LUN mapping:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter.
3.
Press Y to confirm.
A list of the current Fibre Channel or SAS initiators appears.
Adding an Initiator
You must add an initiator to the VTrak’s initiator list in order to use the initiator to
create a LUN. You can also add initiators from a list under Fibre Channel
Management, see page 213, or SAS Management, see page 215.
To add a new initiator:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Create New Initiator and press Enter.
4.
Type the name of the initiator.
220
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
•
Fibre Channel – A Fibre Channel initiator name is the World Wide Port
Name of the device and is composed of a series of eight, two-digit
hexadecimal numbers.
•
SAS – A SAS initiator name is the SAS address of the HBA card in the
Host PC. Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host
system.
Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host system.
Note that the initiator name you input must match exactly in order for the
connection to work.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save the initiator.
Mapping a LUN to an Initiator
You must add an initiator to the VTrak’s initiator list in order to map the initiator to
a LUN. See “Enabling LUN Mapping” and “Adding an Initiator” on page 220.
To map a LUN to an initiator:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter.
3.
Highlight an existing Initiator and press Enter.
A list of logical drives displays.
4.
In the LUN field, press the backspace key to erase the current value, then
type the LUN you want to assign to this initiator, from 0 to 255.
If you make a error, press Ctrl-R to restore the current LUN.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save the LUN map.
Deleting an Initiator
To delete an initiator:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the initiator you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.
4.
Highlight Delete Marked Initiators and press Enter.
5.
Press Y to confirm the deletion.
221
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Managing UPS Units
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Management includes the following
functions:
•
Viewing a List of UPS Units (below)
•
Making UPS Settings (page 223)
•
Viewing UPS Information (page 224)
Viewing a List of UPS Units
To view a list of UPS units supporting the VTrak:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight UPS Management and press Enter.
Information in the UPS List includes:
•
Operational Status – OK means Normal.
On AC means the UPS is connected to a viable external AC power
source.
On Battery means the external AC power source is offline and the UPS
is running on battery power.
•
Capacity – Backup capacity expressed as a percentage.
•
Remaining Minutes – Number of minutes the UPS is expected to
power your system in the event of a power failure.
•
Loading – Actual output of UPS as a percentage of the rated output.
See the Note below.
Note
The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models
of UPS units. The general range is 60% to 80%. If the reported
Loading Ratio exceeds the recommended value for your UPS unit:
•
Have fewer subsystems or peripherals connected to this UPS
unit.
•
Add more UPS units, or use a higher-capacity UPS unit, to
protect your RAID systems.
222
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Making UPS Settings
These settings control how the VTrak subsystem detects the UPS unit and
responds to data reported by the UPS unit.
To make UPS settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight UPS Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight UPS Settings and press Enter.
4.
Perform the following actions as required:
•
•
•
•
5.
Verify the Current UPS Communication method. See Note 1:
•
SNMP – Network connection.
•
Serial – Serial connection.
•
Unknown – No connection.
Choose a Detection Setting from the dropdown menu:
•
Automatic – Default. If a UPS is detected when the subsystem
boots, the setting changes to Enable.
•
Enable – Monitors UPS. Settings changes, reports warnings, and
logs events.
•
Disable – Monitors UPS only.
Type values into the Threshold fields. See Note 2:
•
Running Time Remaining Threshold – Actual time below this
value resets adaptive writeback cache to writethrough.
•
Warning Temperature Threshold – Actual temperature above this
value triggers a warning and logs an event.
•
Loading Ratio Threshold – Actual loading ratio (percentage)
above this threshold triggers a warning and logs an event. See
Note 3.
•
Battery Charge Remaining Threshold – Reserve capacity below
this percentage triggers a warning and logs an event.
For UPS units with network cards, type the IP addresses or DNS names
in fields UPS 1 and UPS 2. See Note 4.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Note 1: VTrak supports multiple UPS units using network or serial
connections, but not a combination of both methods.
Note 2: Detection Setting must be set to Auto. If a UPS is detected, the
setting changes to Enable.
223
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Note 3: The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models of
UPS units. The general range is 60% to 80%.
Note 4: To specify UPS units by DNS names, ask your IT administrator to
add the DNS names to the DNS server, before you make UPS settings.
Viewing UPS Information
To view information about a specific UPS unit:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight UPS Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the UPS unit you want and press Enter.
UPS information includes:
•
UPS ID
•
Model Name
•
Serial Number
•
Firmware Version
•
Manufacture Date
•
Voltage Rating – Output voltage of the UPS.
•
Battery Capacity – Backup capacity expressed as a percentage.
•
Remaining Backup Time – Number of minutes the UPS is expected to
power your system in the event of a power failure.
•
Loading Ratio – Actual output of UPS as a percentage of the rated
output. See the Note below.
•
Temperature – Reported temperature of the UPS unit.
Note
The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models
of UPS units. The general range is 60% to 80%. If the reported
Loading Ratio exceeds the recommended value for your UPS unit:
•
Have fewer subsystems or peripherals connected to this UPS
unit.
•
Add more UPS units, or use a higher-capacity UPS unit, to
protect your RAID systems.
224
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Managing Users
User Management includes the following functions:
•
Viewing User Information (page 225)
•
Creating a User (page 225)
•
Changing Another User’s Settings (page 226)
•
Changing Your Own User Settings (page 227)
•
Changing Another User’s Password (page 227)
•
Changing Your Own Password (page 227)
•
Deleting a User (page 228)
Viewing User Information
Each user types their user name and password to log into the CLI.
To view a list of current user accounts:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight User Management and press Enter.
A list of the current users appears.
Creating a User
To create a new user account:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight User Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Create New User and press Enter.
4.
5.
Highlight each field and type in the appropriate information:
•
User name (Maximum 31 characters. Use letters, numbers, and
underscore. No spaces.)
•
Password (Optional. Maximum 31 characters. Use letters, numbers,
and underscore.)
•
Display name (Optional)
•
User’s email address
Highlight Privilege and press the space bar to toggle though the options.
See Table 2 on page 226.
6.
Press Ctrl-A to save the user.
225
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Table 2 User Privileges
Level
Meaning
View
Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make
any changes
Maintenance
Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including
Rebuilding, PDM, Media Patrol, and Redundancy Check
Power
Allows the user to create (but not delete) disk arrays and logical
drives, change RAID levels, change stripe size; change settings
of components such as disk arrays, logical drives, physical
drives, and the controller
Super
Allows the user full access to all functions including create and
delete users and changing the settings of other users, and
delete disk arrays and logical drives.
The default “administrator” account is a Super User
Changing Another User’s Settings
The Administrator or a Super User can change other users’ settings.
To change user settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight User Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the User whose settings you want to change and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Privilege and press the space bar to toggle though the options.
See Table 2.
5.
Highlight Status and press the space bar to toggle between Enabled and
Disabled.
6.
Highlight the items you want and press the backspace key to erase the
current value, then type the new value:
7.
•
User name
•
Email address
Press Ctrl-A to save the settings.
Important
If a user is logged-in when his account is disabled, the user is
immediately logged-out.
226
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Changing Your Own User Settings
Each user can change their display name and email address.
To change your user settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight User Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight your name and press Enter.
4.
Highlight the items you want and press the backspace key to erase the
current value, then type the new value:
5.
•
User name
•
Email address
Press Ctrl-A to save the settings.
Changing Another User’s Password
The Administrator or a Super User can change other users’ passwords.
To change a password:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight User Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the User whose password you want to change and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Change Password... and press Enter.
5.
Highlight New Password and type a new password.
Maximum 31 characters. Use letters, numbers, and underscore.
6.
Highlight Retype Password and type the new password again to verify.
7.
Press Ctrl-A to save the new password.
Changing Your Own Password
Each user can change their own password.
To change your password:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight User Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight your name and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Change Password... and press Enter.
5.
Highlight Old Password and type your current password.
227
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
6.
Highlight New Password and type a new password.
Maximum 31 characters. Use letters, numbers, and underscore.
7.
Highlight Retype Password and type the new password again to verify.
8.
Press Ctrl-A to save the new password.
Deleting a User
The Administrator or a Super User can delete other users. You cannot delete the
account you used to log in. There must always be one Super User account.
Rather than deleting a user, consider disabling a user account. See “Changing
Another User’s Settings” on page 226.
To delete a user:
1.
Log in under a user name other than the one you want to delete.
2.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
3.
Highlight User Management and press Enter.
4.
Highlight the user you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.
5.
Highlight Delete Marked Users and press Enter.
6.
Press Y to confirm the deletion.
228
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Working with Software Management
Software Management includes the following functions:
•
Making Email Settings (page 229)
•
Making SLP Settings (page 230)
•
Making Webserver Settings (page 230)
•
Making Telnet Settings (page 231)
•
Making SSH Settings (page 231)
•
Making SNMP Settings (page 232)
•
Managing SNMP Trap Sinks (page 232)
•
Making CIM Settings (page 233)
•
Making Netsend Settings (page 235)
•
Managing Netsend Recipients (page 235)
Making Email Settings
By default, Email service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started.
To make Email service settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Email and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic
and Manual.
5.
Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current
value, then type the new value:
6.
•
SMTP server IP address or server name
•
Server Port number (25 is the default)
Highlight Authentication and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and
No.
If you selected Yes, type in a User name and Password in the fields
provided.
7.
8.
The following items are optional but recommended. Highlight and press the
backspace key to erase the current value, then type the new value:
•
Sender’s email address
•
Subject Line for the email message
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
229
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
To start, stop or restart the Email service, highlight Start, Stop or Restart and
press Enter.
Making SLP Settings
By default, SLP service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started.
To make SLP service settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight SLP and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic
and Manual.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
To start, stop or restart the SLP service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and press
Enter.
Making Webserver Settings
By default, Webserver service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started.
To make Webserver service settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Webserver and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic
and Manual.
5.
Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current
value, then type the new value:
•
HTTP Port (80 is the default)
•
Session Time Out (24 minutes is the default. 1440 minutes = 24 hours)
6.
Highlight SSL and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and
Disabled.
7.
Highlight HTTPS Port and press the backspace key to erase the current
value, then type the new value. 443 is the default.
8.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
To start, stop or restart the Webserver service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart
and press Enter.
230
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Making Telnet Settings
By default, Telnet service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started.
To make Telnet service settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Telnet and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic
and Manual.
5.
Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current
value, then type the new value:
6.
•
Port number (2300 is the default)
•
Session Time Out (24 minutes is the default. 1440 minutes = 24 hours)
•
Maximum number of connections (4 is the default)
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
To start, stop or restart the Telnet service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and
press Enter.
Making SSH Settings
By default, Secure Shell (SSH) service is set to Automatic and its normal status is
Started.
To make SSH settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight SSH and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic
and Manual.
5.
Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current
value, then type the new value:
6.
•
Port number (22 is the default)
•
Session Time Out (24 minutes is the default. 1440 minutes = 24 hours)
•
Maximum number of connections (4 is the default)
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
231
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Making SNMP Settings
By default, Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) service is set to
Automatic and its normal status is Started.
To make SNMP service settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight SNMP and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic
and Manual.
5.
Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current
value, then type the new value:
•
6.
Port Number – 161 is the default
•
System Name – (optional) Type a system name in this field
•
System Location – Type a country name in this field
•
System Contact – Type the email address of your system administrator
in this field
•
Read Community – Type a community name in this field
•
Write Community – private (no change possible)
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
To start, stop or restart the SNMP service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and
press Enter.
Managing SNMP Trap Sinks
Viewing a List of Trap Sinks
To create a trap sink:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight SNMP and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Trap Sinks and press Enter.
A list of the current trap sinks appears.
Adding a Trap Sink
To add a trap sink:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
232
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight SNMP and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Trap Sinks and press Enter.
5.
Highlight Create New Trap Sink and press Enter
6.
Highlight Trap Sink IP address and press the backspace key to erase the
current value, then type the new IP address in this field.
7.
Highlight Trap Filter and press the spacebar to toggle through the severity
levels.
See Table 3 on page 233.
8.
Press Ctrl-A to save the Trap Sink.
Deleting a Trap Sink
To delete a trap sink:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight SNMP and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Trap Sinks and press Enter.
5.
Highlight the trap sink you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing.
6.
Highlight Delete Marked Entries and press Enter.
Table 3 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
Making CIM Settings
By default, Common Information Model (CIM) service is set to Automatic and its
normal status is Started.
233
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
To make CIM service settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight CIM and press Enter.
4.
Enter information or change settings as required.
•
Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between
Automatic and Manual.
•
To use a HTTP connection, highlight HTTP and press the spacebar to
toggle to Enabled and accept the 5988 is the default port number or
highlight HTTP Port, press the backspace key to erase, type new value.
•
To use a HTTPS connection, highlight HTTPS and press the spacebar
to toggle to Enabled accept the 5989 is the default port number or
highlight HTTPS Port, press the backspace key to erase, type new
value.
•
To use CIM authentication, highlight Authentication and press the
spacebar to toggle to Enabled.
Enter the old password and a new password into the fields provided.
The default password is password.
There is only one user. The default name is cim. No changes are possible.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
6.
Press Y to confirm.
To start, stop or restart the CIM service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and press
Enter.
234
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Making Netsend Settings
By default, Netsend service is set to Manual and its normal status is Stopped.
To make Netsend service settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Netsend and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic
and Manual.
5.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
To start, stop or restart the Netsend service, highlight Start, Stop, or Restart and
press Enter.
Managing Netsend Recipients
VTrak’s Netsend service sends VTrak subsystem events in the form of text
messages to your Host PC and other networked PCs. See “Making Netsend
Settings” on page 235.
Netsend Requirements
In order to use Netsend:
•
NetSend must be running the VTrak
•
You must provide the IP address for each recipient PC
•
The Messenger service must be running on each recipient PC
If your Netsend and Messenger service settings are correct but the recipient PC
does not receive event messages, check the recipient PC’s Firewall settings.
Refer to your OS documentation for more information.
Adding Netsend recipients
To add a Netsend recipient:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Netsend and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Message Recipients and press Enter.
5.
Highlight Create New Message Recipient and press Enter.
6.
Type the recipient’s IP address into the field provided.
7.
Highlight Message Event Severity Filter and press the spacebar to change
severity levels.
235
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
The selected level and all higher severity levels of severity will be reported.
See Table 4 on page 236.
8.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
Table 4 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
Deleting Netsend Recipients
To delete a Netsend recipient:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Software Management and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Netsend and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Message Recipients and press Enter.
5.
Highlight the recipient you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it.
The mark is an asterisk (*) to the left of the listing
6.
Highlight Delete Marked Entries and press Enter.
236
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Flashing through TFTP
Use this function to flash the VTrak’s firmware. See “Updating the Firmware in
the CLU” on page 254 for this procedure.
237
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Viewing Flash Image Information
Flash image information refers to the package of firmware components running
on your VTrak controller or controllers.
To view flash image information:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Flash Image Version Info and press Enter.
The flash image information displays on the screen:
•
Enclosure Number – 1 (one) is the Head Unit. Other numbers are
cascaded or expanded subsystems
•
Running Image Info – Firmware currently running on the controllers
•
Flashed Image Info – Firmware flashed to memory
•
Image Type – A specific component
•
Controller ID – 1 or 2
•
Version number
•
Build date
•
Flash (installation) date
If the Running and Flashed Images do not match, the VTrak has not
restarted since the firmware was last updated. Restart the VTrak to run the
Flashed firmware package. See “Restarting the Subsystem” on page 245.
Note that all of these components are upgraded together in a package. See
“Updating the Firmware in the CLU” on page 254.
238
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Clearing Statistics
This function clears the statistical counts for the RAID controller, Fibre Channel
ports, SAS ports, physical drives, and logical drives. To clear statistics:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Clear Statistics and press Enter.
3.
Press Y to confirm the deletion.
239
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Restoring Factory Defaults
This function restores the factory default settings to the firmware and software
items you select.
Caution
Restoring default settings can disrupt your VTrak functions. Use
this feature only when necessary.
If you restore Management Network settings, you will lose your
network connection to the VTrak.
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Restore Factory Defaults and press Enter.
3.
Highlight the setting groups you want to restore and press the spacebar to
toggle between Yes and No.
Yes means this setting is restored to the default value.
No means the current setting remains untouched.
4.
Highlight Restore Factory Defaults and press Enter.
5.
Press Y to confirm the reset.
240
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Shutting Down the Subsystem
There are two methods for shutting down the subsystem. Choose one of the
following procedures:
•
Shutting down the VTrak – Telnet Connection (page 241)
•
Shutting down the VTrak – SSH Connection (page 241)
•
Shutting down the VTrak – Serial Connection (page 242)
Shutting down the VTrak – Telnet Connection
This function shuts down the VTrak subsystem on a Telnet connection. Additional
action is required, as described below.
Important
If you have a JBOD Expansion, always power off the RAID
subsystem first. Then power off the JBOD subsystems.
To shutdown the RAID subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Shutdown.
4.
Highlight Submit and press Enter.
A warning message appears.
5.
Press Y to continue.
The screen goes blank.
6.
Wait for no less than two minutes.
7.
Manually turn off the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.
Shutting down the VTrak – SSH Connection
This function shuts down the VTrak subsystem on a SSH connection. Additional
action is required, as described below.
Important
If you have a JBOD Expansion, always power off the RAID
subsystem first. Then power off the JBOD subsystems.
241
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
To shutdown the RAID subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Shutdown.
4.
Highlight Submit and press Enter.
A warning message appears.
5.
Press Y to continue.
6.
Close your SSH session.
7.
Wait for no less than two minutes.
8.
Manually turn off the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.
Shutting down the VTrak – Serial Connection
This function shuts down the VTrak subsystem on a serial connection. Additional
action is required, as described below.
Important
If you have a JBOD Expansion, always power off the RAID
subsystem first. Then power off the JBOD subsystems.
To shutdown the RAID subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
4.
Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Shutdown.
5.
Highlight Submit and press Enter.
A warning message appears.
6.
Press Y to continue.
7.
Turn off the power supply switches when you see the following message:
Shutdown complete. It is now safe to power off the subsystem.
242
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Starting Up After Shutdown
There are two methods for shutting down the subsystem. Choose one of the
following procedures:
•
Starting up the VTrak – Telnet Connection (page 243)
•
Starting up the VTrak – SSH Connection (page 243)
•
Starting up the VTrak – Serial Connection (page 244)
Starting up the VTrak – Telnet Connection
Important
If you have a JBOD Expansion, always power on the JBOD
subsystems first. Then power on the RAID subsystem.
To start the RAID subsystem:
1.
Manually turn on the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.
2.
Wait about two minutes.
3.
Establish a Telnet connection to the VTrak.
See “Making a Telnet Connection” on page 167.
If you cannot log in, wait 30 seconds and try again.
4.
Type menu and press Enter to open the CLU.
Starting up the VTrak – SSH Connection
Important
If you have a JBOD Expansion, always power on the JBOD
subsystems first. Then power on the RAID subsystem.
To start the RAID subsystem:
1.
Manually turn on the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.
2.
Wait about two minutes.
3.
Establish a SSH connection to the VTrak.
See “Making a SSH Connection” on page 167.
If you cannot log in, wait 30 seconds and try again.
4.
Type menu and press Enter to open the CLU.
243
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Starting up the VTrak – Serial Connection
Important
If you have a JBOD Expansion, always power on the JBOD
subsystems first. Then power on the RAID subsystem.
To start the RAID subsystem:
1.
Manually turn on the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem.
2.
Wait about two minutes.
3.
Establish a serial connection to the VTrak.
See “Making a Serial Connection” on page 166.
When the Login: prompt appears, the start up is finished.
4.
Type menu and press Enter to open the CLU.
244
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Restarting the Subsystem
There are two methods for restarting the subsystem. Choose one of the following
procedures:
•
Restarting the Subsystem (page 245)
•
Restarting VTrak – SSH Connection (page 245)
•
Restarting VTrak – Serial Connection (page 246)
Note
If you have a JBOD Expansion, you are not required to restart the
JBOD subsystems when you restart the RAID subsystem.
Restarting VTrak – Telnet Connection
To restart the RAID subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Restart.
4.
Highlight Submit and press Enter.
A warning message appears.
5.
Press Y to continue.
The screen goes blank.
6.
7.
Wait about two minutes.
Re-establish your Telnet connection to the VTrak CLU.
See “Making a Telnet Connection” on page 167.
If you cannot re-establish a connection, wait 30 seconds and try again.
Restarting VTrak – SSH Connection
To restart the RAID subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Restart.
4.
Highlight Submit and press Enter.
A warning message appears.
5.
Press Y to continue.
245
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
6.
Close your SSH session.
7.
Wait about two minutes.
8.
Re-establish your SSH connection to the VTrak CLU.
See “Making a SSH Connection” on page 167.
If you cannot re-establish a connection, wait 30 seconds and try again.
Restarting VTrak – Serial Connection
To restart the RAID subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Restart.
4.
Highlight Submit and press Enter.
A warning message appears.
5.
Press Y to continue.
The screen displays shutdown and startup functions.
6.
When the Login: prompt appears, log into the CLU again.
246
Chapter 5: Management with the CLU
Making Buzzer Settings
The buzzer sounds to inform you that the VTrak needs attention. See “VTrak is
Beeping” on page 307 for more information.
To change buzzer settings:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Buzzer and press Enter.
A list of Controllers appears with the current buzzer setting and status.
2.
Highlight the Controller whose buzzer you want to set and press Enter.
3.
Highlight Enabled and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No.
4.
Press Ctrl-A to save your settings.
247
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
248
Chapter 6: Maintenance
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Updating the Firmware in WebPAM PROe (below)
•
Updating the Firmware in the CLU (page 254)
•
Replacing a Power Supply (page 259)
•
Replacing a Cooling Unit Fan or Blower (page 260)
•
Replacing a Cache Battery (page 265)
•
Replacing a RAID Controller – Dual Controllers (page 269)
•
Replacing a RAID Controller – Single Controller (page 270)
Updating the Firmware in WebPAM PROe
A firmware update consists of the following actions:
•
Downloading the Firmware Image File (page 249)
•
Updating the Firmware from one of these sources:
•
TFTP Server (page 250)
•
Your PC (page 251)
•
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem (page 252)
•
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion (page 252)
Downloading the Firmware Image File
Go to the Promise website at http://www.promise.com/support and download the
latest firmware image (.img) file to your TFTP server or your PC. The firmware
update image file includes all of the files for the VTrak, including:
•
Redboot ROM
•
Ramdisk
•
Kernel
•
SEP Firmware
•
Firmware
•
OEM Customization
•
Software
•
Other files
The firmware update image file is designed to update the firmware on:
•
A single RAID subsystem
•
A single RAID subsystem with connected JBOD subsystems
The firmware update image file cannot update multiple RAID subsystems. You
must update RAID subsystems one at a time.
249
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Updating Firmware from TFTP Server
Important
If you have a JBOD expansion systems, the firmware is updated
on the Head Unit or the RAID subsystem.
Be sure all subsystems are connected and running before
beginning the update.
To update the firmware from a TFTP server:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Software Management
icon.
4.
Click the Firmware Update tab.
5.
Do one of the following actions:
icon.
•
Click the Download from TFTP Server option, then click the Next
button.
•
From the Firmware Update tab dropdown menu, choose Download from
TFTP Server.
6.
Enter the hostname or IP address of your TFTP server in the field provided.
7.
Enter the port number of your TFTP server in the field provided (69 is the
default).
8.
Enter the filename of the Firmware Update file in the field provided.
9.
Click the Submit button.
10. When the download is completed, click the Next button.
A popup message appears warning you not to reboot the VTrak during the
firmware update procedure.
11. In the popup message, click the OK button.
The update progress displays. Then a popup message appears to tell you to
reboot the VTrak.
12. In the popup message, click the OK button.
13. Restart the VTrak. See page 252.
Note
After you click the Submit button, if WebPAM PROe displays this
message: error transferring image, you entered an incorrect file
name or an incorrect location. Check the information and try
again.
250
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Updating Firmware from your PC
Important
If you have a JBOD expansion systems, the firmware is updated
on the Head Unit or the RAID subsystem.
Be sure all subsystems are connected and running before
beginning the update.
To update the firmware from your PC:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Software Management
icon.
4.
Click the Firmware Update tab.
5.
Do one of the following actions:
6.
icon.
•
Click the Download Flash File from Local File through HTTP option,
then click the Next button.
•
From the Firmware Update tab dropdown menu, choose Download from
Local File.
Enter the filename of the Firmware Update file in the field provided.
Or, click the Browse... button and choose the Firmware Update file in the
Open dialog box.
7.
Click the Submit button.
8.
When the download is completed, click the Next button.
A popup message appears to warn you not to reboot the VTrak during the
firmware update procedure.
9.
In the popup message, click the OK button.
The update progress displays. A popup message appears to tell you to
reboot the VTrak.
10. In the popup message, click the OK button.
11. Restart the VTrak. See page 252.
Note
After you click the Submit button, if WebPAM PROe displays this
message: error transferring image, you entered an incorrect file
name or an incorrect location. Check the information and try
again.
251
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem
Warning
Do not restart the VTrak during a firmware upgrade procedure.
Wait until the upgrade is one and you are prompted to restart.
To restart a single subsystem:
1.
Click the Subsystem
icon in Tree View.
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
Click the Shutdown link in Management View.
icon.
A Shutdown or Restart tab will appear.
4.
On the Shutdown or Restart tab, choose Restart from the dropdown menu.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
When the controller shuts down, your WebPAM PROe connection is lost.
7.
Wait about two minutes.
8.
In your browser, click Logout in the Header, then log into WebPAM PROe
once again.
If you cannot log in, wait 30 seconds and try again.
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion
Warning
Do not restart the VTraks during a firmware upgrade procedure.
Wait until the upgrade is one and you are prompted to restart.
To restart the multiple subsystems:
1.
Click the Subsystem
2.
Click the Administrative Tools
3.
icon in Tree View.
icon.
Click the Shutdown link in Management View.
A Shutdown or Restart tab will appear.
4.
On the Shutdown or Restart tab, choose Shutdown from the dropdown
menu.
5.
Click the Submit button.
6.
In the confirmation box, type the word confirm in the field provided and click
the OK button.
252
Chapter 6: Maintenance
7.
If you have other VTrak RAID Subsystems, repeat the same procedure for
each of them.
As each controller shuts down, your WebPAM PROe connection is lost.
8.
Wait for two to three minutes.
9.
Turn off the power switches for all subsystems.
10. Wait 30 seconds, then turn on the power switches on all JBOD
subsystems.
11. Wait 30 more seconds, then turn on the power switches on the RAID
subsystem.
12. Wait 2 to 3 minutes for the Head Unit to boot, then log into WebPAM PROe.
If you cannot log in, wait for 30 seconds and try again.
253
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Updating the Firmware in the CLU
A firmware update consists of the following actions:
•
Downloading the Firmware Image File (page 254)
•
Updating the Firmware (page 254)
•
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, Telnet (page 255)
•
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, Telnet (page 255)
•
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, SSH (page 256)
•
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, SSH (page 257)
•
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, Serial (page 257)
•
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, Serial (page 258)
Downloading the Firmware Image File
Go to the Promise website at http://www.promise.com/support and download the
latest firmware image file to your TFTP server. The firmware update image file
includes all of the files for the VTrak, including:
•
Redboot ROM
•
Ramdisk
•
Kernel
•
SEP Firmware
•
Firmware
•
OEM Customization
•
Software
•
Other files
The firmware update image file is designed to update the firmware on:
•
A single RAID subsystem
•
A single RAID subsystem with connected JBOD subsystems
The firmware update image file cannot update multiple RAID subsystems. You
must update RAID subsystems one at a time.
Updating the Firmware
Important
If you have a JBOD expansion systems, the firmware is updated
on the Head Unit or the RAID subsystem.
Be sure all subsystems are connected and running before
beginning the update.
To update the firmware file in the CLU:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press
Enter.
254
Chapter 6: Maintenance
2.
Highlight Flash through TFTP and press Enter.
3.
Highlight TFTP Server and type the IP address of your TFTP server in the
field provided.
4.
Highlight Port Number and press the backspace key to erase the current
value, then type the new value. 69 is the default.
A list of the current users appears.
5.
Highlight File Name and type the file name of the firmware image file in the
field provided.
6.
Highlight Start and press Enter.
A message appears to tell you to reboot the VTrak.
7.
Restart the VTrak. See the restarting instructions below.
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, Telnet
Warning
Do not restart the VTraks during a firmware upgrade procedure.
Wait until the upgrade is one and you are prompted to restart.
To restart a single subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Press the spacebar to display Restart then press Enter.
A warning message appears.
4.
Press Y to continue.
The screen goes blank.
5.
Wait about two minutes, then re-establish your Telnet connection to the
VTrak CLU.
If you cannot re-establish a connection, wait 30 seconds and try again.
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, Telnet
Warning
Do not restart the VTraks during a firmware upgrade procedure.
Wait until the upgrade is one and you are prompted to restart.
255
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
To restart the multiple subsystems:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Press the spacebar to display Shutdown then press Enter.
A warning message appears.
4.
Press Y to continue.
The screen goes blank.
5.
If you have other VTrak RAID Subsystems, repeat the same procedure for
each of them.
As each controller shuts down, your connection is lost.
6.
Wait for two to three minutes, then turn off the power switches for all
subsystems.
7.
Wait 30 seconds, then turn on the power switches on all JBOD
subsystems.
8.
Wait 30 more seconds, then turn on the power switches on the RAID
subsystem.
9.
Wait 2 to 3 minutes for the RAID Head to boot, then reestablish a Telnet
connection to the CLU.
If you cannot re-establish a connection, wait 30 seconds and try again.
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, SSH
Warning
Do not restart the VTraks during a firmware upgrade procedure.
Wait until the upgrade is one and you are prompted to restart.
To restart a single subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Press the spacebar to display Restart then press Enter.
A warning message appears.
4.
Press Y to continue.
5.
Close your SSH session.
6.
Wait about two minutes, then re-establish your SSH connection to the VTrak
CLU.
If you cannot re-establish a connection, wait 30 seconds and try again.
256
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, SSH
Warning
Do not restart the VTraks during a firmware upgrade procedure.
Wait until the upgrade is one and you are prompted to restart.
To restart the multiple subsystems:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Press the spacebar to display Shutdown then press Enter.
A warning message appears.
4.
Press Y to continue.
5.
Close your SSH session.
If you have other VTrak RAID Subsystems, repeat the same procedure for
each of them. As each controller shuts down, your connection is lost.
6.
Wait for two to three minutes, then turn off the power switches for all
subsystems.
7.
Wait 30 seconds, then turn on the power switches on all JBOD
subsystems.
8.
Wait 30 more seconds, then turn on the power switches on the RAID
subsystem.
9.
Wait 2 to 3 minutes for the RAID Head to boot, then reestablish your SSH
connection to the VTrak CLU.
If you cannot re-establish a connection, wait 30 seconds and try again.
Restarting – Single RAID Subsystem, Serial
Warning
Do not restart the VTraks during a firmware upgrade procedure.
Wait until the upgrade is one and you are prompted to restart.
To restart a single subsystem:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Press the spacebar to display Restart then press Enter.
A warning message appears.
257
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
4.
Press Y to continue.
The screen will display shutdown and startup functions.
5.
When the Login: prompt appears, log into the CLU again.
Restarting – RAID with JBOD Expansion, Serial
Warning
Do not restart the VTraks during a firmware upgrade procedure.
Wait until the upgrade is one and you are prompted to restart.
To restart multiple subsystems:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Additional Info and Management, and press
Enter.
2.
Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter.
3.
Press the spacebar to display Shutdown then press Enter.
A warning message appears.
4.
Press Y to continue.
The screen displays shutdown functions.
5.
If you have other VTrak RAID Subsystems, repeat the same procedure for
each of them.
6.
Wait for two to three minutes, then turn off the power switches for all
subsystems.
7.
Wait 30 seconds, then turn on the power switches on all JBOD
subsystems.
8.
Wait 30 more seconds, then turn on the power switches on the RAID
subsystem.
9.
When the Login: prompt for the Head Unit appears, log into the CLU
again.
258
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Replacing a Power Supply
The power supply and its fans are replaced as one unit. There are no individually
serviceable parts. No tools are required for this procedure.
Remove the Old Power Supply
To remove the power supply:
1.
Verify that the power supply LED is amber or red.
2.
Switch off the power.
3.
Unplug the power cord.
4.
Press the release button and pull the handle downward as shown. See
Figure 1 (E610f/s) or 2 (E310f/s).
5.
Pull the power supply out of the VTrak enclosure.
Install a New Power Supply
To install the power supply:
1.
Carefully slide the power supply into the enclosure.
2.
Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks. See Figure 1 (E610f/s)
or 2 (E310f/s).
3.
Plug in the power cord.
4.
Switch on the power supply.
5.
Verify that the new power supply LED is green.
Figure 1. Replacing an E610f/s power supply
259
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 2. Replacing an E310f/s power supply
This completes the power supply replacement procedure.
Replacing a Cooling Unit Fan or Blower
The fan or blower in each cooling unit is replaced as an individual part. No tools
are required for this procedure.
To replace a fan or blower:
1.
Verify that the Fan LED on the cooling unit is amber or red. See Figure 3.
Figure 3. Fan LED (left: E610f/s, right: E310f/s)
Fan LED
Fan LED
2.
On the cooling unit, press the release button and pull the handle downward.
See Figure 4 (E610f/s) or 5 (E310f/s).
3.
Pull the cooling unit out of the VTrak enclosure.
260
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Figure 4. Removing a cooling unit from the E610f/s
Figure 5. Removing a cooling unit from the E310f/s
4.
Loosen the thumbscrews. A retainer keeps the thumbscrews in place.
5.
Grasp the top section near the thumbscrews and lift it off the bottom section.
Separate the cooling unit sections to access the blower. See Figure 6
(E610f/s) or 7 (E310f/s).
Figure 6. Loosen the thumbscrews and remove the cover (E610f/s)
Lift the cover
Loosen the thumbscrews
261
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 7. Loosen the thumbscrews and remove the cover (E310f/s)
Lift the cover
Loosen the thumbscrews
6.
Lift the fan or blower off the mounting pins and detach the electrical
connector. See Figure 8 (E610f/s) or 9 (E310f/s).
Figure 8. The E610f/s fan and its electrical connector
Electrical
connector
Fan
262
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Figure 9. The E310f/s blower and its electrical connector
Electrical
connector
7.
Blower
Attach the electrical connector of the new fan blower and set the fan or
blower in place.
Be sure you position the fan or blower onto the mounting pins. See Figure 10
(E610f/s) or 11 (E310f/s).
Figure 10.Position the fan onto the mounting pins, pointed outward
263
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 11. Positioning the blower onto the mounting pins, pointed outward
Be sure the blower points outward, towards the handle.
8.
Place the top section of the cooling unit onto the bottom section and tighten
the thumbscrews.
9.
Carefully slide the cooling unit into the enclosure.
10. Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks. See Figure 12.
Figure 12.Locking the cooling unit handle (left: E610f/s, right: E310f/s)
11. Verify that the Fan LEDs are green.
This completes the fan replacement procedure.
264
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Replacing a Cache Battery
The cache battery is located inside the cooling unit. The battery assembly is
replaced as an individual part.
Cautions
•
Try reconditioning the battery before you replace it. See
page 128 or page 183 for more information.
•
The battery assembly is replaced as a unit. Do not attempt to
disconnect the battery by itself.
•
Installing the wrong replacement battery can result in an
explosion.
•
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions that
accompany the battery.
•
While the battery is removed, your system will be vulnerable
to data loss if the power fails while data is being written to the
logical drives.
•
If power service has failed, do not remove the cooling unit if
the Controller’s Dirty Cache LED is flashing. See “Browser
Does Not Connect to WebPAM PROe” on page 351.
To replace a cache battery:
1.
Verify that the Battery LED is amber or red. See Figure 13.
Figure 13.Fan LED (left: E610f/s, right: E310f/s)
Battery
LED
Battery LED
2.
Press the release button and pull the handle downward as shown above.
3.
Pull the cooling unit out of the VTrak enclosure. See Figure 14 (E610f/s) or
15 (E310f/s).
265
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 14.Removing the cooling unit from the enclosure from the E610f/s
Figure 15.Removing the cooling unit from the enclosure from the E310f/s
3.
Loosen the thumbscrews. A retainer keeps the thumbscrews in place.
4.
Grasp the top section near the thumbscrews and lift it off the bottom section.
Separate the cooling unit sections to access the battery assemble. See
Figure 16 (E610f/s) or 17 (E310f/s).
Figure 16.Loosen the thumbscrews and remove the cover (E610f/s)
Lift the cover
Loosen the thumbscrews
266
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Figure 17.Loosen the thumbscrews and remove the cover (E310f/s)
Lift the cover
Loosen the thumbscrews
5.
6.
Remove the two screws holding the battery assembly in place.
Detach the connector on the circuit board.
Do not detach any other connectors. See Figure 18 (E610f/s) or 19
(E310f/s).
Figure 18. Removing the battery assembly (E610f/s)
Remove this screw
Detach this connector
267
Battery Assembly
Remove this screw
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 19. Removing the battery assembly (E310f/s)
Remove this screw
Detach this connector
7.
Battery Assembly
Remove this screw
Lift the battery assembly out of the cooling unit.
8.
Place a new battery assembly into the cooling unit.
9.
Attach the connector on the circuit board.
10. Install the two screws holding the battery assembly in place to the cooling
unit.
11. Place the top section of the cooling unit onto the bottom section and tighten
the thumbscrews.
12. Carefully slide the cooling unit into the enclosure.
13. Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks. See Figure 20.
Figure 20.Locking the cooling unit handle (left: E610f/s, right: E310f/s)
This completes the battery replacement procedure.
268
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Replacing a RAID Controller – Dual Controllers
The RAID Controller monitors and manages the logical drives. When this
controller is replaced, all of your logical drive data and configurations remain
intact because this logical drive information is stored on the disk drives.
Important
Do not replace the RAID Controller based on LED colors alone.
Only replace the RAID Controller when directed to do so by
Promise Technical Support. See page 355.
Important
Before you install the replacement controller, be sure the
replacement controller has:
•
The same Firmware version as the original controller
•
The same amount of SDRAM as the original controller
To obtain this information, click the Controller
icon, Information
tab, and look for Firmware Version and Memory Size.
Note
On VTraks with dual RAID controllers, you can hot-swap one
controller at a time.
Removing the old controller
To remove a RAID Controller:
1.
Disconnect the Fibre Channel or SAS cables, management, serial, and
power cables.
2.
On the controller handle, press the release button and pull the handle
downward. See Figure 21.
3.
Pull the controller out of the VTrak enclosure.
Installing the new controller
To install the new controller:
1.
Carefully slide the controller into the enclosure.
2.
Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks. See Figure 21.
3.
Connect the Fibre Channel or SAS cables, management, serial, and power
cables.
269
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Replacing a RAID Controller – Single Controller
The RAID Controller monitors and manages the logical drives. When this
controller is replaced, all of your logical drive data and configurations remain
intact because this logical drive information is stored on the disk drives.
Caution
The RAID controller is NOT hot-swappable if your VTrak has only
one controller. Power-down the VTrak before removing it.
Important
Do not replace the RAID Controller based on LED colors alone.
Only replace the RAID Controller when directed to do so by
Promise Technical Support. See page 355.
Important
Before you install the replacement controller, be sure the
replacement controller has:
•
The same Firmware version as the original controller
•
The same amount of SDRAM as the original controller
To obtain this information, click the Controller
icon, Information
tab, and look for Firmware Version and Memory Size.
Removing the old controller
To remove the RAID Controller:
1.
Shutdown the VTrak. See “Shutting Down the Subsystem” on page 117
(WebPAM PROe) or page 241 (CLU).
2.
Switch off the power.
3.
Disconnect the Fibre Channel or SAS cables, management, serial and
power cables.
4.
On the controller handle, press the release button and pull the handle
downward. See Figure 21.
5.
Pull the controller out of the VTrak enclosure.
Installing the new controller
To install the new controller:
1.
Carefully slide the controller into the enclosure.
2.
Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks. See Figure 21.
270
Chapter 6: Maintenance
3.
4.
Connect the Fibre Channel or SAS cables, management, serial and power
cables.
Turn on the power supply switches.
The VTrak restarts. For more information about VTrak’s start-up behavior,
see “Connecting the Power” on page 37.
Figure 21.Replacing the controller. The E310f/s is shown. The E610f/s is
similar
271
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
272
Chapter 7: Technology Background
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Introduction to RAID (below)
•
“Choosing a RAID Level” on page 284
•
“Choosing Stripe Size” on page 287
•
“Choosing Sector Size” on page 287
•
“Cache Policy” on page 288
•
“Cache Mirroring” on page 290
•
“LUN Affinity” on page 291
•
“Capacity Coercion” on page 293
•
“Initialization” on page 293
•
“Hot Spare Drive(s)” on page 294
•
“Partition and Format the Logical Drive” on page 294
•
“RAID Level Migration” on page 294
•
“Media Patrol” on page 301
•
“Predictive Data Migration (PDM)” on page 302
•
“Transition” on page 303
Introduction to RAID
RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) allows multiple physical drives to
be combined together in a disk array. Then all or a portion of the disk array is
formed into a logical drive. The operating system sees the logical drive as a
single storage device, and treats it as such.
The RAID software and controller manage all of the individual drives. The
benefits of a RAID can include:
•
Higher data transfer rates for increased server performance
•
Increased overall storage capacity for a single drive designation (such as, C,
D, E, etc.)
•
Data redundancy/fault tolerance for ensuring continuous system operation in
the event of a hard drive failure
Different types of logical drives use different organizational models and have
varying benefits. Also see “Choosing a RAID Level” on page 284. The following
outline breaks down the properties for each type of RAID logical drive:
273
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
RAID 0 – Stripe
When a logical drive is striped, the read and write blocks of data are interleaved
between the sectors of multiple physical drives. Performance is increased, since
the workload is balanced between drives or “members” that form the logical drive.
Identical drives are recommended for performance as well as data storage
efficiency.
Figure 1. RAID 0 Striping interleaves data across multiple drives
Data
Stripe
Physical Drives
The disk array’s data capacity is equal to the number of disk drive members
multiplied by the smallest drive's capacity. For example, one 100 GB and three
120 GB drives will form a 400 GB (4 x 100 GB) disk array instead of 460 GB.
If physical drives of different capacities are used, there will also be unused
capacity on the larger drives.
RAID 0 logical drives on VTrak consist of one or more physical drives.
274
Chapter 7: Technology Background
RAID 1 – Mirror
When a logical drive is mirrored, identical data is written to a pair of physical
drives, while reads are performed in parallel. The reads are performed using
elevator seek and load balancing techniques where the workload is distributed in
the most efficient manner. Whichever drive is not busy and is positioned closer to
the data will be accessed first.
With RAID 1, if one physical drive fails or has errors, the other mirrored physical
drive continues to function. Moreover, if a spare physical drive is present, the
spare drive will be used as the replacement drive and data will begin to be
mirrored to it from the remaining good drive.
Figure 2. RAID 1 Mirrors identical data to two drives
Data Mirror
Physical Drives
The logical drive’s data capacity equals the smaller physical drive. For example,
a 100 GB physical drive and a 120 GB physical drive have a combined capacity
of 100 GB in a mirrored logical drive.
If physical drives of different capacities are used, there will be unused capacity on
the larger drive.
RAID 1 logical drives on VTrak consist of two physical drives.
If you want a mirrored logical drive with more than two physical drives, see
“RAID 1E – Enhanced Mirror” on page 276 and “RAID 10 – Mirror + Stripe” on
page 279.
275
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
RAID 1E – Enhanced Mirror
RAID 1E offers the security of mirrored data provided by RAID 1 plus the added
capacity of more than two physical drives. It also offers overall increased read/
write performance plus the flexibility of using an odd number of physical drives.
With RAID 1E, each data stripe is mirrored onto two physical drives. If one drive
fails or has errors, the other drives continue to function, providing fault tolerance.
Figure 3. RAID 1E can mirror data over an odd number of drives
Enhanced Data Mirrors
Physical Drives
The advantage of RAID 1E is the ability to use an odd number of physical drives,
unlike RAID 1 and RAID 10. You can also create a RAID 1E Logical Drive with an
even number of physical drives. However, with an even number of drives, you will
obtain somewhat greater security with comparable performance using RAID 10.
RAID 1E logical drives consist of three or more physical drives. You can create
an array with just two physical drives and specify RAID 1E. But the resulting array
will actually be a RAID 1.
276
Chapter 7: Technology Background
RAID 5 – Block and Parity Stripe
RAID 5 organizes block data and parity data across the physical drives.
Generally, RAID Level 5 tends to exhibit lower random write performance due to
the heavy workload of parity recalculation for each I/O. RAID 5 is generally
considered to be the most versatile RAID level. It works well for file, database,
application and web servers.
Figure 4. RAID 5 stripes all drives with data and parity information
Distributed Parity
Data
Blocks
Physical Drives
The capacity of a RAID 5 logical drive equals the smallest physical drive times
the number of physical drives, minus one. Hence, a RAID 5 logical drive with four
100 GB physical drives will have a capacity of 300 GB. A RAID 5 logical drive
with two 120 GB physical drives and one 100 GB physical drive will have a
capacity of 200 GB.
RAID 5 is generally considered to be the most versatile RAID level.
A RAID 5 on VTrak consists of 3 to 16 physical drives.
277
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
RAID 6 – Block and Double Parity Stripe
RAID level 6 stores dual parity data is rotated across the physical drives along
with the block data. A RAID 6 logical drive can continue to accept I/O requests
when any two physical drives fail.
Figure 5. RAID 6 stripes all drives with data and dual parity
Double Distributed (Wide-space Q+Q) Parity
Data
Blocks
Physical Drives
Hence, a RAID 6 logical drive with (7) 100 GB physical drives will have a capacity
of 500 GB. A RAID 6 logical drive with (4) 100 GB physical drives will have a
capacity of 200 GB.
RAID 6 becomes more capacity efficient in terms of physical drives as the
number of physical drives increases.
RAID 6 provides double fault tolerance. Your logical drive remains available when
up to two physical drives fail.
RAID 6 is generally considered to be the safest RAID level.
A RAID 6 on VTrak consists of 4 to 16 physical drives.
278
Chapter 7: Technology Background
RAID 10 – Mirror + Stripe
Mirror + Stripe combines both of the RAID 1 and RAID 0 logical drive types.
RAID 10 can increase performance by reading and writing data in parallel—
striping—while protecting data by duplicating it—mirroring.
Promise implements RAID 10 by creating a data stripe over one pair of disk
drives, then mirroring the stripe over a second pair of disk drives. Some
applications refer to this method as RAID 0+1.
Figure 6. Promise RAID 10 starts with a data stripe, then mirrors it
1. Data Stripe
2. Data Mirror
Disk Drives
The data capacity RAID 10 logical drive equals the capacity of the smallest
physical drive times the number of physical drives, divided by two.
In some cases, RAID 10 offers double fault tolerance, depending on which
physical drives fail.
RAID 10 arrays require an even number of physical drives and a minimum of
four.
For RAID 10 characteristics using an odd number of physical drives, choose
RAID 1E.
279
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
RAID 50 – Striping of Distributed Parity
RAID 50 combines both RAID 5 and RAID 0 features. Data is striped across
physical drives as in RAID 0, and it uses distributed parity as in RAID 5. RAID 50
provides data reliability, good overall performance, and supports larger volume
sizes.
Figure 7. RAID 50 is a combination of RAID 5 and RAID 0
Distributed Parity
Axle 1
Data
Stripes
Axle 2
Disk Drives
The data capacity RAID 50 logical drive equals the capacity of the smallest
physical drive times the number of physical drives, minus two.
RAID 50 also provides very high reliability because data is still available even if
multiple physical drives fail (one in each axle). The greater the number of axles,
the greater the number of physical drives that can fail without the RAID 50 logical
drive going offline.
Component
Minimum
Maximum
Number of Axles
2
16
Physical Drives per Axle
3
32
Physical Drives per Logical Drive
6
256
280
Chapter 7: Technology Background
RAID 50 Axles
When you create a RAID 50, you must specify the number of axles. An axle
refers to a single RAID 5 logical drive that is striped with other RAID 5 logical
drives to make RAID 50. An axle can have from 3 to 32 physical drives,
depending on the number of physical drives in the logical drive.
The chart below shows RAID 50 logical drives with 6 to 16 physical drives, the
available number of axles, and the resulting distribution of physical drives on
each axle.
RAID 50 Logical Drive
No. of
Drives
No. of
Axles
Drives per
Axle
No. of
Drives
No. of
Axles
Drives per
Axle
6
2
3,3
14
2
7,7
7
2
3,4
3
4,5,5
8
2
4,4
9
2
4,5
3
10
11
3
2
12
13
4
3,3,4,4
2
7,8
3,3,3
3
5,5,5
2
5,5
4
3,4,4,4
3
3,3,4
2
5,6
15
5
3,3,3,3,3
2
8,8
3,4,4
3
5,5,6
6,6
4
4,4,4,4
3
4,4,4
5
3,3,3,3,4
4
3,3,3,3
2
6,7
3
4,4,5
4
3,3,3,4
16
281
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
RAID 60 – Striping of Double Parity
RAID 60 combines both RAID 6 and RAID 0 features. Data is striped across
disks as in RAID 0, and it uses double distributed parity as in RAID 6. RAID 60
provides data reliability, good overall performance and supports larger volume
sizes.
Figure 8. RAID 60 is a combination of RAID 6 and RAID 0
Double Distributed Parity
Axle 1
Data
Stripes
Axle 2
Disk Drives
Figure 9. RAID 60 Striping of Double Distributed Parity disk arrays
The total capacity of a RAID 60 logical drive is the smallest physical drive times
the number of physical drives, minus four.
RAID 60 also provides very high reliability because data is still available even if
multiple physical drives fail (two in each axle). The greater the number of axles,
the greater the number of physical drives that can fail without the RAID 60 logical
drive going offline.
Component
Minimum
Maximum
Number of Axles
2
16
Physical Drives per Axle
4
32
Physical Drives per Logical Drive
8
256
282
Chapter 7: Technology Background
RAID 60 Axles
When you create a RAID 60, you must specify the number of axles. An axle
refers to a single RAID 6 logical drive that is striped with other RAID 6 logical
drives to make RAID 60. An axle can have from 4 to 32 physical drives,
depending on the number of physical drives in the logical drive.
The chart below shows RAID 60 logical drives with 8 to 20 physical drives, the
available number of axles, and the resulting distribution of physical drives on
each axle.
RAID 60 Logical Drive
No. of
Drives
No. of
Axles
Drives per
Axle
No. of
Drives
No. of
Axles
Drives per
Axle
8
2
4,4
17
2
8,9
9
2
4,5
3
5,6,6
10
2
5,5
11
2
5,6
12
2
3
13
14
15
16
4
4,4,4,5
2
9,9
6,6
3
6,6,6
4,4,4
4
4,4,5,5
18
2
6,7
2
9,10
3
4,4,5
19
3
6,6,7
2
7,7
4
4,5,5,5
3
4,5,5
2
10,10
20
2
7,8
3
6,7,7
3
5,5,5
4
5,5,5,5
2
8,8
5
4,4,4,4,4
3
5,5,6
4
4,4,4,4
283
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Choosing a RAID Level
There are several issues to consider when choosing the RAID Level for your
VTrak disk array. The following discussion summarizes some advantages,
disadvantages, and applications for each choice.
RAID 0
Advantages
Disadvantages
Implements a striped disk array, the
data is broken down into blocks and
each block is written to a separate disk
drive
I/O performance is greatly improved by
spreading the I/O load across many
channels and drives
No parity calculation overhead is
involved
Not a true RAID because it is not faulttolerant
The failure of just one drive will result in
all data in an disk array being lost
Should not be used in mission critical
environments
Recommended Applications for RAID 0
•
Image Editing
•
Pre-Press Applications
•
Any application requiring high bandwidth
RAID 1
Advantages
Disadvantages
Simplest RAID storage subsystem
design
Can increase read performance by
processing data requests in parallel
since the same data resides on two
different drives
Very high disk overhead - uses only
50% of total capacity
Recommended Applications for RAID 1
•
Accounting
•
Payroll
•
Financial
•
Any application requiring very high availability
284
Chapter 7: Technology Background
RAID 1E
Advantages
Disadvantages
Implemented as a mirrored disk array
whose segments are RAID 0 disk
arrays
High I/O rates are achieved thanks to
multiple stripe segments
Can use an odd number of disks
Very high disk overhead - uses only
50% of total capacity
Recommended Applications for RAID 1E
•
Imaging applications
•
Database servers
•
General fileserver
RAID 5
Advantages
Disadvantages
High Read data transaction rate
Medium Write data transaction rate
Good aggregate transfer rate
Disk failure has a medium impact on
throughput
Recommended Applications for RAID 5
•
File and Application servers
•
Intranet servers
•
WWW, E-mail, and News servers
•
Most versatile RAID level
RAID 6
Advantages
Disadvantages
High Read data transaction rate
Medium Write data transaction rate
Good aggregate transfer rate
Safest RAID level, except for RAID 60
High disk overhead – equivalent of two
drives used for parity
Slightly lower performance than RAID 5
Recommended Applications for RAID 6
•
Accounting and Financial
•
Database servers
•
Any application requiring very high availability
285
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
RAID 10
Advantages
Disadvantages
Implemented as a mirrored disk array
whose segments are RAID 0 disk
arrays
High I/O rates are achieved thanks to
multiple stripe segments
Very high disk overhead - uses only
50% of total capacity
Recommended Applications for RAID 10
•
Imaging applications
•
Database servers
•
General fileserver
RAID 50
Advantages
Disadvantages
High Read data transaction rate
Medium Write data transaction rate
Good aggregate transfer rate
High reliability
Supports large volume sizes
Higher disk overhead than RAID 5
Recommended Applications for RAID 50
•
File and Application servers
•
Transaction processing
•
Office application with many users accessing small files
RAID 60
Advantages
Disadvantages
High Read data transaction rate
Medium Write data transaction rate
Good aggregate transfer rate
Safest RAID level
High disk overhead – equivalent of two
drives used for parity
Slightly lower performance than RAID
50
Recommended Applications for RAID 60:
•
Accounting and Financial
•
Database servers
•
Any application requiring very high availability
286
Chapter 7: Technology Background
Choosing Stripe Size
Stripe Size, also called “Stripe Block Size”, refers to the size of the data blocks
written to, and read from, the physical drives. Stripe Size is specified when you
create a disk array. In order to change the Stripe Size of an existing disk array,
you must delete the disk array and create a new one. You can choose Stripe Size
directly when you use the Advanced function to create a disk array. If you use the
Express function to create a disk array, WebPAM PRO selects the Stripe Size
when you choose an Application Type.
The available Stripe Sizes are 64, 128, 256 KB, 512 KB, and 1 MB. 64 KB is the
default. There are two issues to consider when selecting the Stripe Size.
First, you should choose a Stripe Size equal to, or smaller than, the smallest
cache buffer found on any physical drive in the disk array. Selecting a larger
value slows read/write performance because physical drives with smaller cache
buffers need more time for multiple accesses to fill their buffers.
Second, if your data retrieval consists of fixed data blocks, such as with some
database or video applications, then you should choose that size as your Stripe
Size.
If you do not know the cache buffer or fixed data block sizes, Promise suggests
you choose 64 KB as your Stripe Size. Generally speaking, email, POS, and
webservers prefer smaller stripe sizes. Video and database applications prefer
larger stripe sizes.
Choosing Sector Size
A sector is the smallest addressable area on a physical disk drive. Sector Size
refers to the size of sector measured by the number of bytes of data it can hold.
The most common sector size is 512 bytes (512 B). A smaller sector size results
in a more efficient use of a disk drive’s capacity. 512 B is the default sector size
for logical drives on VTrak.
The number of usable sectors is limited by the addressing method of the
computer's operating system:
•
Windows 2000 and Windows XP (32-bit) support 10-bit logical bit addressing
(LBA), so with 512 B sectors, they can only support up to 2 terabytes (TB) of
data storage capacity. To increase the capacity, you must use larger sectors.
See “2 TB Limitation” on page 288.
•
Windows XP (64-bit), Windows 2003 Server, and Windows Vista support 64bit LBA, so they are not affected by this limitation. For these OSes, always
choose the default 512 B sector size.
•
Linux operating systems with the 2.4 kernel do not support variable sector
sizes. For these OSes, always choose the default 512 B sector size.
287
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
•
Linux operating systems with the 2.6 kernel support 64-bit LBA. For these
OSes, always choose the default 512 B sector size.
2 TB Limitation
If your Host PC runs Windows 2000 or Windows XP (32-bit), and you want to
create logical drives larger than 2TB, you must choose a sector size larger than
512 B when you create the logical drive. The table below correlates sector size
with logical drive capacity.
Logical Drive Size
Sector Size
8 to 16 TB
4096 bytes (4 KB)
4 to 8 TB
2048 bytes (2 KB)
2 to 4 TB
1024 bytes (1 KB)
0 to 2 TB
512 bytes (512 B)
Because logical drives can be expanded, you may encounter a situation where
the usable capacity of your expanded logical drive is reduced by the addressing
issue described above. There are two alternatives:
•
Limit your logical drive expansion to within the limits described in the chart.
•
Back up your data, then delete your existing logical drive and create a new
one with a larger sector size.
Cache Policy
As it is used with VTrak, the term cache refers to any of several kinds of highspeed, volatile memory that hold data moving from your computer to the physical
drives or vice-versa. Cache is important because it can read and write data much
faster than a physical drive. There are read caches, which hold data as it is read
from a physical drive; and write caches, which hold data as it is written to a
physical drive.
In order to tune the cache for best performance in different applications, useradjustable settings are provided. Cache settings are made in conjunction with
logical drives:
•
When you create a logical drive. See “Creating a Logical Drive” on page 145
or page 198
•
On an existing logical drive. See “Making Logical Drive Settings” on
page 154 or page 205.
288
Chapter 7: Technology Background
Read Cache Policy
•
Read Cache – The read cache is enabled.
•
Read Ahead – The read cache and the read-ahead feature are enabled.
Read-ahead anticipates the next read and performs it before the request is
made. Can increase read performance.
•
No Cache – The read cache is disabled.
Write Cache Policy
•
Write Back – Data is written first to the cache, then to the logical drive.
Better performance. VTrak has a cache backup battery to protect data in the
cache from a sudden power failure.
•
Write Thru – Also “Write Through”. Data is written to the cache and the
logical drive at the same time. Safer.
If your write cache policy is set to Write Back, the write policy automatically
changes to Write Thru when all of the following conditions occur:
•
The logical drive write policy is set to Write Back
•
The Adaptive Writeback Cache feature is enabled
•
The cache backup battery goes offline
When the battery comes back online, the write policy automatically changes back
to Write Back.
Also see “Cache Mirroring” on page 290.
Adaptive Writeback Cache
On the VTrak subsystem, you can set the logical drive write cache policy to Write
Thru or Write Back.
If you set the write cache policy to Write Back, your data is first written to the
controller cache, and later to the logical drive. This action improves performance.
To preserve the data in the cache in the event of a power failure, the subsystem
has a backup battery that powers the cache. To see an estimate of how long the
battery will power the cache, see “Checking the Batteries” on page 128 or
page 182.
The Adaptive Writeback Cache feature protects your data by changing the write
cache settings while the cache backup battery is offline. When all of the following
conditions occur:
•
The logical drive write policy is set to Write Back
•
The Adaptive Writeback Cache feature is enabled
•
The cache backup battery goes offline
289
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
The write policy automatically changes to Write Thru. When the battery comes
back online, the write policy automatically changes back to Write Back.
To enable the Adaptive Writeback Cache option, see “Making Controller Settings”
on page 122 or page 177.
Also see “Replacing a Cache Battery” on page 265.
Host Cache Flushing
When host cache flushing is enabled, the VTrak immediately flushes the data in
its controller cache to the drives when the Host sends a Flush Cache command.
Forced Read Ahead Cache
When forced read ahead cache is enabled, the controller cache is forced to read
ahead of the designated data. This action increases performance in video
applications, where large block sequential reads are common.
However, forced read ahead cache might reduce performance when large block
sequential reads do not occur. Promise recommends leaving this feature
disabled for applications other than video.
Cache Mirroring
VTrak subsystems with two controllers include a Cache Mirroring feature. Cache
Mirroring causes the local controller to mirror write data to the remote controller.
That means, when there is write data in the cache of the controller managing the
target logical drive, the same write data is copied to the cache of the other
controller as well. This arrangement protects the data from loss, in the event that
the local controller fails before the data is written to the logical drive.
Cache Mirroring works whether the write cache policy of your logical drives is set
to Write Back or Write Through. However, you only realize the advantage of
Cache Mirroring when the write cache policy is set to Write Back.
With Cache Mirroring enabled, any write data in the controller cache that has not
been written to the logical drive, will be written to the logical drive, even if the
controller fails. Enable Cache Mirroring when you require failover/failback
protection.
With Cache Mirroring disabled, any write data in the controller cache that has not
been written to the logical drive, will be lost if the controller fails. On the other
hand, write performance increases because of greater bandwidth. Disable Cache
Mirroring when you require maximum performance.
To use Cache Mirroring you must:
•
Have two controllers in the subsystem
290
Chapter 7: Technology Background
•
Set Redundancy Type to Active-Active.
See “Setting Redundancy for the Subsystem” on page 64 or page 172
•
Enable Cache Mirroring under subsystem settings.
See “Setting Redundancy for the Subsystem” on page 64 or page 172
•
On subsystems with two controllers, when Cache Mirroring is disabled, LUN
Affinity is enabled automatically. See “LUN Affinity” on page 291
Failover and Failback
When one controller fails, the surviving controller takes over logical drive access
until the failed controller is brought back online or is replaced. For example,
Cache Mirroring is enabled and your logical drives are assigned to Controller 1.
The following actions will happen:
•
If Controller 1 goes offline, Controller 2 takes over access to the logical
drives assigned to Controller 1.
•
All write data that is still in the controller cache will be written to the logical
drives, even though the controller managing them has failed.
•
If Controller 1 comes back online, Controller 1 takes back access to the
logical drives assigned to it.
•
If Controller 1 is replaced, the new controller takes over access to the logical
drives assigned to Controller 1.
LUN Affinity
VTrak subsystems with two controllers include a LUN Affinity feature. Normally,
either controller can access all logical drives. LUN Affinity enables you to specify
which controller can access each logical drive. Use this feature to balance the
load of your logical drives between the two controllers.
To use LUN Affinity you must:
•
Have two controllers in the subsystem
•
Enable LUN Affinity under controller settings. See page 122 or page 177
On subsystems with two controllers, when Cache Mirroring is disabled, LUN
Affinity is enabled automatically. See “Cache Mirroring” on page 290.
Disk Array Creation
When you create a logical drive using the Advanced method of disk array
creation, you can specify the Preferred Controller ID:
•
Controller 1 – Assign all logical drives to Controller 1
•
Controller 2 – Assign all logical drives to Controller 2
•
Automatic – Alternate logical drive assignments between Controllers 1 and 2
291
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Automatic is the default and preferred setting because it will balance the logical
drive assignments for you.
When you create a logical drive using the Automatic or Express disk array
creation, the logical drives are assigned alternatively between Controllers 1 and 2
automatically.
See “Creating a Disk Array – Automatic” on page 140 or page 190
“Creating a Disk Array – Express” on page 140 or page 191
“Creating a Disk Array – Advanced” on page 142 or page 192
Logical Drive Settings
After you have created a logical drive, you can click the Settings tab and
manually change the Preferred Controller ID between Controller 1 and Controller
2. See “Making Logical Drive Settings” on page 154 or page 205.
If you create logical drives with LUN Affinity disabled, the Preferred Controller ID
will show N/A, and your logical drives will be visible to both controllers.
If you create logical drives with LUN Affinity disabled, and later you enable LUN
Affinity, all of your logical drives will be assigned to Controller 1. To balance the
load, you can reassign some of your logical drives to Controller 2 under the
Preferred Controller ID in the Settings tab. See “Making Logical Drive Settings”
on page 154 or page 205.
When you a delete a logical drive, the remaining logical drives keep the same
Controller assignments. If you want to rebalance controller assignments of the
remaining logical drives, change their Preferred Controller IDs in the Settings tab.
Failover and Failback
When one controller fails, the surviving controller takes over logical drive access
until the failed controller is brought back online or is replaced. For example, LUN
Affinity is enabled and your logical drives are assigned to Controller 1. The
following actions will happen:
•
If Controller 1 goes offline, Controller 2 takes over access to the logical
drives assigned to Controller 1.
•
If Controller 1 comes back online, Controller 1 takes back access to the
logical drives assigned to it.
•
If Controller 1 is replaced, the new controller takes over access to the logical
drives assigned to Controller 1.
•
All logical drives assigned to Controller 2 remain accessible by Controller 2.
Controller 1 cannot access them at any time.
292
Chapter 7: Technology Background
Capacity Coercion
This feature is designed for fault-tolerant logical drives (RAID 1, 1E, 5, 10, 50,
and 60). It is generally recommended to use physical drives of the same size in
your disk arrays. When this is not possible, physical drives of different sizes will
work but the system must adjust for the size differences by reducing or coercing
the capacity of the larger drives to match the smaller ones. With VTrak, you can
choose to enable Capacity Coercion and any one of four methods.
Enable Capacity Coercion and choose the Method in the Controller Settings
menu. See page 122 or page 177. The choices are:
•
GB Truncate – (Default) Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest
1,000,000,000 byte boundary.
•
10GB Truncate – Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest 10,000,000,000
byte boundary.
•
Group Rounding – Uses an algorithm to determine how much to truncate.
Results in the maximum amount of usable drive capacity.
•
Table Rounding – Applies a predefined table to determine how much to
truncate.
Capacity Coercion also affects a replacement drive used in a disk array.
Normally, when an physical drive fails, the replacement drive must be the same
capacity or larger. However, the Capacity Coercion feature permits the
installation of a replacement drive that is slightly smaller (within 1 gigabyte) than
the remaining working drive. For example, the remaining working drives can be
80.5 GB and the replacement drive can be 80.3, since all are rounded down to
80 GB. This permits the smaller drive to be used.
Without Capacity Coercion, the controller will not permit the use of a replacement
physical drive that is slightly smaller than the remaining working drive(s).
Initialization
Initialization is done to logical drives after they are created from a disk array. Full
initialization sets all data bits in the logical drive to a specified pattern, such as all
zeros. The action is useful because there may be residual data on the logical
drives left behind from earlier configurations. For this reason, Initialization is
recommended for all new logical drives. See “Initializing a Logical Drive” on
page 155 or page 205.
Caution
When you initialize a logical drive, all the data on the logical drive
will be lost. Backup any important data before you initialize a
logical drive.
293
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Hot Spare Drive(s)
A hot spare is a disk drive that is connected to the disk array system but is not
assigned as a member of the disk array. In the event of the failure of a drive
within a functioning fault tolerant disk array, the hot spare is activated as a
member of the disk array to replace a drive that has failed.
VTrak will replace a failing disk drive in a disk array with an unassigned drive, if
one is available. The unassigned drive is not part of any disk array. Such a drive
is called a hot spare drive. There are two types:
•
Global – An unassigned disk drive available to any disk array on the VTrak.
•
Dedicated – An unassigned disk drive that can only be used by a specified
disk array.
The hot spare policy function lets you choose whether a disk array will access
any unassigned disk drive or a designated drive in the event of disk drive failure.
See “Managing Spare Drives” on page 159 (WebPAM PROe) or page 201 (CLU)
for information on how to make this setting.
The spare drive effectively takes the place of the failed drive and the RAID
system immediately begins to rebuild data onto the drive. When the rebuild is
complete, the disk array is returned to fault tolerant status.
VTrak includes a function that enables you to return a hot spare drive from a disk
array back to spare status. When you create the hot spare drive, check the
Revertible box to enable this feature. See “Transition” on page 303.
See also “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 336.
Partition and Format the Logical Drive
Like any other type of fixed disk media in your system, a RAID logical drive must
also be partitioned and formatted before use. Use the same method of
partitioning and formatting on an logical drive as you would any other fixed disk.
Depending on the operating system you use, there may or may not be various
capacity limitations applicable for the different types of partitions.
RAID Level Migration
To migrate a disk array is to do one or both:
•
Change its RAID level
•
Increase the number of disk drives (sometimes called Expansion)
On VTrak, RAID level migration is performed on the disk array but it applies to the
logical drives. Migration takes place on an existing Functional disk array without
disturbing the existing data. While the disk array is migrating, you can access the
294
Chapter 7: Technology Background
data as before. When migration is complete, your disk array will have a different
RAID level and/or a larger capacity.
In most cases, you must add one or more physical drives during the migration
process. You can never reduce the number of physical drives.
The tables below show the migration options for a source logical drive according
to its RAID level. The available target RAID levels are shown with their
requirements.
See “Migrating a Disk Array” on page 147 or page 196.
RAID 0
A RAID 0 source logical drive can migrate to the following target logical drives:
Target
Requirements
RAID 0
Add physical drives.
RAID 1
2 physical drives only.
Only a single-drive RAID 0 can migrate to RAID 1 by adding 1
physical drive.
RAID 1E
3 or more physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 5
3 physical drives minimum, 16 maximum.
RAID 0 must have less than 16 physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 6
4 physical drives minimum, 16 maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 10
4 physical drives minimum.
Even number of physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 50
6 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
295
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Target
RAID 60
Requirements
8 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 1
A RAID 1 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives:
Target
Requirements
RAID 0
None.
RAID 1E
3 or more physical drives.
Add 1 or more physical drives.
RAID 5
3 physical drives minimum, 16 maximum.
RAID 1 must have less than 16 physical drives.
Add 1 or more physical drives.
RAID 10
4 physical drives minimum.
Even number of physical drives.
Add 2 or more physical drives.
RAID 50
6 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
Add 4 or more physical drives.
RAID 1E
A RAID 1E Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives:
Target
Requirements
RAID 0
None.
RAID 1E
Add physical drives.
RAID 5
3 physical drives minimum, 16 maximum.
RAID 1E must have less than 16 physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
296
Chapter 7: Technology Background
RAID 10
4 physical drives minimum.
Even number of physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 50
6 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
RAID 5
A RAID 5 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives:
Target
Requirements
RAID 0
None.
RAID 1E
None.
RAID 5
Add physical drives. 16 maximum.
RAID 6
4 physical drives minimum, 16 maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 10
4 physical drives minimum.
Even number of physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 50
6 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 60
8 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 6
A RAID 6 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives:
Target
RAID 6
Requirements
Add physical drives. 16 maximum.
297
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
RAID 60
8 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 10
A RAID 10 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives:
Target
Requirements
RAID 0
None.
RAID 1E
None.
RAID 5
3 physical drives minimum, 16 maximum.
RAID 10 must have less than 16 physical drives.
RAID 6
4 physical drives minimum, 16 maximum.
RAID 10 must have less than 16 physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 10
Add physical drives.
Even number of physical drives.
RAID 50
6 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
RAID 60
8 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
When you migrate RAID 10 logical drive, it becomes RAID 1E by default.
If you want a RAID 10 logical drive, there must be an even number of physical
drives and you must specify RAID 10 for the target logical drive.
298
Chapter 7: Technology Background
RAID 50
A RAID 50 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives:
Target
Requirements
RAID 0
None.
RAID 1E
None.
RAID 5
16 physical drives maximum.
RAID 50 must have less than 16 physical drives.
RAID 6
16 physical drives maximum.
RAID 50 must have less than 16 physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 10
Even number of physical drives.
RAID 50
Add physical drives. 32 per axle maximum.
RAID 60
8 physical drives minimum, 32 per axle maximum.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
You can add physical drives to a RAID 50 array but you cannot change the
number of axles.
RAID 60
A RAID 60 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives:
Target
Requirements
RAID 6
16 physical drives maximum.
RAID 60 must have less than 16 physical drives.
If existing physical drives have no unused space, add 1 or
more physical drives.
RAID 60
Add physical drives. 32 per axle maximum.
You can add physical drives to a RAID 60 array but you cannot change the
number of axles.
299
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 1.
Important
•
The Target disk array may require more physical drives than
the Source disk array
•
If the Target disk array requires an EVEN number of physical
drives but the Source disk array has an ODD number, ADD a
physical drive as part of the migration process
•
You cannot reduce the number of physical drives in your disk
array, even if the Target disk array requires fewer physical
drives than the Source disk array
•
RAID 1 (mirroring) works with two drives only. Only a singledrive RAID 0 disk array can migrate to RAID 1. Other RAID
Levels use too many drives to migrate
•
You cannot migrate a disk array when it is Critical or
performing activities such as Synchronizing, Rebuilding, and
PDM
•
For RAID 6 or RAID 60, you can only migrate between these
two RAID levels. Destination RAID 60 axles can have up to
16 physical drives. Other limitations might apply
Ranges of Disk Array Expansion
The Windows 2000 and Windows XP (32-bit) operating systems support a
10-byte LBA format. As a result, these OSes can only recognize 4 billion
addresses. If you create a logical drive using the default 512 B sector size, the
logical drive will be limited to 2 TB of data, even if there is more space available
on your disk drives.
This limitation does not apply to Windows XP (64-bit), 2003 Server, Vista, and
Linux OSes with the 2.6 kernel. Linux OSes with the 2.4 kernel do not support
variable sector sizes, therefore you cannot apply the solution described here to
those OSes.
Note that once you create your logical drive, you cannot change the size of the
sectors. Nor can you increase the number of address blocks that the OS
recognizes.
You can direct WebPAM PROe to expand a logical drive beyond the maximum
expansion size. When the expansion is finished:
•
WebPAM PROe will show the logical drive in the desired size.
•
Your operating system might show the logical drive at the maximum size
listed in the table below.
•
Additional capacity might appear as unpartitioned and unformatted.
300
Chapter 7: Technology Background
Figure 1.
Current LD Size
Maximum LD
Expansion Size
8 to 16 TB
16 TB
4096 bytes
4 to 8 TB
8 TB
2048 bytes
2 to 4 TB
4 TB
1024 bytes
up to 2 TB
2 TB
512 bytes
Sector Size
At this point, you have the choice of:
•
Format the unpartitioned/unformatted capacity as a second logical drive
•
Delete the existing disk array and create a new one in the desired size
Delete and Recreate
If you require a logical drive larger than the maximum expansion size:
1.
Backup the data from the current logical drive.
2.
Delete the current logical drive.
See page 147 (WebPAM PROe) or page 200 (CLU).
3.
Create a new logical drive with the desired capacity.
See page 145 (WebPAM PROe) or page 198 (CLU).
4.
Restore the data to the new logical drive.
Media Patrol
Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media
on each disk drive. Media Patrol checks all physical drives assigned to disk
arrays. Media Patrol does not check unconfigured drives.
Media Patrol will also check spare drives, if those drives have Media Patrol
enabled. Media Patrol for spare drives is enabled by default. You can disable it in
VTrak’s Command Line Interface (CLI).
Unlike Synchronization and Redundancy Check, Media Patrol is concerned with
the condition of the media itself, not the data recorded on the media. If Media
Patrol encounters a critical error, it triggers PDM if PDM is enabled.
You can run Media Patrol from the subsystem. See “Running Media Patrol” on
page 71 (WebPAM PROe) or page 173 (CLU).
You can also run Media Patrol on a disk array. See “Running Media Patrol on a
Disk Array” on page 149 (WebPAM PROe) or page 195 (CLU).
301
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Predictive Data Migration (PDM)
Predictive Data Migration (PDM) is the migration of data from the suspect disk
drive to a spare disk drive, similar to Rebuilding a Logical Drive. But unlike
Rebuilding, PDM constantly monitors your disk drives and automatically copies
your data to a spare disk drive before the disk drive fails and your Logical Drive
goes Critical.
PDM is triggered automatically, based on Background Activity Settings. See
page 70 for WebPAM PROe or page 216 for the CLU.
You can run PDM manually, See “Running PDM” on page 71 for WebPAM PROe
or page 197 for the CLU.
After the data is copied from the suspect disk drive, the controller marks it with a
Stale configuration and a PFA error.
You can clear the Stale configuration and PFA error and put the disk drive back
into service. See “Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions” on page 134 for WebPAM
PROe or page 187 for the CLU. In some cases, however, you might remove the
disk drive for repair or replacement.
PDM Triggers
The following actions trigger PDM:
•
A disk drive with unhealthy status (see below)
•
Media Patrol finds a disk critical error*
•
You initiate PDM manually
*PDM also counts the number of media errors reported by Media Patrol.
A disk drive becomes unhealthy when:
•
A SMART error is reported
•
The bad sector remapping table fills to the specified level
Because data would be lost if written to a bad sector, when a bad sector is
detected, the disk drive creates a map around it. These maps are saved in the
bad sector remapping table, which has a capacity of 512 reassigned blocks and
1024 error blocks.
When the table fills to a specified percentage of its capacity, PDM triggers a
migration of data from the suspect drive (the disk drive with the bad sectors) to a
spare disk drive.
During data migration, you will have access to the Logical Drive but it will respond
more slowly to read/write tasks because of the additional operation. The time
required for data migration depends on the size of the disk drive.
302
Chapter 7: Technology Background
See “Making Background Activity Settings” on page 70 (WebPAM PROe) or
page 216 (CLU).
Transition
The Transition feature enables you to specify “permanent” spare drives for your
VTrak subsystem. Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive
that is currently part of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a nonrevertible spare. The revertible spare drive returns to its original status.
Transition happens automatically when the following sequence of events takes
place:
•
You create a revertible spare drive.
•
A physical drive assigned to your disk array fails and the array goes critical
or degraded.
•
VTrak automatically rebuilds your array to the revertible spare drive and the
array becomes functional again.
•
You replace the failed physical drive with a new physical drive of equal or
greater capacity.
•
VTrak automatically transitions (moves) the data from the revertible spare to
the new physical drive.
•
The new physical drive becomes part of the array and the revertible spare
drive returns to its original spare status.
See page 160 (WebPAM PROe) or page 201 (CLU).
Transition happens manually when you specify a different unconfigured physical
drive to transition (move) the data from the revertible spare drive.
See the example below.
Example
Following is an example to explain the Transition function.
303
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
In the example above, there is a four-drive RAID 5 disk array and a global spare
drive. Physical drives 1, 2, 3, and 4 belong to the disk array. Physical drive 5
remains unconfigured. Physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive.
If a physical drive fails in a disk array and there is a spare drive of adequate
capacity available, the controller automatically rebuilds the array using the spare
drive. In this example, physical drive 3 failed and the array is rebuilt using
physical drive 6, the revertible spare drive.
When the rebuild is complete, the spare drive has replaced the failed drive. In this
example, failed drive 3 was replaced by spare drive 6. The disk array now
consists of physical drives 1, 2, 4, and 6.
There is no spare drive at this moment. Even if physical drive 5 is of adequate
capacity, it has not been designated as a spare, therefore the controller cannot
use it as a spare.
304
Chapter 7: Technology Background
Automatic Transition
At this juncture, you would replace the failed drive in slot 3 with a new one of the
same or greater capacity.
When the VTrak controller detects the new drive in slot 3, it will:
•
Automatically transition the data on drive 6 to drive 3
•
Return drive 6 to spare status
When the Automatic Transition is finished, physical drives 1, 2, 3, and 4 belong to
the disk array and physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive. The original
configuration is restored.
Manual Transition
If you wanted to use the drive in slot 5 as a member of the disk array, rather than
the drive in slot 3, you would run the Transition function manually. See page 150
(WebPAM PROe) or page 198 (CLU).
When the Manual Transition is finished, physical drives 1, 2, 4, and 5 belong to
the disk array and physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive.
At this point, you would replace the drive in slot 3. The new drive in slot 3 will be
unconfigured until you assign it to a disk array or as a spare.
305
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
306
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
VTrak is Beeping (below)
•
LEDs Display Amber or Red (page 309)
•
CLU Reports a Problem (page 315)
•
WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem (page 318)
•
LEDs Display Amber or Red (page 309)
•
Event Notification Response (page 321)
•
Critical & Offline Disk Arrays (page 336)
•
Incomplete Array (page 339)
•
Physical Drive Problems (page 340)
•
Enclosure Problems (page 342)
•
Controller Enters Maintenance Mode (page 345)
•
Connection Problems (page 348)
•
Browser Does Not Connect to WebPAM PROe (page 351)
•
Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache (page 352)
VTrak is Beeping
VTrak’s alarm has five different patterns, as shown below.
Figure 1. Audible alarm sound patters
1
.25s .25s .25s
2
.25s
3
.25s
4
.25s .25s .25s
.75s
.5s
.25s
.75s
2.5s
.25s
.25s
.5s
6s
.25s
.75s
.25s
1s
.25s
1.25s
.25s
3s
2x
s
8
5
1x
When you first power-up the VTrak, it beeps twice to show normal operation.
The audible alarm sounds at other times to inform you that the VTrak needs
attention. But the alarm does not specify the condition.
307
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
When the alarm sounds:
•
Check the front and back of VTrak for red or amber LEDs, as described
above.
•
If email notification is enabled, check for new messages.
•
Check for yellow !s
•
Check the event log. See page 66 (WebPAM PROe) or page 218 (CLU).
red Xs
in Tree View (see page 318).
When a continuous tone sounds, there are multiple alarm patterns sounding at
the same time.
Silencing the Buzzer
To silence the buzzer for the current trigger event:
1.
Click the Buzzer
icon in the WebPAM PROe Header.
The Buzzer tab appears in Management View.
2.
Click the Mute button.
The buzzer goes silent and the icon disappears. If another trigger event occurs,
the buzzer will sound again.
To make alarm settings or cancel an alarm, see page 129 (WebPAM PROe) or
page 247 (CLU).
308
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
LEDs Display Amber or Red
Front Panel
When the power is switched on, the LEDs on the front of the VTrak will light up.
Figure 2. VTrak front panel LED display. The E310f/s is shown. the E610f/s
is similar
Power
FRU Status
Logical Drive Status
RAID Controller 1 Activity
RAID Controller 2 Activity
Controller Heartbeat
When boot-up is finished and the VTrak is functioning normally:
•
Controller Heartbeat LED blinks once every two seconds.
•
Power, FRU and Logical Drive LEDs display green continuously.
•
The RAID Controller LEDs flash green if there is activity on that controller.
See the table below.
State
LEDs
Dark
Steady
Green
Flashing
Green
Amber
Red
Power
System Off
Normal
—
—
—
FRU*
System Off
Normal
—
Fan, battery Fan, battery
or PSU
or PSU
Problem
Failed
Logical
Drive
System Off
Normal
—
Logical
Logical
Drive Critical Drive Offline
Controller
Activity
No Activity
—
Activity
—
—
Controller
Heartbeat
System Off
—
Normal**
—
—
309
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
* Field Replacement Unit: includes fan, battery, and power supply unit (PSU).
** Blinks once every two seconds.
See page 249 for more information about field-replaceable components.
See page 336 for a discussion of critical and offline logical drives.
Drive Status Indicators
There are two LEDs on each Drive Carrier. They report the presence of power
and a disk drive, and the current condition of the drive.
The VTrak spins up the disk drives sequentially in order to equalize power draw
during start-up. After a few moments the Power/Activity and Disk Status LEDs
should display green.
Figure 3. VTrak drive carrier LEDs
Disk Status
Power/Activity
State
LEDs
Dark
Steady
Green
Flashing
Green
Amber
Red
Power/
Activity
No Drive
Drive
Present
Activity
—
—
Status
No Power/
No Drive
Drive OK
—
Drive
Rebuilding
Drive
Error
See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 336 for a discussion of rebuilding and
failed disk drives.
Back of Enclosure
When the FRU Status LED on VTrak’s front panel shows Amber or Red, check
the LEDs on the back of VTrak. These LEDs give the status of the field
replaceable units.
310
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Figure 4. VTrak E610f rear view
RAID Controller 1
RAID Controller 2
Mgmt
FC 1
4
2
FC 2
Mgmt
UPS
FC 1
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
4
2
115200
8N1
FC 2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
Power Supply 1 Cooling Unit 1 Cooling Unit 2 Power Supply 2
with Battery
with Battery
Figure 5. VTrak E610s rear view
RAID Controller 1
RAID Controller 2
Mgmt
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
UPS
115200
8N1
Power Supply 1 Cooling Unit 1 Cooling Unit 2 Power Supply 2
with Battery
with Battery
311
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 6. VTrak E310f rear view
Cooling Unit 1
Power Supply 1 with Battery
Cooling Unit 2
Power Supply 2
with Battery
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
FC 1
FC 2
4
2
Mgmt
UPS
FC 1
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
4
2
115200
8N1
RAID Controller 1
FC 2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
RAID Controller 2
Figure 7. VTrak E310s rear view
Cooling Unit 1
Power Supply 1 with Battery
Cooling Unit 2
Power Supply 2
with Battery
I
I
O
O
Mgmt
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
UPS
115200
8N1
RAID Controller 1
RAID Controller 2
Figure 8. Battery and Fan LEDs (left: E610f/s, right: E310f/s)
Battery
LED
Fan
LED
Fan LED
Battery LED
312
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Under normal conditions, the power supply and fan LEDs should display green.
LEDs
State
Green
Amber
Red
Power supply
OK
—
No power, Failed
Battery
OK
Less than 72
hours reserve
Not detected, Not
present, Failed
Fan
OK
—
Not detected,
Failed
To check a component’s installation, follow the same procedure as replacing the
component, except that you reinstall the original component rather than a new
one. In most cases, this action fixes a bad connection and allows VTrak to detect
the component. If this action does not correct the problem, replace the unit. See
page 249 for instructions.
The Controller Location LEDs, on the back of the VTrak subsystem, will flash for
one minute.
Figure 9. The VTrak E610f/E310f controller LEDs
Mgmt
FC 1
4
FC 2
2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
Status LED
Dirty Cache LED
Figure 10.The VTrak E610f/E310s controller LEDs
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
Status LED
Dirty Cache LED
313
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Under normal conditions, the Controller Status LED (marked with
icon) is
green and the Dirty Cache LED (marked with
) icon is dark. See the table
below.
State
LEDs
Dark
Green
Amber
Flashing
Amber
Flashing
Red
Status
no power
OK
Surviving
—
Maintenance
Mode
Dirty
Cache
OK
—
Unsaved data
in cache
OK
—
On VTraks with dual controllers, when one controller’s Status LED is amber and
the other controller’s Status LED is flashing red, it means that the controller with
the flashing red LED has entered maintenance mode. See “Controller Enters
Maintenance Mode” on page 345.
If the Controller Status LED continues to display amber after startup, contact
Promise Technical Support. See “Contacting Technical Support” on page 355.
The Dirty Cache LED flashes during input/output operation. If the LED shines
amber and the power is off, there is unsaved data in the cache. Do NOT power
down the VTrak while this LED is on. See “Browser Does Not Connect to
WebPAM PROe” on page 351 for more information.
314
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
CLU Reports a Problem
The CLU reports information passively—you must determine which functions to
check based on the sound of the VTrak’s audible alarm (see page 307) and any
amber or red LEDs (see page 309).
Check the event logs first. Then check the reported component.
Viewing Runtime Events
To display Runtime Events:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Event Viewer and press Enter.
The log of Runtime Events appears. Events are added to the top of the list.
Each item includes:
2.
•
Sequence number – Begins with 0 at system startup.
•
Device – Disk Array, Logical Drive, Physical Drive by its ID number.
•
Severity – (lowest to highest) Information, Warning, Minor, Major,
Critical and Fatal
•
Timestamp – Date and time the event happened.
•
Description – A description of the event in plain language.
Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log.
Viewing NVRAM Events
This screen displays a list of and information about 63 most important events
over multiple subsystem startups.
To display NVRAM events:
1.
From the Main Menu, highlight Event Viewer and press Enter.
2.
Highlight NVRAM Events and press Enter.
The log of NVRAM Events appears. Events are added to the top of the list.
Each item includes:
3.
•
Sequence number – Begins with 0 at system startup.
•
Device – Disk Array, Logical Drive, Physical Drive by its ID number.
•
Severity – See Table 1 on page 316
•
Timestamp – Date and time the event happened.
•
Description – A description of the event in plain language.
Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log.
315
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Table 1 Event severity levels
Level
Meaning
Fatal
Non-Recoverable error or failure has occurred
Critical
Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are
serious
Major
Action is needed now
Minor
Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
Warning
User can decide whether or not action is required
Information
Information only, no action is required
Checking a Reported Component
In this example, let us check disk array status.
1.
Open the CLU.
2.
Highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter.
3.
Observe the status of your disk arrays.
DaId Alias OpStatus CfgCapacity FreeCapacity MaxContiguousCap
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
DA0 OK
75.44GB
66.06GB
66.06GB
1
DA1 Degraded 189.06GB
179.68GB
179.68GB
2
DA2 OK
73.57GB
64.20GB
64.20GB
At this point, you can highlight the Degraded array and press Enter to see more
information. See below.
Disk Array ID
:
OperationalStatus
:
FreeCapacity
:
SupportedRAIDLevels:
Disk Array Alias
MediaPatrol
PDM
1
Degraded
179.68 GB
0 5 10 1E
: DA1
: Enabled
: Enabled
Transport
Rebuild
Predictive Data Migration
Transition
Dedicated Spare Drives in the Array
Physical Drives in the Array
Logical Drives in the Array
316
Physical Capacity
: 189.06GB
MaxContiguousCapacity : 11.18GB
ConfigurableCapacity
: 179.68GB
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
[Locate Disk Array]
Save Settings
[CTRL-A]
Restore Settings
[CTRL-R]
Return to Previous Menu
From this screen:
•
Highlight Physical Drives in the Array and press Enter to identify the failed
disk drive
•
Highlight Rebuild and press Enter to rebuild the array after you replace the
failed disk drive
For more information, see “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 336.
317
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem
WebPAM PROe aids in troubleshooting your logical drives and enclosure by
continuous monitoring and reporting to the User in the following ways:
•
Displays yellow !s
red Xs
in Tree View.
Figure 11. Yellow !s and red Xs in Tree View
•
Sends email messages, per your configuration.
•
Displays popup messages, per your configuration.
To set up email and popup message notification, see “Setting-up Event
Notification” on page 77.
Figure 12.An example of a popup message
•
Keeps a record in the Event Log.
318
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Figure 13.The Event Log
•
Keeps a record in the Event Log.
•
Displays full information in Management View.
319
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 14.A failed disk drive shown in Management View
Auto Rebuild
Replacement Drive
Failed Disk Drive
Critical / Rebuilding Status
Also see these troubleshooting topics:
•
“Event Notification Response” on page 321
•
“Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 336
•
“Frequently Asked Questions” on page 353
320
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Event Notification Response
When you choose Event Notification, WebPAM PROe sends popup and/or email
messages regarding its status. The messages you see depend on your
notification selection and what is currently happening in the VTrak. See “Settingup Event Notification” on page 77.
The table below cites:
•
Reported Events – Events that require you to take action
•
Corrective Actions – The action you should take in response to the event
A list of event categories is shown below.
•
Battery (page 321)
•
Physical Disk (page 328)
•
Blowers (page 322)
•
•
Cache (page 323)
PSU (Power Supply Units)
(page 330)
•
Controller (page 323)
•
PSU Fans (page 330)
•
Disk Array (page 323)
•
RAID Level Migration (page 330)
•
Drive Interface Controller
(page 324)
•
Rebuild (page 331)
•
Redundancy Check (page 332)
•
Enclosure (page 324)
•
Resource (page 332)
•
Event Log (page 324)
•
Spare Check (page 332)
•
Fibre Channel (page 325)
•
Spare Drives (page 333)
•
Host Interface Controller
(page 325)
•
SMART (page 333)
•
Stripe Level Migration (page 333)
•
Logical Drive (page 326)
•
Synchronization (page 334)
•
Media Patrol (page 327)
•
System (VTrak) (page 334)
•
Online Capacity Expansion
(page 327)
•
Transition (page 334)
•
Watermark (page 335)
•
PDM (page 328)
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Battery
Battery temperature is
above the threshold
The battery is too hot. Verify proper airflow around
the through the VTrak. If airflow is OK, replace the
battery. See page 265.
Battery temperature is
normal
Normal.
Battery capacity is below
the threshold
Battery is drained. Run battery reconditioning. See
page 128 or page 183.
321
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Battery capacity is normal Normal.
Battery is discharging
Battery is undergoing reconditioning.
Battery is charging
Battery is being recharged.
Battery reconditioning is
complete
Battery reconditioning is finished.
Battery is malfunctioning
Run battery reconditioning. See page 128 or
page 183. If this message reappears, replace the
battery.
Battery reconditioned
successfully
Battery reconditioning is finished.
Battery reconditioning has Replace the battery. See page 265.
failed
Battery is reaching end of Replace the battery. See page 265.
life
Battery is removed
The battery was disconnected or removed. Reinstall
the battery. See page 265.
Battery charging failed
Replace the battery. See page 265.
Battery reconditioning
started
Battery reconditioning has begun.
Battery recondition
terminated
The battery was disconnected or removed during
reconditioning. Reinstall the battery. See page 265.
Blowers
Blowers have started
Normal.
Blowers have stopped
Verify that the cooling unit is properly installed. If the
blower still does not turn, replace the blowers. See
page 260.
Blower speed is
increased
Check the VTrak for overheating. See page 342.
Blower speed is
decreased
Temporary overheat condition was corrected.
Blowers are NOT
functioning
Replace the blowers. See page 260.
Blowers have been
inserted
Normal.
Blowers have been
removed
Reinstall the cooling unit(s). If the blowers does not
turn, replace the blowers. See page 260.
322
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Reported Event
Blowers are functioning
normally
Corrective Action
Normal.
Blowers are NOT installed Reinstall the cooling unit(s). If the blowers does not
turn, replace the blowers. See page 260.
Blower status is unknown Check for airflow out of the cooling unit. If there is
none, check for proper installation.
Cache
BBU flushing has started
VTrak’s cache is being flushed.
BBU flushing has ended
VTrak’s cache has been flushed.
BBU flushing has failed
VTrak’s cache could not be flushed. Check your
cache flush interval setting. See page 122 or
page 177.
Controller
The controller
The user successfully change controller settings. See
parameter(s) changed by page 122 or page 177.
user
The controller has new
crash information
Check the event logs. See page 66 or page 218.
Controller temperature is
above the threshold/
warning threshold
The VTrak controller is overheating. Check for airflow
around and through the controller, and verify that all
fans are working. Replace fans as needed.
Controller temperature is
above the critical
threshold
The VTrak controller is seriously overheating. Check
for airflow around and through the controller, and
verify that all fans are working. Replace fans as
needed.
Disk Array
New disk array has been
created
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Disk array has been
deleted
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Disk array has been
added
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Disk array has been
removed
The physical drives of the disk array were removed
from the enclosure.
323
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Reported Event
Disk array settings have
been changed
Corrective Action
The user successfully logical drive settings. See
page 154 or page 205.
Drive Interface Controller
Drive-interface controller
found
Normal.
Drive-interface controller
is NOT found
Restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245. If this
message appears repeatedly, contact Technical
Support. See page 355.
Drive-interface
diagnostics has passed
Normal.
Drive-interface
diagnostics has failed
Restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245. If this
message appears repeatedly, contact Technical
Support. See page 355.
Drive-interface controller Drive-to-controller parity error. If this message
has generated a general/ appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See
data parity error.
page 355.
Enclosure
Enclosure temperature is The VTrak is overheating. Check for airflow around
above the threshold/
and through the VTrak, and verify that all fans are
warning threshold
working. Replace fans as needed.
Enclosure temperature is The VTrak is seriously overheating. Check for airflow
around and through the VTrak, and verify that all fans
above the critical
threshold
are working. Replace fans as needed.
Enclosure temperature is Normal.
within the normal range
Event Log
Event logging is enabled
Event logging has been successfully enabled.
Event logging is disabled Event logging has been disabled.
Event log buffer is cleared The event log was cleared.
in RAM
Event log buffer is cleared The non-volatile RAM event log was cleared.
in NVRAM
Event log buffer is cleared The MDD (disk drive) event log was cleared.
in MDD
324
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Fibre Channel
Fibre Channel controller
has detected bus reset
The initiator sent a reset command. If this message
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See
page 355.
Fibre Channel controller Result of user action. Normal.
has received a LUN reset
command.
Fibre Channel controller
has encountered a fatal
error
Restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245. If this
message appears repeatedly, contact Technical
Support. See page 355.
Fibre Channel link is up
FC link connected and ready. Normal.
Fibre Channel link is
down
FC link disconnected or otherwise not working.
Fibre Channel controller
settings have changed
Result of user action. Normal.
Host Interface Controller
Host-interface controller
has detected bus reset
The initiator sent a reset command. If this message
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See
page 355.
Host-interface controller
has encountered an
unrecoverable error
Restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
Host-interface controller
has received an aborttask/ abort task set/clear
task set command.
Result of user action. Normal.
Host-interface controller
has received an clear
ACA command.
Result of clearing an auto contingent alliance
condition. If this message appears repeatedly,
contact Technical Support. See page 355.
Host-interface controller Result of user action. Normal.
has received a LUN reset
command.
Host-interface controller The VTrak rebooted itself. If this message appears
has received a bus reboot repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See page 355.
Host-interface controller
has encountered an
unknown error
An unidentified error occurred. If this message
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See
page 355.
325
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Host-interface controller
has encountered a
system error
A VTrak system error occurred. If this message
appears repeatedly, contact Technical Support. See
page 355.
Host-interface controller
has encountered a fatal
error
Restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245. If this
message appears repeatedly, contact Technical
Support. See page 355.
Host-interface controller
settings have changed
Result of user action. Normal.
Logical Drive
Logical drive initialization Result of user action. Normal.
has started
Logical drive initialization Logical drive is ready to use. Normal.
has completed
Logical drive initialization Initialization paused because of user intervention,
has paused
schedule or a higher priority background activity.
Logical drive initialization Initialization has resumed again after a pause.
has resumed
Logical drive initialization Initialization stopped because of user intervention,
has stopped
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went
critical or offline.
Logical drive initialization Initialization failure due to a failed disk drive. Replace
marks the logical drive
the disk drive, delete and recreate the logical drive.
offline
See page 147 or page 200.
Logical drive initialization System resources are low. Reduce system load or
is aborted due to an
restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
internal error.
Logical drive initialization Initialization has been set manually or by schedule.
is queued
A new logical drive has
been created
Result of user action. Normal.
Logical drive has been
deleted
Result of user action. Normal.
Logical drive has been
placed online
The physical drives of the array are restored to online
status.
Logical drive has been
placed online. Possible
data loss
One or more physical drives in the array went offline.
See page 336.
326
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Logical drive has been set One or more physical drives in the array went offline.
to critical.
See page 336.
Logical drive axle has
been placed online
RAID 50 or 60. One of the axles returned on online
status.
Media Patrol
Media patrol is started
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Media patrol is completed Normal.
Media patrol is paused
Media patrol paused because of user intervention,
schedule or a higher priority background activity.
Media patrol is resumed
Media patrol has resumed again after a pause.
Media patrol is stopped
Media patrol stopped because of user intervention,
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went
critical or offline.
Media patrol is aborted
due to an internal error.
System resources are low. Reduce system load or
restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
Media patrol is queued
Media patrol has been set manually or by schedule.
Media patrol is stopped
internally
Media patrol stopped because the disk array was
deleted or removed.
Online Capacity Expansion
Online capacity
expansion has started
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Online capacity
Normal.
expansion has completed
Online capacity
expansion has paused
Expansion paused because of user intervention,
schedule or higher priority background activity.
Online capacity
expansion has resumed
Expansion has resumed again after a pause or a
reboot.
Online capacity
expansion has stopped
Expansion stopped because of user intervention,
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went
critical or offline.
Online capacity
expansion has
encountered a physical
disk error
Bad block found on a disk drive. Migration will finish.
Check the disk drive check table after migration and
replace disk drive as needed. See page 156 or
page 205.
327
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Online capacity
System resources are low. Reduce system load or
expansion is aborted due restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
to an internal error.
Online capacity
expansion is queued
Synchronization has been set manually or by
schedule.
PDM
PDM is started
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
PDM is completed
Normal.
PDM is paused
PDM paused because of user intervention, schedule
or a higher priority background activity.
PDM is resumed
PDM has resumed again after a pause.
PDM is stopped
PDM stopped because of user intervention, schedule
or the logical drive was deleted or went critical or
offline.
PDM is switched to
rebuild.
PDM changed to rebuild because the logical drive
went critical
PDM is stopped internally The destination drive was removed or used for a
rebuild.
Physical Disk
Physical disk is marked
online
Disk drive restored to normal operation.
Physical disk is marked
online
Disk drive removed from service due to errors. If
necessary, try to force the disk online. See page 135
or page 187.
Physical disk is marked
as dead.
Disk drive failure. Replace the disk drive.
Physical disk has been
reset
Disk drive reset after error and should function
normally.
Physical disk assigned as Result of settings or user action. Normal.
global spare
Physical disk is no longer Result of settings or user action. Normal.
assigned as global spare
Physical disk assigned as Result of settings or user action. Normal.
dedicated spare
328
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Physical disk is no longer Result of settings or user action. Normal.
assigned as dedicated
spare
Physical disk has been
inserted
A disk drive has been inserted into the VTrak
subsystem.
Physical disk has been
removed
A disk drive has been removed from the VTrak
subsystem.
Bad sector is found on
physical disk
Disk drive has a bad sector. The drive should remap
around the bad sector. If this message appears
repeatedly, replace the disk drive.
Error is detected in remap Disk drive has a bad remap sectors. If this message
sectors
appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.
Command times out on
physical drive
Disk drive not responding to commands. If this
message appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.
Physical disk negotiation
speed is decreased.
Disk drive had to reduce its data rate. If this message
appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.
Previously configured disk Disk drive may have failed or was removed from the
is no longer found
enclosure. Replace or reinstall the disk drive as
needed.
A physical disk has
Disk drive experienced an unknown error. If this
encountered an unknown message appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.
(non-ECC) media error.
A physical disk has
encountered PFA
condition
A potentially faulty address or bad sector was found.
A configured dead
physical drive has been
inserted
The disk drive inserted into the VTrak was marked as
dead and will not work on the VTrak. Replace the disk
drive.
A physical drive page 0/1 Result of settings or user action. Normal.
settings have been
changed
Physical disk is marked
as dead due to removal/
failure of reassign
sectors/PFA condition/
forced offline state
Replace the disk drive.
329
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Reported Event
Corrective Action
PSU (Power Supply Units)
PSU is not inserted/has
been removed
A power supply unit is missing from the VTrak.
Reinstall the power supply unit.
PSU is off
A power supply unit is present but turned off. Turn on
he power supply.
PSU is on
Normal.
PSU is installed/
Normal.
operational and turned on
PSU is installed/
A power supply unit is present but turned off. Turn on
operational and turned off he power supply.
PSU is malfunctioning
and turned on/off
Replace the power supply unit.
PSU 12V/5V/3.3V power
is out of the threshold
range
Replace the power supply unit.
PSU 12V/5V/3.3V power
is within the range
Normal.
PSU Fans
PSU fan has turned on.
Normal.
PSU fan has turned off.
Verify that the power supply is turned on. If the fan
still does not turn, replace the power supply. See
page 259.
PSU fan speed increased. Check the VTrak for overheating. See page 342.
PSU fan speed
decreased.
Temporary overheat condition was corrected.
PSU fan is malfunctioning Replace the power supply. See page 259.
PSU fan is functioning
normally
Normal.
PSU fan status is
unknown.
Check for airflow out of the power supply. If there is
none, check for proper installation and turn the power
supply on.
RAID Level Migration
RAID Level migration is
started
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
RAID Level migration is
completed
Normal.
330
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Reported Event
Corrective Action
RAID Level migration is
paused
Migration paused because of user intervention,
schedule or a higher priority background activity.
RAID Level migration is
resumed
Migration has resumed again after a pause.
RAID Level migration is
stopped
Migration stopped because of user intervention,
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went
critical or offline.
RAID Level migration has Bad block found on a disk drive. Migration will finish.
encountered a physical
Check the disk drive check table after migration and
disk error
replace disk drive as needed. See page 156 or
page 205.
RAID Level migration is
System resources are low. Reduce system load or
aborted due to an internal restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
error.
RAID Level migration is
queued
Migration has been set manually or by schedule.
Migration has detected/
cleared stale NV
Watermark
Watermarks are progress markers left as the result of
interrupted RAID migrations. If the watermark was
cleared, migration should finish.
Array was incomplete due RAID migration was interrupted by a shutdown. If
to missing NV Watermark array is online, try migration again. If array is offline,
delete and recreate array. See page 144 or page 193.
Rebuild
Rebuild is started
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Rebuild is completed
Normal.
Rebuild is paused
Rebuild paused because of user intervention,
schedule or a higher priority background activity.
Rebuild is resumed
Rebuild has resumed again after a pause.
Rebuild is stopped
Rebuild stopped because of user intervention,
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or the target
disk drive encountered an error. If rebuild stopped by
user intervention, restart the rebuild. See page 148 or
page 196.
Rebuild stopped internally The logical drive is offline. See page 336.
Rebuild is aborted due to System resources are low. Reduce system load or
an internal error.
restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
Rebuild is queued
Rebuild has been set manually or by schedule.
331
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Reported Event
Rebuild marks logical
drive synchronized upon
rebuild completion
Corrective Action
Result of successful rebuild. Normal.
Redundancy Check
Redundancy Check is
started
Redundancy Check has started manually or by
schedule.
Redundancy Check is
completed
Redundancy Check has finished.
Redundancy Check is
paused
Redundancy Check paused because of user
intervention, schedule or a higher priority background
activity.
Redundancy Check is
resumed
Redundancy Check has resumed again after a
pause.
Redundancy Check is
stopped
Redundancy Check stopped because of user
intervention, schedule or the logical drive was deleted
or went critical or offline.
Redundancy Check is
aborted due to internal
error
System resources are low. Reduce system load or
restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
Redundancy Check
Check the logical drive’s inconsistent block table. See
encountered inconsistent page 156 or page 205. Rebuild the disk array if
block(s)
necessary. See page 148 or page 196.
Redundancy Check task
is queued
Redundancy Check has been set manually or by
schedule.
Redundancy Check task
is stopped internally
The logical drive is offline. See page 336.
Resource
Resource is NOT
available
System resources are low. Reduce system load or
restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
Spare Check
Spare check started on
the given spare drive
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Spare check completed
Normal.
successfully on the given
spare drive
332
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Spare Drives
Physical disk assigned as Result of settings or user action. Normal.
global spare
Physical disk is no longer Result of settings or user action. Normal.
assigned as global spare
Global Spare has been
deleted
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Physical disk assigned as Result of settings or user action. Normal.
dedicated spare
Physical disk is no longer Result of settings or user action. Normal.
assigned as dedicated
spare
Dedicated Spare has
been deleted
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
SMART
SMART error is received
A disk drive reported a SMART error. If this message
appears repeatedly, replace the disk drive.
Stripe Level Migration
Stripe Level migration is
started
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Stripe Level migration is
completed
Normal.
Stripe Level migration is
paused
Migration paused because of user intervention,
schedule or a higher priority background activity.
Stripe Level migration is
resumed
Migration has resumed again after a pause.
Stripe Level migration is
stopped
Migration stopped because of user intervention,
schedule or the logical drive was deleted or went
critical or offline.
Stripe Level migration has Bad block found on a disk drive. Migration will finish.
encountered a physical
Check the disk drive check table after migration and
disk error
replace disk drive as needed. See page 156 or
page 205.
Stripe Level migration is System resources are low. Reduce system load or
aborted due to an internal restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
error.
333
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Reported Event
Stripe Level migration is
queued
Corrective Action
Migration has been set manually or by schedule.
Synchronization
Synchronization is started Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Synchronization is
completed
Normal.
Synchronization is
paused
Synchronization paused because of user
intervention, schedule or higher priority background
activity.
Synchronization is
resumed
Synchronization has resumed again after a pause or
a reboot.
Synchronization is
stopped
Synchronization stopped because of user
intervention, schedule or the logical drive was deleted
or went critical or offline.
Synchronization is
System resources are low. Reduce system load or
aborted due to an internal restart the VTrak. See page 119 or page 245.
error.
Synchronization is
queued
Synchronization is already running on another logical
drive in the same array.
Synchronization is
stopped internally
Synchronization stopped because the disk array was
deleted or removed.
System (VTrak)
The system is started
The VTrak has been started.
The system is stopped
The VTrak was shut down.
Transition
Transition is started
Result of settings or user action. Normal.
Transition is completed
Normal.
Transition is paused
Transition paused because of user intervention,
schedule or a higher priority background activity.
Transition is resumed
Transition has resumed again after a pause.
Transition is stopped
Transition stopped because of user intervention or
the logical drive was deleted.
Transition was switched
to rebuild
Transition changed to rebuild because the logical
drive went critical.
334
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Reported Event
Corrective Action
Watermark
Migration has detected/
cleared stale NV
Watermark
Watermarks are progress markers left as the result of
interrupted RAID migrations. If the watermark was
cleared, migration should finish.
Array was incomplete due RAID migration was interrupted by a shutdown. If
to missing NV Watermark array is online, try migration again. If array is offline,
delete and recreate array. See page 144 or page 193.
335
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Critical & Offline Disk Arrays
A fault-tolerant disk array—RAID 1, 1E, 5, 10, and 50—goes critical when a disk
drive is removed or fails. A RAID 6 or 60 disk array—goes degraded when a disk
drive is removed or fails and critical when two disk drives are removed of fail.
Due to the fault tolerance of the disk array, the data is still available and online.
However, once the disk array goes critical, the disk array has lost its fault
tolerance, and performance may be adversely affected.
If the fault was caused by a failed drive that was removed, the drive must be
replaced by another drive, either identical or larger, in order for the RAID system
to rebuild and restore optimal configuration.
If your fault-tolerant disk array—RAID 1, 1E, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60— goes offline,
contact Promise Technical Support. See “Contacting Technical Support” on
page 355.
Warning
Take no further corrective action until you have consulted with
Promise Technical Support.
A non-fault tolerant disk array—RAID 0—goes offline when a disk drive is
removed or fails. Since the disk array is not fault tolerant, the data stored in the
disk array is no longer accessible.
If one disk drive fails, all of the data on the disk array is lost. You must replace the
failed drive. Then, if the disk array had more than one disk drive, delete the disk
array and re-create it. Restore the data from a backup source.
When a Physical Drive Fails
VTrak provides both audible and visual indicators to alert you of a disk drive
failure. The following events occur when a disk drive fails or goes offline:
•
The Logical Drive LED changes from green to amber. See page 309.
•
The Disk Carrier Status LED changes from green to red. See page 310.
•
The audible alarm repeatedly sounds two short beeps. See page 307.
•
WebPAM PROe reports the condition. See page 318.
Also see “Physical Drive Problems” on page 340.
With a Hot Spare Drive
When a physical drive in a disk array fails and a spare drive of adequate capacity
is available, the disk array will begin to rebuild automatically using the spare
drive.
336
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
After the disk array rebuilds itself using the spare drive, you must replace the
failed drive.
To set up a spare drive, see “Creating a Spare Drive” on page 160 (WebPAM
PROe) or page 201 (CLU).
Without a Hot Spare Drive
If there is no hot spare drive of adequate capacity, you must remove the failed
drive and install an unconfigured replacement drive of the same or greater
capacity in the same slot as the failed drive. Until you install the replacement
drive, the logical drive will remain Degraded.
•
If the Auto Rebuild function is ENABLED, the disk array will begin to rebuild
automatically as soon as you replace the failed drive.
•
If the Auto Rebuild function is DISABLED, you must manually rebuild the
disk array after you replace the failed drive.
To enable Automatic Rebuild, see “Making Background Activity Settings” on
page 70 (WebPAM PROe) or page 216 (CLU).
To set Hot Spare Policy, see “Making Spare Drive Settings” on page 161
(WebPAM PROe) or page 202 (CLU).
Important
If your replacement disk drive was formerly part of a different disk
array or logical drive, you must clear the configuration data on the
replacement drive before you use it.
See “Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions” on page 134 (WebPAM
PROe) or page 187 (CLU).
Rebuild Operation
During rebuild:
•
The alarm sounds a single short beep, repeated
•
No warning icon displays over the Disk Array or Logical Drive in the Tree.
Management View reports the Disk Array’s Operational Status as OK,
Rebuilding.
•
The drive carrier holding the rebuilding physical drive displays a green
Activity (lower) LED while the Status (upper) LED flashes green once per
second.
337
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 15.Drive carrier LEDs
Status
Activity
During rebuilding, you can still read and write data to the logical drive. However,
fault tolerance is lost until the Disk Array returns to OK (not-rebuilding) status.
After a successful rebuild:
•
The alarm is silent
•
The Disk Array’s Operational Status as OK
•
The rebuilt disk drive Status LED displays steady green
338
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Incomplete Array
An incomplete array can result from any of the following conditions:
•
The NVRAM watermark for the RAID level migration currently in progress is
missing or cannot be found
•
A physical drive goes missing during transport
See “Physical Drive Failed” on page 340 for more information.
When VTrak discovers an incomplete array, WebPAM PROe displays a dialog
box asking you to:
•
Click the OK button to accept the incomplete array
•
Click the Cancel button to reject the incomplete array
Before you accept the incomplete array, be sure all of the physical drives are
present and that their drive carriers are properly installed into the enclosure. See
“Installing Disk Drives” on page 15.
Accepting an Incomplete Array
If you choose to accept the incomplete array:
1.
Click OK in the incomplete array dialog box.
2.
Check the operational status of the logical drives in the array.
3.
•
If the logical drives are critical or degraded, proceed with a rebuild.
See “Rebuilding a Disk Array” on page 148 or page 196.
•
If the logical drives are offline, contact Technical Support.
See “Contacting Technical Support” on page 355.
Restore your data from a backup source, if required.
The CLU displays the option Accept Incomplete Array on the Disk Array Info and
Settings screen. Highlight the option and press Enter to accept the incomplete
array.
Rejecting an Incomplete Array
If you choose NOT to accept the incomplete array:
1.
Click Cancel in the incomplete array dialog box.
2.
Do one of the following:
•
Delete the array. See “Deleting a Disk Array” on page 144 or page 193.
•
Replace the missing physical drive.
339
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Physical Drive Problems
Physical Drive Offline
Check the drive for:
•
PFA Condition – Caused by a bad block or sector.
See “Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions” on page 134 or page 187.
•
Stale Configuration – Caused by obsolete array information on the physical
drive. Identify the disk array to which the physical drive belongs. Then delete
the disk array. See “Deleting a Disk Array” on page 144 or page 193.
If the error condition remains on the physical drive, clear the error condition.
See “Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions” on page 134 or page 187.
Physical Drive Not Usable
This condition occurs when you have:
•
Two controllers in your VTrak subsystem and a SATA drive without an
AAMUX adapter. See “AAMUX Adapter” on page 16.
•
A missing or defective SAS cable between the VTrak subsystem and a
JBOD enclosure.
Physical Drive Failed
When physical drive status shows failed, the physical drive cannot be repaired.
You must replace the failed drive.
Physical Drive Fails during Migration
VTrak has two methods for migrating a disk array:
•
DDF – The default setting. Slower but reliable
•
NVRAM – An optional setting that requires special access. Faster but risks
data loss
Normally, RAID level migration is done under the default Disk Data Format (DDF)
setting. If a physical drive or the controller fails during migration, the disk array
goes critical, and you can rebuild it. Migration under DDF can take up to several
hours depending on the number and size of the physical drives and data input/
output activity.
You can set the VTrak to migrate disk arrays under Non-Volatile Random Access
Memory (NVRAM), a much faster process because it writes data to the memory
in the controller. However, if a physical drive or the controller fails during
migration, the logical drives will go offline and you will lose data. See “Incomplete
Array” on page 339.
340
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Because the setting for migration under NVRAM requires special access, most
users will not encounter this condition.
Physical Drive Fails during Transport
Transport is the action of moving the physical drives of a disk array:
•
To different slots in the same VTrak enclosure
•
From one VTrak enclosure to another
If a physical drive fails during a transport, or you do not move all of the physical
drives to their new locations, WebPAM PROe will display an incomplete array.
See “Incomplete Array” on page 339.
341
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Enclosure Problems
WebPAM PROe displays yellow !s
components that need attention.
red Xs
in Tree View to identify
When a yellow ! appears over a Subsystem
in Tree View, click the Enclosure
icon. The Enclosure screen displays. See Figure 16.
Figure 16.Enclosure information in Management View
In this example, a power supply has failed. The Enclosure Diagram displays color
and motion changes to identify the failed power supply. In this case, you must
replace the power supply. See “Replacing a Power Supply” on page 259.
Note that the image above was shortened to fit on the page.
342
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Overheating
Overheating is a potentially serious condition because the
excessively high temperatures can lead to disk drive failure and
controller malfunction.
Overheating usually results from:
•
Fan failure
•
Poor air circulation around the enclosure
WebPAM PROe reports failed fans along with elevated
temperature. On VTrak, there are two kinds of fans:
•
Power supply
•
Cooling unit
If a power supply fan fails, you must replace the power supply. If
a cooling unit fan fails, you can remove the cooling unit and
replace only the fan itself.
No tools are required for either procedure. See “Replacing a
Power Supply” on page 259 and “Replacing a Cooling Unit Fan or
Blower” on page 260.
Air circulation around the VTrak enclosure may be a more
complex problem. Use the thermometer icons to help you locate
the specific hot spot. Check for these conditions:
•
Accumulated dust or objects blocking the fans
•
Less than a minimum of 5 inches (13 cm) space between the
back of the VTrak and the wall or other object
•
Ambient temperature above 95°F (35°C) where the VTrak is
operating
To cool down a VTrak:
•
Correct any problems identified above
•
Power it down and let it sit for an hour or longer
343
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Power Supplies
VTrak subsystems are equipped with redundant power supplies.
The advantage of dual power supplies is that, should one fail, the
other will continue powering the subsystem until the faulty one
can be replaced. The subsystem is capable of operating on a
single power supply. As a result, if one power supply fails you
must watch the front panel LEDs or WebPAM PROe in order to
become aware of the condition.
The power supplies are hot-swappable, meaning you can leave
the subsystem running when you replace the bad one. Be careful,
however, to remove the faulty power supply and not the good
one, or the subsystem comes to an immediate stop and your data
is unavailable until the subsystem is powered and booted again.
As noted above, if a power supply fan fails, you must replace the
power supply. Without the fan to cool it, the power supply
overheats and eventually fails anyway.
No tools are required for the procedure. See “Replacing a Power
Supply” on page 259.
Battery
VTrak subsystems use a battery as backup power for the cache.
Should a power failure occur, the battery enables the cache to
hold data up to 72 hours. The battery recharges during normal
subsystem operation.
In most cases, installing a replacement battery will correct a
marginal or failed condition. The battery is located in the cooling
unit above the controller. Remove the cooling unit for access. The
battery is hot-swappable.
No tools are required for the procedure. See “Replacing a Cache
Battery” on page 265.
Also see “Reconditioning a Battery” on page 128 or page 183.
344
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Controller Enters Maintenance Mode
For VTraks with two controllers, one of the controllers will enter maintenance
mode in the event of a problem with the controller. When a controller enters
maintenance mode, it goes offline and it displays N/A (not accessible) under
Readiness Status.
You must take the following actions:
•
Find and correct the cause of the problem (see below)
•
Take the controller out of maintenance mode (see page 346)
Finding and Correcting the Cause of the Problem
Make the following external checks to your VTrak system. Be sure that:
•
Both controllers are present, fully inserted into their slots, and locked into
place.
•
The controllers match, meaning both are Fibre Channel or both are SAS.
•
All data cables to external JBOD enclosures in good condition and are
securely attached.
A disconnected data cable to an external JBOD enclosure causes the two
controllers to see a different set of configured drives. This condition is the
most common cause of a controller entering maintenance mode.
If all external checks are OK, take the following actions:
1.
Shut down the VTrak.
2.
Remove one of the controllers.
3.
Restart the VTrak.
4.
After the VTrak is fully booted, access the CLI, the CLU, or WebPAM PROe.
5.
Observe and record the following information about the first controller:
•
Memory size
•
Hardware version
•
Firmware version
To view this information in WebPAM PROe, click the Controller
Information tab.
6.
Shut down the VTrak.
7.
Remove the first controller and install the second controller.
8.
Repeat steps 3 through 6.
9.
Compare your records.
10. Correct any differences between the two controllers.
345
icon,
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Taking a Controller out of Maintenance Mode
If you shut down the VTrak in the process of correcting the problem, the controller
boots into normal mode when the VTrak restarts. No further action is required.
If you corrected the problem without shutting down the VTrak, choose one of the
following methods to take the controller out of maintenance mode:
•
Reboot the VTrak
•
Establish a serial connection, then use the CLI (see below)
•
Establish a Telnet connection, then use the CLI (see page 347)
Serial Connection
To clear maintenance mode using a serial connection:
1.
Change your terminal emulation program settings to match the following
specifications:
•
Bits per second: 115200
•
Data bits: 8
•
Parity: None
•
Stop bits: 1
•
Flow control: none
2.
Start your PC’s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program.
3.
Press Enter once to launch the CLI.
The login screen appears.
The following steps show the default Administrator user name and
password. Use your own user name and password if you have changed
these.
4.
5.
At the Login prompt, type administrator and press Enter.
At the Password prompt, type password and press Enter.
The CLI screen appears.
The prompt should display MAINTENANCE MODE@cli>. If the prompt
displays your login name, such as administrator@cli>, log into the other
controller.
6.
At the MAINTENANCE MODE@cli> prompt, type maintenance -a exit and
press Enter.
The controller reboots. The login screen again appears.
7.
Close the Serial connection.
346
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Telnet Connection
This procedure requires you to know the IP address of the controller.
To clear maintenance mode using a Telnet connection:
1.
Go to the command line prompt (Windows) or click the terminal icon (Linux),
then run:
telnet 192.168.1.56 2300
The IP address above is only an example. 2300 is the Telnet port for VTrak.
The login screen appears.
The following steps show the default Administrator user name and
password. Use your own user name and password if you have changed
these.
2.
At the Login prompt, type administrator and press Enter.
3.
At the Password prompt, type password and press Enter.
The CLI screen appears.
The prompt should display MAINTENANCE MODE@cli>. If the prompt
displays your login name, such as administrator@cli>, log into the other
controller.
4.
At the MAINTENANCE MODE@cli> prompt, type maintenance -a exit and
press Enter.
The controller reboots. The Telnet session ends.
347
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Connection Problems
When you install your Promise product following the instructions in the Quick
Start Guide and this Product Manual, you should have little trouble getting your
equipment to work the first time. But connection problems can arise that are not
the User's or Installer's fault. Every conceivable problem cannot be covered in
this documentation but some guidelines could be helpful.
Connection problems cause a majority of failures in almost any electrical system.
While the installation of the cables and components was correct, they don't
function properly, or at all, because:
•
A connector is dirty or corroded
•
A connector is loose or damaged
•
A cable looks OK outside but has an open circuit inside
•
The wrong cable was used
VTraks ship with a full set of new cables, as required for each specific model. Be
sure to use these components because: 1.) They are the proper ones for your
RAID subsystem, 2.) They are in brand-new condition, and 3.) You paid for them
with the purchase of your subsystem.
Serial Connections
VTrak uses a serial connection for the command line interface (CLI) and the
command line utility (CLU). After you set the IP address, you can access the CLI
and CLU through a network connection, also. Normally, users prefer WebPAM
PROe because of its graphic user interface. But the CLI and CLU can do the
same jobs. And they will work when your network connection is down.
For VTrak, you must use the CLI or CLU to set the Management Port IP address
in order for WebPAM PROe to connect with it. See “Setting up the Serial
Connection” on page 39. This issue is discussed further under Network
Connections, below. See “Setting Up Serial Cable Connections” on page 36 for
more information on making the connection.
The CLI and CLU control and manage but they do not move data. They
communicates through a null-modem cable, supplied with the VTrak. A straightthrough serial cable will not work for this purpose. You may choose not use the
CLI or CLU often and want to disconnect and store the cable. Consider leaving it
connected, to be sure it will be there when you need it.
Network Connections
Each controller has an Ethernet (RJ45) Management Port connector on the back
of the enclosure. This is a Gigabit Ethernet connector designed to connect to
348
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
your network. The VTrak becomes a node on your network like any other PC,
server or other component with an IP address.
VTrak ships from the factory IP addresses of 10.0.0.1, 10.0.0.2, and 10.0.0.3.
You must change these addresses to ones that work on your network. You make
the initial IP address setting using the CLI or CLU. See “Setting up the Serial
Connection” on page 39.
Figure 17.Management port connection on the RAID controller
Connectivity LED
Activity LED
Mgmt
State
LEDs
Dark
Amber
Green
Connectivity
10BaseT
1000BaseT
100BaseT
Activity
No activity
Flashing Green
Activity
Note that VTrak’s virtual and maintenance ports can accept IP address
assignments from a DHCP server. Use VTrak’s Command Line Utility (CLU) to
enable this feature.
If you manually assigned an IP address to the VTrak but there is a DHCP server
on your network, there is a chance that the server might assign the VTrak’s IP
address to another node. You might see a warning to this effect on your PC’s
monitor. If this happens, WebPAM PROe may not be able to connect. See your
network administrator to work out a suitable arrangement.
Fibre Channel Connections
When there is a connection failure, use WebPAM PROe to verify that VTrak sees
the initiator(s). See “Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators” on page 88 or page 213.
If VTrak sees some initiators but not the one you want, the problem is most likely
elsewhere in the loop or fabric. If VTrak does not see any initiators:
•
Check all of the Fibre Channel connections
•
Verify that all nodes are properly connected and powered
•
Verify that the fabric router or switch is properly connected powered
For more information, see “Managing Fibre Channel Connections” on page 84 or
page 210.
349
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
SAS Connections
Faulty SAS connections are suspected when the link port counter reports a large
number of bad link errors. See “Viewing SAS Port Statistics” on page 91 or
page 215.
Link errors can be caused by:
•
Debris blocking the SAS cable connector
•
A faulty SAS cable
•
A faulty controller or I/O module SAS connector
Blocked Cable Connectors
To check for debris blocking the SAS cable connector:
1.
Power down the RAID head and JBOD subsystems.
2.
Remove the SAS cable and check all SAS connectors for debris.
3.
Clean the connectors as required and reconnect the SAS cable.
4.
Power up the subsystems and monitor the link port counter for changes in
the rate of link error accumulation.
Faulty Cable
To check for a faulty SAS cable:
1.
Power down the RAID head and JBOD subsystems.
2.
Replace the SAS cable with a new one.
3.
Power up the subsystems and monitor the link port counter for changes in
the rate of link error accumulation.
Faulty Controller or I/O Module Connector
To check for a bad controller or I/O module SAS connector:
1.
With the subsystems online and I/Os running, access the CLI via serial or
Telnet.
See “Initial Connection” on page 166.
2.
At the administrator@cli> prompt, type the following command and press
Enter.
sasdiag -a errorlog -l expander -e 1 -i 1
3.
At the administrator@cli> prompt, type the following command and press
Enter.
sasdiag -a errorlog -l c2cport
By interpreting the two error logs, you can verify which controller or I/O
module SAS port is accumulating link errors.
350
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Browser Does Not Connect to WebPAM PROe
If you successfully setup and connected to WebPAM PROe, then suddenly you
can no longer connect, it might be the result of the following three conditions:
•
DHCP is enabled on your VTrak’s virtual management port
•
The DHCP server does not have a dedicated IP address for the VTrak
•
The VTrak restarted and your DHCP server assigned a new IP address
You must obtain the new IP Address for the virtual management port in order to
direct your browser to the VTrak and start WebPAM PROe.
To access the new IP address:
1.
Start your PC’s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program.
2.
Press Enter once to launch the CLI.
3.
At the Login prompt, type administrator and press Enter.
4.
At the Password prompt, type password and press Enter.
5.
Type net and press Enter.
administrator@cli> net
===========================================
CId Port Type IP
Mask
Gateway
Link
===========================================
Virtual
Mgmt 192.168.10.85 255.255.255.0 192.168.10.1 Up
The new virtual management port IP address and other network settings
display.
6.
Enter the new IP address into your browser to log into WebPAM PROe.
For more information, see “Setting up the Serial Connection” on page 39 and
“Logging into WebPAM PROe” on page 46.
351
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache
An LED (marked with the
icon) is provided to inform you that there is data in
the cache that has not been saved to non-volatile memory. Such data is
sometimes called “dirty,” not to suggest it is corrupted in some way but because it
has not been saved to a disk drive.
Figure 18.The VTrak E610f/E310f dirty cache LED
Mgmt
FC 1
4
FC 2
2
UPS
4
2
1
1
Gb/s
Gb/s
115200
8N1
Dirty Cache LED
Figure 19.The VTrak E610s/E310s dirty cache LED
Mgmt
UPS
115200
8N1
Dirty Cache LED
If there is unsaved data in the controller’s cache, the Dirty Cache LED shines
amber. During this time, do NOT power down the VTrak. Wait until the LED will
goes dark.
352
Chapter 9: Support
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Frequently Asked Questions (below)
•
Contacting Technical Support (page 355)
•
Limited Warranty (page 358)
•
Returning the Product For Repair (page 360)
Frequently Asked Questions
What kind of disk drives can I use with VTrak?
VTrak supports 1.5 and 3.0 GB/s Serial ATA disk drives and 3.0 Gb/s SAS
drives. VTrak E-Class does not support Parallel ATA (PATA) disk drives.
How can I tell when the VTrak has fully booted?
When the VTrak is fully booted up, the Power and FRU LEDs will light up
green. If a disk array is present, the Logical Drive LED will light up green
also. The Controller heartbeat LED blinks once every two seconds.
Why does VTrak come with a Command Line Utility?
First, to assign your VTrak an IP address in order for the WebPAM PROe
management software to connect to it. Second, in the event of a network
failure, you can still access the VTrak. Third, some users prefer the
Command Line Utility.
Why are all the disk drives in my JBOD marked Dead?
This condition happens when the JBOD expansion subsystem is
disconnected from the RAID subsystem, powered off while the RAID
subsystem is running, or powered on after the RAID subsystem was
powered on. Use the force online function to restore the disk drives. See
page 135 or page 187.
WebPAM PROe was working OK. But then it timed out. What do I do now?
The network connection can time-out for several reasons. When an open
connection has no action for a specific amount of time, the connection timesout automatically for security reasons. When you attempt to use WebPAM
PROe, it returns to the login screen.
At the login screen, all you need to do is click the Login button.
Have your administrator change the Web Server session timeout interval.
See “Making Web Server Settings” on page 100 or page 230.
353
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
With other Promise VTraks, I used a server’s IP address in WebPAM PRO to
connect with the RAID subsystem. Why is this VTrak E-Class different?
VTrak E-Class has the server software embedded. With the E-Class, you
point your browser directly to the VTrak subsystem. WebPAM PROe is preinstalled on the VTrak and launches automatically.
I can access the VTrak over my company’s intranet. But I can’t access it
from an outside Internet connection. How do I make the Internet connection
work?
This condition is not related to VTrak, but is due to your firewall and network
connection protocol. Contact your MIS Administrator.
Why can a RAID 1 logical drive on VTrak consist of only two disk drives?
On VTrak, RAID 1 logical drives work in mirrored physical drive pairs. You
could create up to eight RAID 1 logical drives. Or you can create a single
RAID 1E or RAID 10 logical drive with data mirroring and up to 16 physical
drives.
See “Installing Disk Drives” on page 15 and “Introduction to RAID” on
page 273 for more information on the number of physical drives you can use
for each RAID level.
Are logical drives on VTrak limited to 2 TB?
No. But verify that your operating system supports logical drives over 2 TB.
Also, for the operating system to recognize the full capacity of logical drives
over 2 TB, you must specify a sector size of 1 KB or larger when you create
the logical drive. See “Choosing Sector Size” on page 287 or more
information.
How can I be sure everything is working OK on the VTrak?
Locally: The VTrak enclosure has LEDs on the front to monitor the status of
power, field replaceable units (FRUs) and logical drives. When these are
green, VTrak is functioning normally.
Remotely: Check the Tree Icons in WebPAM. If there are no yellow or red
warning icons displayed, VTrak is functioning normally.
Can VTrak run using just one power supply?
Yes, it is possible to run VTrak on a single power supply. There are
redundant power supplies so that VTrak can continue running if one of them
fails. But deliberately leaving one power supply off negates this advantage.
In addition, leaving one power supply off reduces air flow through the VTrak
enclosure and can contribute to overheating. Always switch on both power
supplies.
354
Chapter 9: Support
What happens if a logical drive goes critical?
On the front of VTrak, the logical drive LED turns amber and the buzzer
sounds (if enabled). See “Critical & Offline Disk Arrays” on page 336.
VTrak’s Netsend service does not report all events to Windows PCs.
This condition results from a shortcoming in Windows Messenger that
causes miscommunication with Netsend. Promise is developing a
workaround at the time of this writing. Note that all events are correctly
reported in the Event Viewer.
Contacting Technical Support
Promise Technical Support provides several support options for Promise users to
access information and updates. We encourage you to use one of our electronic
services, which provide product information updates for the most efficient service
and support.
If you decide to contact us, please have the following information available:
•
Product model and serial number
•
BIOS, firmware, and driver version numbers
•
A description of the problem / situation
•
System configuration information, including: motherboard and CPU type,
hard drive model(s), SAS/SATA/ATA/ATAPI drives & devices, and other
controllers.
Technical Support Services
Promise Online™ Web Site
http://www.promise.com/support/
support_eng.asp.
(technical documents, drivers, utilities, etc.)
United States
E-mail Support
e-Support On-Line
Fax Support
+1 408 228 1100 Attn: Technical Support
Phone Support
+1 408 228 1400 option 4
If you wish to write us for
support:
Promise Technology, Inc.
580 Cottonwood Drive
Milpitas, CA 95035, USA
355
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
The Netherlands
E-mail Support
e-Support On-Line
Fax Support
+31 0 40 256 9463 Attn: Technical Support
Phone Support
+31 0 40 235 2600
If you wish to write us for
support:
Promise Technology Europe B.V.
Science Park Eindhoven 5542
5692 EL Son, The Netherlands
Germany
E-mail Support
e-Support On-Line
Fax Technical Support
+49 0 2 31 56 76 48 29
Attn: Technical Support
Phone Technical Support
+49 0 2 31 56 76 48 10
If you wish to write us for
support:
Promise Technology Germany
Europaplatz 9
44269 Dortmund, Germany
E-mail Support
e-Support On-Line
Fax Support
+39 0 6 367 124 00 Attn: Technical Support
Phone Support
+39 0 6 367 126 26
If you wish to write us for
support:
Promise Technology Italy
Piazza del Popolo 18
00187 Roma, Italia
Italy
356
Chapter 9: Support
Taiwan
E-mail Support
e-Support On-Line
Fax Support
+886 3 578 2390 Attn: Technical Support
Phone Support
+886 3 578 2395 ext. 8822 or 8823
If you wish to write us for
support:
Promise Technology, Inc.
2F, No. 30, Industry E. Rd. IX
Science-based Industrial Park
Hsin-Chu 30075, Taiwan (R.O.C.)
China
E-mail Support
e-Support On-Line
Fax Support
+86 10 8857 8015 Attn: Technical Support
Phone Support
+86 10 8857 8085 or 8095
If you wish to write us for
support:
Promise Technology China – Beijing
Room 1205, Tower C
Webok Time Center, No.17
South Zhong Guan Cun Street
Hai Dian District, Beijing 100081, China
E-mail Support
e-Support On-Line
Fax Support
+86 21 6249 4627 Attn: Technical Support
Phone Support
+86 21 6249 4192, 4193, or 4199
If you wish to write us for
support:
Promise Technology China – Shanghai
Room 508, Leader Tower
1189 West Wu Ding Road
Jing An District, Shanghai 200042, China
357
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Limited Warranty
Promise Technology, Inc. (“Promise”) warrants that this product, from the time of
the delivery of the product to the original end user:
a)
all components, except the cache backup battery, for a period of three
(3) years;
b)
the cache backup battery, for a period of one (1) year;
c)
will conform to Promise’s specifications;
d)
will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use
and service.
This warranty:
a)
applies only to products which are new and in cartons on the date of
purchase;
b)
is not transferable;
c)
is valid only when accompanied by a copy of the original purchase
invoice.
d)
Is not valid on spare parts.
This warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from:
a)
improper or inadequate maintenance, or unauthorized modification(s),
performed by the end user;
b)
operation outside the environmental specifications for the product;
c)
accident, misuse, negligence, misapplication, abuse, natural or
personal disaster, or maintenance by anyone other than a Promise or a
Promise-authorized service center.
Disclaimer of other warranties
This warranty covers only parts and labor, and excludes coverage on software
items as expressly set above.
Except as expressly set forth above, Promise DISCLAIMS any warranties,
expressed or implied, by statute or otherwise, regarding the product, including,
without limitation, any warranties for fitness for any purpose, quality,
merchantability, non-infringement, or otherwise. Promise makes no warranty or
representation concerning the suitability of any product for use with any other
item. You assume full responsibility for selecting products and for ensuring that
the products selected are compatible and appropriate for use with other goods
with which they will be used.
358
Chapter 9: Support
Promise DOES NOT WARRANT that any product is free from errors or that it will
interface without problems with your computer system. It is your responsibility to
back up or otherwise save important data before installing any product and
continue to back up your important data regularly.
No other document, statement or representation may be relied on to vary the
terms of this limited warranty.
Promise’s sole responsibility with respect to any product is to do one of the
following:
a)
replace the product with a conforming unit of the same or superior
product;
b)
repair the product.
Promise shall not be liable for the cost of procuring substitute goods, services,
lost profits, unrealized savings, equipment damage, costs of recovering,
reprogramming, or reproducing of programs or data stored in or used with the
products, or for any other general, special, consequential, indirect, incidental, or
punitive damages, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, notwithstanding the
failure of the essential purpose of the foregoing remedy and regardless of
whether Promise has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Promise
is not an insurer. If you desire insurance against such damage, you must obtain
insurance from another party.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages for consumer products, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
This warranty gives specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that
vary from state to state. This limited warranty is governed by the State of
California.
Your Responsibilities
You are responsible for determining whether the product is appropriate for your
use and will interface with your equipment without malfunction or damage. You
are also responsible for backing up your data before installing any product and
for regularly backing up your data after installing the product. Promise is not liable
for any damage to equipment or data loss resulting from the use of any product.
359
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Returning the Product For Repair
If you suspect a product is not working properly, or if you have any questions
about your product, contact our Technical Support Staff through one of our
Technical Services, making sure to provide the following information:
•
Product model and serial number (required)
•
Return shipping address
•
Daytime phone number
•
Description of the problem
•
Copy of the original purchase invoice
The technician will assist you in determining whether the product requires repair.
If the product needs repair, the Technical Support Department will issue an RMA
(Return Merchandise Authorization) number.
Important
Obtain an RMA number from Technical Support before you return
the product and write the RMA number on the label. The RMA
number is essential for tracking your product and providing the
proper service.
Return ONLY the specific product covered by the warranty. Do not ship cables,
manuals, diskettes, etc.
USA and Canada:
Promise Technology, Inc.
Customer Service Dept.
Attn.: RMA # ______
47654 Kato Road
Fremont, CA 94538
Other Countries:
Return the product to your dealer
or retailer.
Contact them for instructions
before shipping the product.
You must follow the packaging guidelines for returning products:
•
Use the original shipping carton and packaging
•
Include a summary of the product’s problem(s)
•
Write an attention line on the box with the RMA number
•
Include a copy of your proof of purchase
360
Chapter 9: Support
You are responsible for the cost of insurance and shipment of the product to
Promise. Note that damage incurred due to improper transport or packaging is
not covered under the Limited Warranty.
When repairing returned product(s), Promise may replace defective parts with
new or reconditioned parts, or replace the entire unit with a new or reconditioned
unit. In the event of a replacement, the replacement unit will be under warranty
for the remainder of the original warranty term from purchase date, or 30 days,
whichever is longer.
Promise will pay for standard return shipping charges only. You will be required to
pay for any additional shipping options, such as express shipping.
361
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
362
Appendix A: Useful Information
The appendix covers the following topics:
•
SNMP MIB Files (below)
•
Adding a Second Controller (page 363)
SNMP MIB Files
Promise supplies two MIB files to integrate the VTrak E610f/s or E310f/s
subsystem into your SNMP system. These files are in the SNMP folder on the
VTrak Product CD.
The MIB files are:
•
FCMGMT-MIB.mib
•
raidv4.mib
For help loading the MIB files, see the instructions that came with your MIB
browser.
Adding a Second Controller
If your VTrak E-Class subsystem shipped with one controller, you can add a
second controller. The second controller must have:
•
The same Firmware version as the currently installed controller
•
The same amount of SDRAM as the currently installed controller
To obtain this information for the currently installed controller, click the Controller
icon, Information tab, and look for Firmware Version and Memory Size.
Obtain your second controller though Promise Technology. Promise Support will
prepare the new controller with Firmware and SDRAM to match your current
VTrak subsystem.
When you order the second controller, you should also order a second cache
battery to power the new controller’s cache in the event of a power failure.
The VTrak subsystem boots its controllers sequentially. With a second controller
installed, your subsystem will take about a minute longer to boot. This condition is
normal.
Installing a Second Controller
To install a second controller in your VTrak subsystem:
1.
Shut down the subsystem.
2.
Remove the blank cover from the right controller slot.
363
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
3.
4.
Carefully slide the new controller into the slot until the handle locks in place.
Attach your data and management cables to the new controller, as needed.
See the “Making Management and Data Connections” on page 19 for cable
connection information.
5.
Power up the subsystem and launch WebPAM PROe.
6.
Click the Controllers
Management view.
7.
icon in the Tree, then look at the Information tab in
•
If both controllers’ Operational Status is OK, the installation was
successful.
•
If one of the controller’s Operational Status is N/A, that controller went
into maintenance mode. See page 345.
With the second controller successfully installed, make the following
settings:
•
Redundancy Type to Active-Active or Active-Standby. See page 64 or
page 172.
•
LUN Affinity if you choose Active-Active redundancy. See page 122 or
page 177.
Dual Controllers and SATA Drives
If your VTrak subsystem has SATA disk drives installed, you must install an
AAMUX adapter on each of the SATA drives. Without the AAMUX adapter, SATA
drives display Not Usable under Operational Status.
Figure 1. SATA drive mounted in a drive carrier with the AAMUX adapter
SATA disk drive
AAMUX adapter
364
SAS connector
Appendix A: Useful Information
Obtain AAMUX adapters though Promise Technology. Also see “Installing Disk
Drives” on page 15.
Installing a Second Cache Battery
The cache battery comes as an assembly, with attaching screws and a wiring
harness. Install the new cache battery into the cooling unit above the new
controller.
To install a new cache battery:
1.
On the cooling unit above the new controller, press the release button and
pull the handle downward.
2.
Pull the cooling unit out of the VTrak enclosure.
3.
Loosen the thumbscrews. A retainer keeps the thumbscrews in place.
4.
Grasp the top section near the thumbscrews and lift it off the bottom section.
5.
Place the battery assembly into the bottom section of the cooling unit as
shown in Figure 2 (E610f/s) and Figure 3 (E310f/s).
6.
Install the two screws that came with the battery assembly as shown.
7.
Attach the wiring harness from the battery assembly to the circuit board in
the cooling unit as shown.
Figure 2. IE610f/s cache battery installation
Mounting screw
Attach this connector
365
Battery Assembly
Mounting screw
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Figure 3. E310f/s cache battery installation
Mounting screw
Attach this connector
Battery Assembly
Mounting screw
8.
Place the top section of the cooling unit onto the bottom section and tighten
the thumbscrews.
9.
Carefully slide the cooling unit into the enclosure.
10. Gently press the handle in and upward until it locks.
366
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
The appendix covers the following topics:
•
Before You Begin (below)
•
Installing PerfectPath (page 368)
•
Verifying Installation (page 369)
•
Running Perfect Path View (page 371)
•
Monitoring Your LUNs and Paths (page 372)
•
Features and Settings (page 377)
•
Troubleshooting (page 384)
•
Updating PerfectPath (page 385)
•
Repairing PerfectPath (page 386)
•
Removing PerfectPath (page 387)
PerfectPath is a multipathing software designed for use with Promise VTrak
E-Class RAID subsystem products and includes:
•
GUI – Graphic user interface—PerfectPath View— for easy monitoring and
settings.
•
DSM – Device-Specific Module driver.
•
Events Service – Notification service posts events to the application log.
PerfectPath supports Fibre Channel and Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
technologies.
PerfectPath runs on Windows 2003 Server and 2008 Server operating systems,
on both x86 and x64 platforms.
Before You Begin
Before you install PerfectPath on your Windows Host PC, you must:
•
Install your Fibre Channel or SAS HBA cards and their device drivers.
•
Close all computer and storage management applications, including
Computer Management, Device Manager, Disk Management, and the
Registry Editor.
•
Have Microsoft .NET Framework v2.0 or later installed on your system.
367
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Note
If you have a complex configuration, such as multiple HBAs
connected with multiple LUNs and paths to your PC, installation
can take a long time. You can choose to temporarily disconnect
your storage, install PerfectPath, then reconnect your storage to
reduce installation time.
Installing PerfectPath
To install the PerfectPath software:
1.
Download the PerfectPath installer file from the Promise website at
http://www.promise.com/support/support_eng.asp and save the installer file
to your Windows desktop.
2.
Double-click the PerfectPath.exe installer file to start the installer.
3.
In the Welcome screen, click the Next button.
4.
In the License Agreement screen, click the “I accept the terms of this license
agreement” option, then click the Next button.
5.
In the Close All Disk Management Applications screen, click the Next button.
6.
In the Ready to Install the Program screen, click the Install button.
7.
Optional. If the installer displays a Security Alert message about an unsigned
driver, click the Yes button to continue installation.
The software files install onto the system drive in the “Program
Files\Promise\PerfectPath” folder. There is no optional install location.
8.
In the Install Completed screen, click the Finish button.
9.
In the Restart message box, click the Yes button to restart your PC.
Important
Save the PerfectPath installer file in case you need to repair your
PerfectPath software in the future. See “Repairing PerfectPath” on
page 386.
368
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
Verifying Installation
Before you can verify PerfectPath installation:
•
Your Host PC must have multiple data-path connections to the VTrak
subsystem.
•
The VTrak must be fully booted.
•
The VTrak must have at least one logical drive.
See “Making Management and Data Connections” on page 19 for information
about making data connections. See “Creating a Disk Array” on page 139 or
page 189 for information about creating RAID arrays and logical drives.
You can verify Perfect Path installation on the Host PC in one of three ways:
•
Start Menu
•
Services List
•
Device Manager
Start Menu
To verify PerfectPath installation in the Start menu:
From the Start menu, choose Programs > PerfectPath > PerfectPath View.
The PerfectPath View software starts.
Services List
To verify PerfectPath installation in the Services list:
1.
From the Windows desktop, right click the My Computer icon and choose
Manage from the dropdown menu.
2.
In the Computer Management tree, click the + icon beside Services and
Applications.
3.
Click the Services icon.
4.
In the Services window, look for the PerfectPath Events Service.
If the PerfectPath Events Service is present, PerfectPath has been installed.
The Service should be Started and set to Automatic on the Local System.
Device Manager
To verify PerfectPath installation in the Device Manager:
1.
From the Windows desktop, right click the My Computer icon and choose
Manage from the dropdown menu.
2.
In the Computer Management tree, click the Device Manager icon.
3.
In the Computer Management window, click Disk drives.
369
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
4.
Under Disk drives, look for “Promise VTrak Multi-Path Disk Device” at the top
of the Disk drives list. See Figure 1.
Figure 1. Look for “Promise VTrak Multi-Path Disk Device”
When properly installed, the PerfectPath DSM driver displays one “Multi-Path
Disk Device” for each LUN on the VTrak. In the example above, there is one LUN
and four data paths.
Note that the individual paths for each LUN are also displayed on the screen,
below the Multi-Path Disk Device. If there are multiple LUNs, all of the Multi-Path
Disk Devices are displayed at the top of the list.
Note also that Individual LUNs are shown as SCSI Disk Devices, even though
the actual data connection is over Fibre Channel or SAS.
370
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
Running Perfect Path View
Running PerfectPath View includes these functions:
•
Starting PerfectPath View (page 371)
•
Quitting PerfectPath View (page 371)
Starting PerfectPath View
To start PerfectPath View:
From the Start menu, choose Programs > PerfectPath >PerfectPath View.
The PerfectPath View window opens. See Figure 2.
Figure 2. PerfectPath View window
Quitting PerfectPath View
To quit the PerfectPath View application, do one of the following actions:
•
From the System menu, choose Exit.
•
Click the Close
icon on the PerfectPath View window.
371
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Monitoring Your LUNs and Paths
Monitoring your LUNs and Paths includes these functions:
•
Viewing LUN Properties (page 372)
•
Viewing Path Properties (page 374)
•
Viewing LUN Performance Statistics (page 375)
•
Viewing Path Performance Statistics (page 375)
•
Viewing Path Performance Statistics (page 375)
Viewing LUN Properties
To view a list of all LUNs:
1.
Click a Server
2.
Click the Properties tab.
in Tree View.
The Properties tab reports:
•
System – Name, OS type, and version
•
LUNs – Name, size, serial number, and load balance policy
Move the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported
information.
372
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
To view a single LUN and all of its Paths:
1.
Click the LUN
2.
Click the Properties tab.
in Tree View.
The Properties tab reports:
•
LUNs – Name, size, and load balance policy
•
Paths – Path ID, state, and adapter name
Move the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported
information.
See also:
•
“Load Balance Policy” on page 378
•
“Refreshing the Objects” on page 382
373
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Viewing Path Properties
To view Path properties:
1.
Click a Path
2.
Click the Properties tab.
in Tree View.
The Properties tab reports:
•
SCSI Port number
•
SCSI Path ID
•
SCSI Target
•
SCSI LUN
See also:
•
“Load Balance Policy” on page 378
•
“Refreshing the Objects” on page 382
374
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
Viewing LUN Performance Statistics
To view performance statistics for a LUN:
1.
2.
Click a LUN
in Tree View.
Click the Performance tab.
The Performance tab reports the state and cumulative counts for each path
to that LUN.
Move the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported statistics.
The Performance tab reports the following data for each path:
•
Path ID
•
Bytes Written
•
State (Active or not)
•
Non-IO Requests
•
Read Requests
•
Queue Depth
•
Write Requests
•
Retries Count
•
Bytes Read
•
Failure Count
An Active state indicates this path is available to handle I/O requests.
If Active does not appear, the path is designated as Standby.
Active and Standby states are determined by Load Balance Policy.
See also:
•
“Viewing Path Performance Statistics” on page 375
•
“Load Balance Policy” on page 378
Viewing Path Performance Statistics
To view performance statistics for a Path:
1.
Click a Path
in Tree View.
2.
Click the Performance tab.
375
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
The Performance tab reports the state and cumulative counts for a specific
path.
Move the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported statistics.
The Performance tab reports the following data for each path:
•
Path ID
•
Bytes Written
•
State (Active or not)
•
Non-IO Requests
•
Read Requests
•
Queue Depth
•
Write Requests
•
Retries Count
•
Bytes Read
•
Failure Count
An Active state indicates this path is available to handle I/O requests.
If Active does not appear, the path is designated as Standby.
Active and Standby states are determined by Load Balance Policy.
See also:
•
“Viewing Path Performance Statistics” on page 375
•
“Load Balance Policy” on page 378
Clearing Path Statistics
You can Clear Path Statistics for all paths as needed for monitoring and
diagnostic purposes.
To clear the statistics for ALL paths, do one of the following actions:
•
From the Operations menu, choose Clear Path Statistics.
•
In the Tree, right-click on the LUN
from the popup menu.
376
icon, and choose Clear Path Statistics
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
Features and Settings
Features and Settings include the following functions:
•
Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy (page 377)
•
Load Balance Policy (page 378)
•
Path Verification (page 379)
•
PDO Removal (page 380)
•
Performance Tab Refresh Rate (page 381)
•
Round Robin Count (page 381)
•
Refreshing the Objects (page 382)
•
Viewing System Information (page 382)
•
Saving System Information (page 383)
Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy
The Promise MPIO solution can load balance the paths for your LUNs with load
balance policy set to Failover.
With Automatic Load Balancing enabled, the LUNs set to Failover policy are
automatically redistributed among all available paths when:
•
A path fails
•
A failed path comes back online
•
A new path is added
Automatic Load Balancing, when enabled, provides optimal data throughput for
LUNs set to Failover policy.
Note that Automatic Load Balancing has NO effect upon LUNs set to Round
Robin, Round Robin with Subset, or Least Queue Depth.
Enabling Automatic Load Balancing
To enable automatic load balancing:
From the Operations menu, choose Auto Load Balance.
When you see a check mark beside Auto Load Balance in the Operations menu,
this feature is enabled.
See also:
•
“Viewing LUN Properties” on page 372.
•
“Viewing LUN Performance Statistics” on page 375.
•
“Load Balance Policy” on page 378.
377
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Load Balance Policy
Load Balance Policy is a method of equalizing the I/O traffic over each path by
systematically dividing the load among multiple paths.
•
Failover Policy – No load balancing. With Automatic Load Balancing
disabled, the first path discovered is the primary path. I/Os follow the active
path until it fails, then they change to next available path. Each LUN uses
only one active path.
See “Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy” on page 377.
•
Round Robin Policy – I/Os follow all active paths, changing paths at the
specified I/O count. You can set the I/O count in the General tab of the
Advanced Settings dialog box.
•
Round Robin with Subset Policy – One or more paths are designated as
standby. I/Os follow all active paths, changing at the specified I/O count. You
can set the I/O count in the General tab of the Advanced Settings dialog box.
•
Least Queue Depth Policy – I/Os follow the path with the least number of
requests queued.
Note that you can enable Automatic Load Balancing for LUNs with policy set to
Failover. See “Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy” on page 377.
Changing Load Balance Policy Settings
To change load balance policy settings:
1.
Do one of the following actions:
•
From the Operations menu, choose Change Load Balance Policy.
•
In Tree View, highlight a LUN
Policy
•
and click the Change Load Balance
icon.
In Tree View, right-click a LUN
Policy from the popup menu.
and choose Change Load Balance
The Change Load Policy dialog box appears with the Load Balance Policy
tab displayed.
2.
3.
Click the option button for one of the Load Policies.
•
Failover Policy
•
Round Robin Policy
•
Round Robin with Subset Policy
•
Least Queue Depth Policy
Click the Next button.
The Path Selection tab displays.
378
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
4.
5.
Take the action appropriate for your policy selection.
•
For Round Robin and Least Queue Depth, no action is required. Skip to
step 5.
•
For Failover, move the path you want to be active to the Primary Path
Selected pane.
Move all other paths to the Path Available pane.
•
For Round Robin with Subset, move the paths you want to be active to
the Primary Path Selected pane.
Move the paths you want as standby to the Path Available pane.
You can have all paths in the Subset.
Click the Next button.
The Summary tab displays the current and selected (new) policy.
6.
Click the Finish button to apply your settings.
The new settings take effect immediately.
See also:
•
“Round Robin Count” on page 381.
•
“Refreshing the Objects” on page 382.
Path Verification
Path verification monitors any failed paths and automatically verifies them if they
become available again.
There are two Path Verification Settings:
•
Enable / disable
•
Verification period in seconds
Changing Path Verification Settings
To make path verification settings:
1.
Do one of the following actions:
•
Click the Advanced Settings
icon.
•
From the Operations menu, choose Advanced Settings.
The Advanced Settings dialog box appears with the MPIO Parameters tab
displayed.
2.
Check the Enable Path Verification box to enable path verification.
Uncheck to disable.
3.
Click the arrows or type a new value in the Path Verification Period field to
change the interval.
30 seconds is the default value.
379
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
4.
5.
Click the Apply button.
Click the OK button in the confirmation box.
The new setting takes effect immediately.
See also:
•
“Load Balance Policy” on page 378.
•
“PDO Removal” on page 380.
•
“Refreshing the Objects” on page 382.
PDO Removal
PDO removal refers to the action of deleting a multipath input/output (MPIO) disk
from the Windows Device Manager after all paths to a physical device object
(PDO) have failed.
PDO removal interval refers to the period of time in seconds between the
moment all paths to a PDO are disconnected and the MPIO disk disappears from
the Device Manager.
Changing PDO Removal Settings
To change PDO removal settings:
1.
Do one of the following actions:
•
Click the Advanced Settings
icon.
•
From the Operations menu, choose Advanced Settings.
The Advanced Settings dialog box appears with the MPIO Parameters tab
displayed.
2.
Click the arrows or type a new value in the PDO Remove Period field to
change the interval.
120 seconds is the Promise-recommended default value.
3.
4.
Click the Apply button.
Click the OK button in the confirmation box.
The new setting takes effect immediately.
See also “Path Verification” on page 379.
380
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
Performance Tab Refresh Rate
Refresh Rate refers to the number of seconds between refreshes of the data
reported on the Performance tab.
Changing Refresh Rate Settings
To change the refresh rate on the Performance tab:
1.
Do one of the following actions:
•
Click the Advanced Settings
icon.
•
From the Operations menu, choose Advanced Settings.
The Advanced Settings dialog box appears with the MPIO Parameters tab
displayed.
2.
Click the General tab.
3.
Under Refresh Rate, click the arrows or type a new value in the Seconds
field to change the interval.
5 seconds is the default value.
4.
Click the Apply button.
The new setting takes effect immediately.
See also:
•
“Viewing LUN Performance Statistics” on page 375.
•
“Viewing Path Performance Statistics” on page 375.
Round Robin Count
When you set your path Load Balance Policy to Round Robin, the I/Os follow all
active paths, changing paths at the specified I/O count. You can set the I/O count
in the General tab of the Advanced Settings dialog box.
Changing the Round Robin Count
To change Round Robin Count settings:
1.
Do one of the following actions:
•
Click the Advanced Settings
•
From the Operations menu, choose Advanced Settings.
icon.
The Advanced Settings dialog box appears with the MPIO Parameters tab
displayed.
2.
Click the General tab.
3.
Under Round Robin Count, click the arrows or type a new value in the I/Os
per Path field to change the count.
10 I/Os is the default value.
381
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
4.
Click the Apply button.
The new setting takes effect immediately.
See also:
•
“Load Balance Policy” on page 378.
•
“Viewing LUN Performance Statistics” on page 375.
•
“Viewing Path Performance Statistics” on page 375.
Refreshing the Objects
Use this function after making an addition or deletion to your LUNs or paths.
To refresh the objects, do one of the following actions:
•
From the Operations menu, choose Refresh.
•
Click the Refresh
icon.
PerfectPath automatically displays all reported changes. However, some actions
are not reported.
The Refresh action enables you to see the latest information.
See also:
•
“Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy” on page 377.
•
“Load Balance Policy” on page 378.
•
“Path Verification” on page 379.
•
“PDO Removal” on page 380.
Viewing System Information
To view System information and settings, do one of the following actions:
•
From the System menu, choose System Information.
•
Click the System Information
icon.
The System Information dialog box displays.
382
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
System information supplies information about the Host PC or Server, including:
Host Name
•
MPIO Version
•
Operating System
•
MPDEV File
•
OS Version
•
MPDEV Version
•
OS Manufacturer
•
MPSPFLTR File
•
IP Address
•
MPSPFLTR Version
•
Storport File
•
DSM File
•
Storport Version
•
DSM Version
•
•
MPIO File
Note: File information includes the file name and location of
the installed file in the server's file system.
Saving System Information
To save the current System information and settings data to a text file:
1.
Do one of the following actions:
•
From the System menu, choose System Information.
•
Click the System Information
icon.
The System Information dialog box displays.
2.
From the System Information dialog box, click the Save button.
3.
In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the
file.
4.
Type a file name into the File name field.
Append the file name with a .txt suffix.
5.
6.
Click the Save button.
Click the OK button in the confirmation box.
Your information and settings data are saved to a text file in the folder you
designated.
383
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Troubleshooting
If you see no LUNs in the PerfectPath GUI, or no Multi-Path Disk Devices under
Disk drives (see Figure 1), do the following actions:
•
Verify that there is at least one logical drive on the VTrak
•
Check your HBA cards and driver installation
•
Check your data connections
Make any needed corrections and reboot your Host PC as needed.
Figure 3. Look for “Promise VTrak Multi-Path Disk Device”
384
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
Updating PerfectPath
To update your PerfectPath software to the latest version:
1.
2.
Download the new PerfectPath installation file from the Promise website at
www.promise.com/support and save the installation file to your Windows
desktop.
Manually remove the current PerfectPath installation.
See “Removing PerfectPath” on page 387.
3.
Install the new PerfectPath software.
See “Installing PerfectPath” on page 368.
385
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Repairing PerfectPath
To implement this procedure, you must use the same PerfectPath.exe installer
file that you used to install the PerfectPath software onto your PC.
The installer’s version number is part of its file name. However, there is no
corresponding number in the PerfectPath software.
To repair the PerfectPath software:
1.
Double-click the PerfectPath.exe file to start the installer.
2.
In the Welcome screen, click the Next button.
3.
In the Program Maintenance screen, choose the Repair option, then click
the Next button.
4.
In the Ready to Repair the Program screen, click the Install button.
5.
In the Install Completed screen, click the Finish button.
6.
In the Restart message box, click the Yes button to restart your PC.
386
Appendix B: Multipathing on Windows
Removing PerfectPath
Preferred Method
To remove the PerfectPath software:
1.
From the Start menu, choose Programs > PerfectPath > Uninstall
PerfectPath.
2.
In the Welcome screen, click the Next button.
3.
In the Program Maintenance screen, choose the Remove option, then click
the Next button.
4.
In the Remove the Program screen, click the Remove button.
5.
In the Completed screen, click the Finish button.
6.
In the Restart message box, click the Yes button to restart your PC.
Alternate Method 1
To remove the PerfectPath software:
1.
In the Start menu, choose Settings, then choose Control Panel.
2.
In the Control Panel window, double-click the Add or Remove Programs
icon.
3.
In the Add or Remove Programs window, click Perfect Path, then click the
Remove button.
4.
In the Confirmation box, click the Yes button.
5.
In the Restart message box, click the Yes button to restart your PC.
Alternate Method 2
To use this procedure, the PerfectPath.exe installer file must be the same version
number as the PerfectPath software installed on your PC.
To remove the PerfectPath software:
1.
Double-click the PerfectPath.exe file to start the installer.
2.
In the Welcome screen, click the Next button.
3.
In the Program Maintenance screen, choose the Remove option, then click
the Next button.
4.
In the Remove the Program screen, click the Remove button.
5.
In the Completed screen, click the Finish button.
6.
In the Restart message box, click the Yes button to restart your PC.
387
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
388
Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux
The appendix covers the following topics:
•
Before You Begin (below)
•
Task 1: Meeting Package Requirements (page 390)
•
Task 2: Preparing the Configuration File (page 394)
•
Task 3: Making Initial Host Settings (page 396)
•
Task 4: Create and Configure Devices (page 398)
•
Task 5: Create and Mount Partitions (page 399)
•
Sample multipath.conf File (page 402)
Promise has fully tested VTrak Multipathing on RedHat RHEL 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3,
and 5.4; and SuSE SLES 10, 10 SP1, 10 SP2, 10 SP3, and 11. Coverage in this
Guide is limited to those OSes.
Multipathing is possible on other Linux OSes, in some cases with certain
limitations, kernel updates, or different versions of the device mapper or multipath
tool. Promise has not tested all of the possible combinations and therefore does
not attempt to cover them here.
Before You Begin
Before you can set up multipathing on your Linux Host PC, you must:
•
Install your Fibre Channel or SAS HBA card into the Host PC.
•
Install the HBA card drivers onto the Host PC.
•
Set up your VTrak, install your disk drives, and create your logical drives.
•
Attach your Fibre Channel or SAS cables from the HBA card to the VTrak.
•
Install RHEL 5.x with the “linux mpath” Option.
Refer to the Linux Administration Manual, your HBA documentation, and the
VTrak Quick Start Guide or Product Manual as needed for more information.
Check Initial Setup
To check your initial setup, verify that you can view the logical drives on your
VTrak from your Linux desktop or terminal window. Refer to the Linux
Administration Manual for the procedure on your system.
•
If you can see the logical drives, your system is properly configured. Go to
“Task 1: Meeting Package Requirements” on page 390.
•
If you cannot see the logical drives, make the necessary adjustments and
check again.
389
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Task 1: Meeting Package Requirements
The latest device mapper and multipath packages must be loaded onto your
Linux host before configuring Device Mapper Multipath (DM-MP). When this
document was written, the current versions were:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
For RHEL 5
•
device-mapper-1.02.13-1.el5
•
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-8.el5
For RHEL 5.1
•
device-mapper-1.02.20-1.el5
•
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-12.el5
For RHEL 5.2
•
device-mapper-1.02.24-1.el5
•
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-17.el5
For RHEL 5.3
•
device-mapper-1.02.28-2.el5
•
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-23.el5
For RHEL 5.4
•
device-mapper-1.02.32-1.el5
•
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-30.el5
For SLES 10
•
device-mapper-1.02.03-8.2.rpm
•
multipath-tools-0.4.6-25.8.rpm
For SLES 10 SP1
•
device-mapper-1.02.13-6.9
•
multipath-tools-0.4.7-34.18
For SLES 10 SP2
•
device-mapper-1.02.13-6.14
•
multipath-tools-0.4.7-34.38
For SLES 10 SP3
•
device-mapper-1.02.13-6.14
•
multipath-tools-0.4.7-34.50.10
For SLES 11
•
device-mapper-1.02.27-8.6
•
multipath-tools-0.4.8-40.1
390
Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux
Installing Packages
The easiest and most effective way to install the device mapper and multipath
tool is during OS installation. The device mapper installs by default, regardless
of the configuration you select. However, you must manually specify the
multipath tool, as it does not install as a part of any of the configurations of
either OS. The multipath tool is listed as an option under Base System.
For hosts with the OS already installed, you can add the device mapper and
multipath tool, if they are missing.
Example To add the multipath tool for RHEL 5.x, do the following actions:
1.
Open a terminal window.
2.
Type the following command and press Enter:
# rpm -ivh device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-8.el5.i386.rpm
The system returns the following lines:
Preparing...
##################### [100%]
1:device-mapper-multipath##################### [100%]
#
(or a similar message)
Important
Where possible, obtain the device mapper and multipath tool from
the original installation CDs to ensure full compatibility with your
existing OS. Refer to your OS documentation for more
information.
Verifying Packages – RedHat
To verify that the required packages are installed on the host, do the following
actions:
1.
Open a terminal window.
2.
Type the following command and press Enter:
# rpm -qa | grep device-mapper
If the required packages are present, the system returns the following lines.
RHEL 5:
device-mapper-1.02.13-1.el5
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-8.el5
391
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
RHEL 5.1:
device-mapper-1.02.20-1.el5
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-12.el5
RHEL 5.2:
device-mapper-1.02.24-1.el5
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-17.el5
RHEL 5.3:
device-mapper-1.02.28-2.el5
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-23.el5
RHEL 5.4:
device-mapper-1.02.32-1.el5
device-mapper-multipath-0.4.7-30.el5
Note that the actual version number might be different, depending on your
configuration.
Verifying Packages – SuSE
To verify that the required packages are installed on the host, do the following
actions:
1.
Open a terminal window.
2.
Type the following command and press Enter:
# rpm -qa | grep device-mapper
If the required package is present, the system returns the following line.
SLES 10:
device-mapper-1.02.03-8.2.rpm
SLES 10 SP1:
device-mapper-1.02.13-6.9
SLES 10 SP2:
device-mapper-1.02.13-6.14
SLES 10 SP3:
device-mapper-1.02.13-6.14
SLES 11:
device-mapper-1.02.27-8.6
392
Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux
Note that the actual version number might be different, depending on your
configuration.
3.
Type the following command and press Enter:
# rpm -qa | grep multipath-tools
If the required package is present, the system returns the following line.
SLES 10:
multipath-tools-0.4.6-25.8.rpm
SLES 10 SP1:
multipath-tools-0.4.7-34.18
SLES 10 SP2:
multipath-tools-0.4.7-34.38
SLES 10 SP3:
multipath-tools-0.4.7-34.50.10
SLES 11:
multipath-tools-0.4.8-40.1
Note that the actual version number might be different, depending on your
configuration.
393
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Task 2: Preparing the Configuration File
To setup multipathing with VTrak, or any other subsystem, you must provide the
required device attributes in a configuration file. The multipath configuration file is
named multipath.conf. The functional version of the file is saved in the /etc
directory.
RedHat Systems
For RedHat systems, there is a default /etc/multipath.conf file. However, the
default file does not have the required device attributes to work with VTrak.
There are also sample configuration files in the /usr/share/doc/device-mappermultipath-[version] directory:
•
multipath.conf.annotated – multipath device attributes listed and defined
•
multipath.conf.synthetic – multipath device attributes listed only
SuSE Systems
For SuSE systems, there is no default /etc/multipath.conf file.
There are sample multipath configuration files in the /usr/share/doc/packages/
multipath-tools directory:
•
multipath.conf.annotated – multipath device attributes listed and defined
•
multipath.conf.synthetic – multipath device attributes listed only
Editing a Configuration File
You must provide a configuration file with required device attributes to work with
VTrak. See the sample configuration file on page 402.
Take the following actions to prepare a configuration file:
1.
Choose an existing multipath.conf file and open the file in a text editor.
2.
Save a working copy of the file under another name.
3.
Edit the file to include the following line under defaults:
defaults {
user_friendly_names yes
}
394
Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux
4.
Edit the file to include the following lines under devices:
devices {
device {
vendor
product
path_grouping_policy
getuid_callout
path_checker
path_selector
hardware_handler
failback
rr_weight
rr_min_io
no_path_retry
features
product_blacklist
}
}
5.
"Promise"
"VTrak"
multibus
"/sbin/scsi_id -g -u -s /block/%n"
readsector0
"round-robin 0"
"0"
immediate
uniform
100
20
"1 queue_if_no_path"
"VTrak V-LUN"
Edit the file to include the following lines under devnode_blacklist:
devnode_blacklist {
devnode "^sda$"
devnode "^(ram|raw|loop|fd|md|dm-|sr|scd|st)[0-9]*"
devnode "^hd[a-z]"
devnode "^cciss!c[0-9]d[0-9]*"
}
6.
Be sure all the relevant lines of your configuration file are uncommented.
Remove the # character from the beginning of the line.
7.
Save the file as multipath.conf.
8.
Place a copy of the multipath.conf file into the Host’s /etc directory.
395
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Task 3: Making Initial Host Settings
After the packages and configuration file are installed, the Host is ready to accept
multipath settings.
Setting the Daemon to Run – RHEL 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, and 5.4
This action requires RHEL installation with the “linux mpath” Option. See “Before
You Begin” on page 389.
To set the MP daemon to run at boot time:
1.
Open a terminal window.
2.
Verify that /etc/rc.d/rc[3~5].d/ has a symbolic link to
/etc/rc.d/init.d/multipathd. Also see the Note below.
Run the command:
# ls -al /etc/rc.d/rc[3~5].d/ | grep multipathd
3.
If there is no symbolic link, run the command:
# cd /etc/rc.d/rc[3~5].d/
Then run the command:
# ln -s /etc/rc.d/init.d/multipathd S13multipathd
Note: /etc/rc.d/rc[3~5].d saves a link to start at each run level:
•
Run level 3 is for a single user.
•
Run level 4 is for multiple users.
•
Run level 5 is for multiple users on X Windows.
Setting the Daemon to Run – SLES 10, 10 SP1, 10 SP2,
10 SP3, and 11
To set the MP daemon to run at boot time:
1.
Open a terminal window.
2.
Set the daemon to run at boot time.
# chkconfig multipathd on
The system does not return anything.
Verifying the Modules are Loaded
To verify that the DM-MP modules are loaded:
1.
Open a terminal window.
396
Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux
2.
Verify that the multipath module is loaded.
# lsmod | grep dm_multipath
If the module is loaded, the system returns:
dm_multipath 215770 (or a similar message)
3.
Verify that the device mapper module is loaded.
# lsmod | grep dm_mod
If the module is loaded, the system returns:
dm_mod 56537 8 dm_snapshot... (or a similar message)
Verifying the Daemon is Running
To verify that the MP daemon is running:
1.
Open a terminal window.
2.
Check the daemon’s status.
# /etc/init.d/multipathd status
3.
Do one of the following actions:
•
If the system returns:
multipathd is running (or a similar message)
Go to “Task 4: Create and Configure Devices” on page 398.
•
If the system returns:
multipathd is stopped (or a similar message)
Start the MP daemon.
# /etc/init.d/multipathd start
Then go to “Task 4: Create and Configure Devices” on page 398.
397
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Task 4: Create and Configure Devices
This step applies the settings from the multipath.config file to the Host.
1.
Open a terminal window.
2.
Type the following command and press Enter:
#multipath -v3
The system returns:
...
==== paths list ====
uuid
hcil
dev dev_t pri dm_st chk_st vend...
222490001555459b3b 2:0:0:0 sdb 8:16 1
[undef][undef] Prom...
222b40000155a75b49 2:0:0:2 sbc 8:32 1
[undef][undef] Prom...
20efcff5501000121a 3:0:0:0 sbd 8:48 1
[undef][undef] Prom...
222b44000155ebf0c 3:0:0:1 sde 8:64 1
[undef][undef] Prom...
params = 1 que_if_no_path 0 1 1 round-robin 0 1 1 8:64 100
status = 1 0 0 1 1 A 0 1 0 8:64 A 0
sde: mask = 0x4
sde: path checker = readsector0 (controller setting)
sde: state = 2
...
(or a similar message)
3.
Restart the MP daemon.
#/etc/init.d/multipathd restart
The system returns:
Stopping multipathd daemon (or a similar message)
Starting multipathd daemon (or a similar message)
For more information about path monitoring functions, type help and press
Enter.
398
Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux
Task 5: Create and Mount Partitions
This step creates partitions on the logical drives in the VTrak subsystem. Then it
creates partitions and a file system to work with the device mapper. Finally, it
mounts the partition on the Host.
1.
Open a terminal window.
2.
Run a multipath list to identify the SCSI devices.
# multipath -list
The system returns:
22249000155459b3b dm-0 Promise,VTrak E610s
[size-16.0G][features=1 queue_if_no_path][hwhandler=0]
\_ round-robin 0 [prio-2][active]
\_ 3:0:0:0 sdd 8:48 [active][ready]
\_ 3:0:1:0 sdb 8:16 [active][ready]
222b4000155a75b49 dm-1 Promise,VTrak E610s
[size-12.0G][features=1 queue_if_no_path][hwhandler=0]
\_ round-robin 0 [prio=2][active]
\_ 3:0:1:1 sde 8:64 [active][undef]
\_ 3:0:0:1 sdc 8:32 [active][undef]
Note the multipath devices, circled in the example above. They are used in
steps 3 through 5.
3.
To partition each SCSI device using fdisk.
# fdisk /dev/mapper/22249000155459b3b
Enter the appropriate commands in fdisk to build your partition.
Refer to the fdisk online help for more information.
4.
Create corresponding partitions on each DM device (under /dev/mapper)
using kpartx.
# ls /dev/mapper
The system returns:
22249000155459b3b
222b4000155a75b49 control
# kpartx -a /dev/mapper/22249000155459b3b
The system does not return anything.
Repeat the command for the other multipath devices.
399
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
5.
List the DM device partitions.
In this example we make two partitions on 22249000155459b3b.
# ls /dev/mapper
The system returns:
22249000155459b3b
22249000155459b3bp1
22249000155459b3bp2
222b4000155a75b49
control
The number of multipath partitions (22249000155459b3bp1,
22249000155459b3bp2, etc.) in the list depends on:
•
The number of LUNs (SCSI devices) in your VTrak subsystem
•
The number of partitions you created using fdisk
These partition numbers are used in the next step.
6.
Create a file system on the DM device partition.
# mkfs.ext3 /dev/mapper/22249000155459b3bp1
The system returns:
mke2fs 1.39 (29-May-2006)
Filesystem label=
OS type: Linux
Block size=4096 (log=2)
Fragment size=4096 (log=2)
1028160 inodes, 2056312 blocks
102815 blocks (5.00%) reserved for super user
First data block=0
8 block groups
Maximum filesystem blocks=2109734912
63 block groups
32768 blocks per group, 32768 fragments per group
16320 inodes per group
Superblock backups stored on blocks:
32768, 98304, 163840, 229376, 294912, 819200...
Writing inode tables: done
Creating journal (32768 blocks): done
Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting inform...
400
Appendix C: Multipathing on Linux
This filesystem will be automatically checked every ...
180 days, whichever comes first. Use tune2fs -c or ...
(or a similar message)
7.
Mount the partition to a convenient location on the Host.
# mount /dev/mapper/22249000155459b3bp1 /mnt/temp
This command is only an example.
401
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
Sample multipath.conf File
Below is a complete multipath.conf file for VTrak.
If you have no other multipath devices on your Host, you can use this
multipath.conf file as shown.
If you have other multipath devices, add these settings to your exsiting
multipath.conf file.
##
## This is a template multipath-tools configuration file
## for the Promise VTrak subsystem
##
defaults {
user_friendly_names
yes
}
blacklist {
devnode "^sda$"
devnode "^(ram|raw|loop|fd|md|dm-|sr|scd|st)[0-9]*"
devnode "^hd[a-z][[0-9]*]"
devnode "^cciss!c[0-9]d[0-9]*[p[0-9]*]"
}
devices {
device {
vendor
"Promise"
product
"VTrak"
path_grouping_policy multibus
getuid_callout
"/sbin/scsi_id -g -u -s /block/%n"
path_checker
readsector0
path_selector
"round-robin 0"
hardware_handler
"0"
failback
immediate
rr_weight
uniform
rr_min_io
100
no_path_retry
20
features
"1 queue_if_no_path"
product_blacklist
"VTrak V-LUN"
}
}
402
Index
Numerics
10GB Truncate 123, 177,
2 TB Limitation 288, 354
B
293
background activities
deleting schedule 73
list of scheduled 72
running 71
scheduling 72
settings 70, 216
view 69
battery
checking 128, 182
failure 344
LED 313
reconditioning 128, 183
replace 265
reported events 321, 322
BBU, reported events 323
blower, reported events 322
boot the subsystem 118, 243
browser, does not connect 351
BSMI Statement 9
buzzer
settings 129, 247
silence 129, 308
sounding 307, 336
test 130
A
AAMUX adapter 16, 364
about this manual 1
Active-Active 64, 172, 364
adaptive writeback cache
defined 289
setting 123, 178
add
controller 363
LUN map 94, 221
alarm
cancel 129, 247, 308
sounds 307, 336
alias
controller 122, 177
disk array 145, 146, 192, 199
logical drive 51, 142, 154, 192
physical drive 134, 186
subsystem 64, 172
architectural description 4
array incomplete, reported events
335
C
Auto Fix 73, 156, 206
Auto Rebuild
enable 70, 216
function 148, 337
automatic load balancing 377
axles
RAID 50 51, 142, 146, 192,
cable, RJ11-to-DB9 36, 166
Cache Mirroring
defined 290
setting 65, 172
cancel alarm 129, 247, 308
capacity coercion
defined 293
setting 123, 177
capacity, specify for logical drive
199, 281
51, 142, 146, 192,
199, 283
RAID 60
51, 142, 146, 192, 199
CE statement 9
change RAID level
403
147, 196, 294
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
check table, logical drive 156, 205
CIM
service 105, 234
settings 104, 233
circle-icon port 23, 24, 29, 32, 33,
controller, cont.
failover and failback 291
forced read ahead cache 123,
178
heartbeat LED 37, 309
host cache flushing 123, 177
information 121, 176
locate 120, 178
maintenance mode 345
management port settings 82,
90
clear statistics 115, 239
clear tab, controller 124
CLI 39, 167, 168
CLU
log in 168
log out 169
main menu 168
online help 169
problem reporting 315
purpose 353
serial connection 39, 166
SSH connection 167
Telnet connection 167
Command Line Interface, see CLI
Command Line Utility, see CLU
command queuing, physical drives
208
N/A status 120, 176, 345, 364
replace 269, 270
reported events 323, 324, 325
settings 122, 177
statistics 122
status LED 314
unsaved data in cache 352
view 120
cooling unit
LED 313
status 126, 179, 181
counter-sink screws 16
create 48
disk array 139, 189, 291
logical drive 145
spare drive 160, 201
user 76, 225
critical
disk array 144, 194
logical drive 152
132, 185
configuration script
export 109
import 111
configuration status, physical drive
133
connections
power 37
problems 348
serial 36
connector, RJ45 348
controller
adaptive writeback cache 123
adding second 363
alias 122, 177
cache flush interval 123, 177
clear tab 124
dual controllers and SATA
drive 364
D
DAS
Fibre Channel 21
no single point of failure 33
SAS 27
data port, SAS 27, 29, 33, 90
data/cascade port, SAS 27, 29,
33, 90
404
Index
date and time, subsystem
41, 43,
disk array, cont.
PDM 150, 197, 198
physical drive selection
65, 174
DB9 connector 36
dedicated spare drive 159,
50,
142, 192
rebuild 148, 196, 337
rebuilding 145, 194
reported events 323
settings 145, 194, 195
synchronizing 144, 194
transition 150
transport 151, 195
transport ready 145, 194
view 139
160,
161, 201, 202, 294
default settings, restore 114, 240
definitions, FC properties 86, 212
delete
disk array 144, 193
initiator 94, 221
logical drive 147, 200
spare drive 161
user 80, 228
deleting schedule, background
activities 73
DHCP server changed IP address
disk drive
carrier 16
installing 15
disk status LED 38, 125, 310, 336,
351
diamond-icon port 23,
24, 29, 32,
337, 338
33, 90
dirty cache LED 314
Discover button 62
disk array
advanced creation
DMA mode, SATA drives 132, 185
DNS server, UPS unit 137, 223
download firmware image file 249,
254
50, 142,
drive slot numbering
192
alias 145, 146, 192, 199
automatic creation 49, 140,
190
create 48, 139, 189, 291
critical 144, 194, 336
delete 144, 193
expand 147, 196
expansion 300
express creation 49, 140, 191
incomplete array 195
information 144, 194
locate 198
manual rebuild 149
Media Patrol 149
migrate 147, 196
offline 336
operational status 144, 194
15
E
edit LUN map 95, 221
email
problem reports 318
service setting 98, 229
test message 78, 98
user setting 77, 227
enable LUN masking 94, 220
enclosure
information 126, 179
locate 125, 183
overheat 343
reported events 324
settings 127, 180
temperature 126, 179
topology 126, 183
405
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
enclosure, cont.
view 125, 179
voltage 126, 179, 182
error block threshold 70, 217
event log
clear 68, 69, 218, 219
NVRAM 218, 315
problem reporting 318
reported events 324
runtime 66, 218, 315
save 67, 69
event notification
response 321
service setting 98
severity 78, 236
user setting 77
expand disk array 147, 196
expansion ranges 300
export
configuration script 109
user database 108
Fibre Channel, cont.
definitions 86, 212
HBA card 19, 21, 24, 88
initiator 88, 158, 213
JBOD expansion 23
logged-in devices 88, 210
no single point of failure 24
node information 84, 210
port settings 84, 85, 210
port statistics 86, 212
reported events 325
SAN 19
SAN No Single Point of Failure
24
switch 19, 24, 88
topology 86, 211
firmware image file, download 249,
254
firmware update
from PC 251
from TFTP server 250, 254
WebPAM PROe 249, 254
firmware version 113, 238
flash image information 113, 238
flush interval, controller cache 123,
F
failed
battery 344
physical drive 340
power supply 342, 344
power supply fan 343
failover and failback
defined 291
LUN Affinity 292
failure recovery, physical drive 336
FCC statement 9
Features
highlights 5
operational 6
subsystem and controller 6
system management 7
Fibre Channel
connections 349
DAS 21
177
force online/offline 135, 187
forced read ahead cache 123, 178
forced unlock 74, 174
FRU
status LED 37, 309, 310
VPD 127, 180
full initialization 155, 205
G
GB Truncate 123, 177, 293
global spare drive 159, 160,
161,
201, 202, 294
GOST-R statement 10
Group Rounding 123, 177,
406
293
Index
H
installing
disk drives 15
PerfectPath 368
Internet access, WebPAM PROe
HBA card
Fibre Channel 19, 21, 24
SAS 27, 29, 33
Head Unit 125, 126, 184, 250,
52, 354
IP address
defaults 40
DHCP or static 40
DHCP server changed 351
email server 98, 229
maintenance mode 41, 42, 45,
251, 254
heartbeat LED 37, 309
host cache flushing 123, 177
hot spare drive 294, 336
I
83, 209
import
configuration script 111
user database 110
incomplete array 195, 339
inconsistent block table 157
information
controller 121, 176
disk array 144, 194
enclosure 126, 179
Fibre Channel node 84, 210
flash image 113, 238
FRU VPD 127, 180
logical drive 152, 163, 204
physical drive 133, 186
SAS port settings 90, 214
subsystem 64
UPS unit 138, 224
initialization
defined 293
rate 70, 217
initialize logical drive 155, 205
initiator
delete 94, 221
Fibre Channel 88, 158, 213
Fibre Channel, add 89, 93,
management port 54
Netsend recipient 106, 235
UPS unit 137, 223
virtual management port 41,
46, 208, 349, 351
IRAM statement 10
J
23, 24, 32, 33,
126, 183, 184
JBOD expansion
K
KCC statement
10
L
language selection, WebPAM
PROe 47, 56
LED
battery 313
controller 37, 309, 353
controller status 121, 178, 314
cooling unit 313
dirty cache 121, 178, 314,
352
213, 220
SAS 91, 158, 215
SAS, add 92, 93, 215, 220
disk status 38, 125, 310, 336,
337, 338
Ethernet connector
fan 313
407
349
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
LED, cont.
FRU status 37, 309, 310, 353
heartbeat 37, 309, 353
logical drive 37, 309, 336
power 37, 309, 353
power supply 313
power/activity 38, 310
red or amber 309
RJ45 connector 349
Linux, device mapper multipath
logical drive, cont.
critical 152
delete 147, 200
information 152, 163, 204
initialize 155, 205
LED 37, 336
locate 207
LUN 157
offline 153
partition and format 294
RAID level 51, 142, 146, 192
rebuilding 152
Redundancy Check 155, 206
reported events 326
settings 154, 205, 292
statistics 154, 204
status 152
Summary 163
synchronization 153
synchronizing 152
transport ready 153
view list of all 163
LUN
affinity 51, 123, 143, 146,
390
load balance policy 378
locate
controller 120, 178
disk array 198
enclosure 125, 183
logical drive 207
physical drive 131, 133, 188
power supply 126, 179, 181
spare drive 159
lock
releasing 74, 174
renewing 74, 174
setting 74, 173
subsystem 73, 173
view status 73, 173
log in
CLI 39, 346, 347, 351
WebPAM PROe 46, 54
log out
CLU 169
other users 81
WebPAM PROe 52, 61
logged-in devices, Fibre Channel
154, 177, 364
affinity, defined 291
logical drive 157
map, add 94, 221
map, edit 95, 221
map, view 94, 220
masking, enable 94, 220
performance statistics, view
375
properties
372
88, 210
logical drive
alias 51, 142, 154, 192
capacity 51, 142, 146, 192,
M
MAC address 40
main menu, CLU 168
maintenance mode 41,
199
check table
create 145
156, 205
44, 82,
208, 345
management port, virtual
408
40
Index
network switch 19, 21, 24, 27, 29,
Media Patrol
defined 301
enable 50, 70, 142, 192, 195,
33
no single point of failure 24, 33
NTP
settings 66, 175
synchronizing 66, 175
numbering drive slots 15
NVRAM event log 218, 315
216
reported events 327
run 71, 149, 173
schedule 72
medium error threshold, physical
drives 132, 185
MIB files 363
migrate
disk array 147, 196
rate 70, 216
reported events 330
mixing SATA and SAS drives 141,
O
offline
logical drive 153
physical drive 340
online capacity expansion
defined 294
implementing 147, 196
reported events 327
online help
CLU 169
WebPAM PROe 58
operational status, disk array
191
MPIO, see multipathing
multipath.config file 394, 402
multipathing, Linux
config file, edit 394
config file, sample 402
daemon, RHEL 396
daemon, SLES 396
devices 398
modules 396
packages 391
partitions 399
rpm 391
multipathing, Windows, see
PerfectPath
orphan watermark 124, 176
overheated enclosure 343
overview of VTrak 2
P
partition and format 294
password
CLI/CLU 39, 168
CLU 227
WebPAM PROe 46, 54, 79
path
performance statistics 375
properties 374
verification 379
Pause On Error 73, 156, 206
PDM
defined 302
enable 50, 142, 192, 195
N
Netsend
event reporting to Windows
355
recipients 106, 235
requirements 106, 235
service 106, 235
settings 105, 235
network interface card (NIC)
144,
194
19,
21, 24, 27, 29, 33
409
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
PDM, cont.
rate 70, 217
reported events 328
running 71, 150, 197
triggers 70, 217, 302
PDO removal 380
PerfectPath
automatic load balancing 377
before you begin 367
clear path statistics 376
install 368
load balance policy 378
LUN performance statistics
physical drive, cont.
configuration status 186
configurational status 133
DMA mode 132, 185
failed 340
failure recovery 336
force offline or online 135, 187
global settings 132, 185
information 133, 186
installing 15
list 131, 185
locate 131, 133, 188
medium error threshold 132,
375
185
LUN properties 372
MPIO events 375
path performance statistics
not usable 340
operational status 133, 186
read cache 132, 185
reported events 328
select for array 50, 142, 192
select for spare 160
settings 134, 186
stale and PFA condition 134,
375
path properties 374
path verification 379
PDO removal 380
performance tab refresh rate
381
187, 337, 340
quit 371
refresh objects 382
remove 387
repair 386
round robin count 381
start 371
system information 382
troubleshooting 384
update 385
verify installation 369
PFA condition 134, 187
physical device object, see PDO
physical drive
AAMUX 16
alias 134, 186
capacity coercion 123, 177,
statistics 133, 186
supported 353
write cache 132, 185
popup messages 318
port
circle icon 23, 24, 29, 32, 33,
90
diamond icon
SAS expansion 23, 24, 32, 33
SAS IN 23, 24, 32, 33
SAS OUT 23, 24, 32, 33
port settings
Fibre Channel 85, 210
SAS 90, 214
port statistics
Fibre Channel 86, 212
SAS 91, 215
293
command queuing
23, 24, 29, 32,
33, 90
132, 185
410
Index
power
connection 37
LED 37, 309
power supply
failed 342, 344
fan failure 343
LED 313
locate 126, 181
replace 259
reported events 330
status 126, 179, 180
power supply fan reported events
RAID, cont.
striping of distributed parity
280
striping of double parity 282
RAID levels
changing 294
choosing 284
logical drive 51, 142, 146, 192
RAID 0
applications 284
description 274
RAID 1
applications 284
description 275
RAID 10
applications 286
description 279
RAID 1E
applications 285
description 276
RAID 5
applications 285
description 277
RAID 50
applications 286
description 280
RAID 6
applications 285
description 278
RAID 60
applications 286
description 282
read cache
physical drive 132, 185
policy 51, 143, 146, 154, 193,
330
power/activity LED 38, 310
Predictive Data Migration 302
preferred controller ID 154, 193,
199
privileges
CLU user 226
WebPAM PROe user 77
problem reporting
CLU 315
WebPAM PROe 318, 336
Q
quick initialization
155, 205
R
rack mounting 12
RAID
block and double parity stripe
278
block and parity stripe 277
enhanced mirror 276
introduction 273
mirror 275
mirror + stripe 279
stripe 274
199
policy, defined 289
read check table 157
reassigned block threshold 70, 217
411
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
rebuild
disk array 148, 196, 337
manual 149
rate 70, 216
reported events 331
rebuilding
disk array 145, 194
logical drive 152
recipients, Netsend 106, 235
recondition a battery 128, 183
red X 308, 318, 342
Redundancy Check 73, 155, 206
rate 70, 217
reported events 332
schedule 72
redundancy, subsystem 64, 172
refresh objects, PerfectPath 382
regulatory statements 9
releasing lock 74, 174
renewing lock 74, 174
replace
battery 265
blower 260
controller 269, 270
fan 260
power supply 259
reported events
array incomplete 335
battery 321, 322
BBU 323
blower 322
controller 323, 324, 325
disk array 323
enclosure 324
event log 324
Fibre Channel 325
logical drive 326
Media Patrol 327
online capacity expansion 327
PDM 328
physical drive 328
reported events, cont.
power supply 330
power supply fan 330
RAID level migration 330
rebuild 331
Redundancy Check 332
resource not available 332
SMART error 333
Spare Check 332
spare drive 333
stripe level migration 333
synchronization 334
system 334
transition 334
watermark 335
resource not available reported
event 332
restart the subsystem 119, 245,
252, 255–258
restore default settings 114, 240
returning product for repair 360
revertible spare drive 150, 159,
160, 161, 201, 202, 303
RJ11-to-DB9 cable 11, 36, 166
RJ45 connector 348
round robin count 381
running background activities 71
runtime event log 66, 218, 315
S
SAN
Fibre Channel 19
no single point of failure 24
SAS
Cascade 29
connections 350
DAS 27
DAS No Single Point of Failure
33
data port
412
27, 29, 33, 90
Index
SAS, cont.
data/cascade port 27,
settings, cont.
NTP 66, 175
physical drive 134, 186
physical drives 132, 185
restore default 114, 240
SLP 99, 230
SNMP 102, 232
spare drive 161, 202
SSH 102, 231
Telnet 101, 231
temperature 127, 180
UPS units 137, 223
user 78, 79, 226, 227
virtual management port 82,
29, 33,
90
expansion port 23, 24, 32, 33
HBA card 27, 29, 33
IN port 23, 24, 32, 33
initiator 91, 158, 215
JBOD expansion 32
no single point of failure 33
OUT port 23, 24, 32, 33
port settings 90, 214
port statistics 91, 215
SATA and SAS drives, mixing 141,
191
208
saving system information
PerfectPath 383
WebPAM PROe 116
scheduling background activities
Web Server 100, 230
severity of events 78, 236
SFP information 87, 211
shutdown the subsystem 117,
SLP
service 99, 230
settings 99, 230
SMART
error 333
setting 123, 177
SNMP
MIB files 363
service 103, 232
settings 102, 232
trap sinks 103, 232
Software Services 98
Spare Check
reported events 332
run 162, 202
schedule 72
spare drive
create 160, 201
defined 294
delete 161
how used 336
locate 159
72
sector size
defined 287
setting 51, 143, 146, 193, 199
serial connection
cable 36
setting up 39, 166
UPS 36
setting lock 74, 173
settings
background activities 70, 216
buzzer 129, 247
CIM 104, 233
controller 122, 177
controller management port
82, 208
disk array 145, 194, 195
email 98, 229
enclosure 127, 180
event notification 77, 98
Fibre Channel ports 85, 210
logical drive 154, 205, 292
Netsend 105, 235
413
241
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
spare drive, cont.
reported events 333
select physical drive 160
settings 161, 202
Spare Check 162, 202
transition 150
view 159
specifications, VTrak 8
SSH
connection 167
service 102, 231
settings 102, 231
stale condition 134, 187
statistics
clear 115, 239
controller 122, 176
Fibre Channel 86, 212
logical drive 154, 204
path, clear 376
physical drive 133, 186
SAS 91, 215
status
controller 120, 176
cooling unit 126, 179, 181
Fibre Channel 84
logical drive 152, 204
physical drive 133, 186
power supply 126, 179, 180
spare drive 159
subsystem lock 73, 173
Storage Network 62
stripe level migration reported
event 333
stripe size
defined 287
setting 51, 143, 146, 192, 199
subsystem
alias 64, 172
cascading 29, 126, 183, 184
date and time 41, 43, 65, 174
fully booted 353
subsystem, cont.
information 64
lock 73, 74, 173
logging into 62
maintenance 249
management port settings
82,
208
redundancy 64, 172
restart 119, 245, 252,
255–
258
service report, save as HTML
file 64, 116
shutdown 117, 241
startup after shutdown 118,
243
storage network 62
synchronization
disk array 144, 194
logical drive 152, 153
new logical drive 147
rate 70, 217
reported events 334
synchronizing NTP 66, 175
system information, save 116, 383
system reported event 334
T
Table Rounding 123, 177, 293
Technical Support, contact 355
Telnet
connection 167
service 101, 231
settings 101, 231
temperature
enclosure 126, 179
thresholds 127, 181
terminal emulation program 39,
166
test
buzzer 130
email 78, 98
414
Index
TFTP server 250, 254
timing out, WebPAM PROe
topology
enclosure 126, 183
Fibre Channel 86, 211
Transition
automatic 305
defined 303
manual 305
rate 70, 217
reported events 334
spare drive 150
transport
disk array 151, 195
transport ready
defined 145, 194
logical drive 153
trap sinks 103, 232
username and password
CLI/CLU 39, 168
WebPAM PROe 46, 54
353
V
view
background activities 69, 216
controllers 120, 176
disk arrays 139, 189
enclosure 125, 179
Fibre Channel logged in
devices 88, 210
Fibre Channel port settings 84,
210
Fibre Channel port statistics
86, 212
list of all logical drives 163,
204
lock status 73, 173
LUN map 94, 220
LUN performance statistics
U
unpacking the VTrak 11
UPS
information 138, 224
list of units 136, 222
serial port 36
settings 137, 223
user
create 76, 225
database, export 108
database, import 110
delete 80, 228
enable/disable 78, 226
event notification 77
logout others 81
password, change 79, 227
privileges 77, 226
settings 78, 79, 226, 227
view 76, 225
view sessions 80
375
LUN properties 372
MPIO events 375
path performance statistics
375
path properties 374
physical drives 131, 185
scheduled activities 72, 216
SFP information 87, 211
spare drives 159, 201
system information 382
users 76, 225
virtual management port 40, 82,
208, 351
voltage, enclosure 126, 179, 182
VTrak
architectural description 4
beeping 307, 336
features and benefits 5
mounting in a rack 12
415
VTrak E-Class Product Manual
VTrak, cont.
multipathing
Linux 389
Windows 367
overview 2
specifications 8
unpacking 11
warranty 9, 358
WebPAM PROe, cont.
Header 58
initial setup using 46
interface 57
language selection 47, 56
log in 46, 54
log out 52, 61
Management View 59
no browser connection 351
problem reporting 318, 336
times out 353
Tree View 58
username and password 46,
W
warranty, VTrak 358
watermark
orphan 124, 176
reported events 335
Web Server
service 101, 230
settings 100, 230
WebPAM PROe
access over the Internet
54
write cache policy 154, 193,
defined 289
physical drive 132, 185
write check table 157
52,
Y
354
Event Frame 60
yellow !
416
308, 318, 342
199
Download PDF